Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutB11-0496 Project Manual Volume 2 approvedPROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 OF 3 Strata Vail Vail, Colorado 100% Issue for Construction December 20, 2013 OZ Architecture 3003 Larimer Street Denver, Colorado OZ Project No. 17004 Received By Lynne Campbell at 11:01 am, Jan 13, 2014 B11-0701 Reviewed for Code Compliance Code: 2012 International Building Code (IBC) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DOCUMENT 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 00001 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00002 PROJECT DIRECTORY SERIES 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 00220 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING 00221 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY 01230 ALTERNATES 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01420 REFERENCES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 02230 SITE CLEARING 02240 DEWATERING SYSTEM 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 02315 LEAN CONCRETE/FLOW-FILL 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02580 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION CONDUITS, AND GAS SYSTEMS 02630 STORM DRAINAGE 02720 UNBOUND BASE COURSE 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT 02751 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02752 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02753 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 02754 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02760 PAVEMENT MARKING 02780 UNIT PAVERS 02815 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02900 LANDSCAPING 02901 SOIL AMENDMENT 02922 TOPSOIL DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03542 HYDRAULIC- CEMENT- BASED UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04814 CONCRETE MASONRY 04816 MASONRY ACCESSORIES, ANCHORAGE, AND REINFORCING 04851 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04860 STONE MASONRY STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05310 STEEL DECK 05400 COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05511 METAL STAIRS 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05530 AREAWAY GRATINGS 05532 ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05715 FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS 05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06130 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06150 WOOD DECKING 06160 SHEATHING 06185 STRUCTURAL GLUED- LAMINATED LUMBER 06201 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07131 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07142 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07180 CONCRETE SEALERS 07182 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07412 METAL SIDING 07413 METAL ROOF PANELS 07460 SIDING 07531 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07570 TRAFFIC BEARING MEMBRANES 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07811 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07812 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION 07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07842 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07920 JOINT SEALANTS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO VOLUME 2 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08120 ALUMINUM DOORS 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08263 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08334 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08452 STEAM ROOM DOORS 08550 WOOD WINDOWS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING 08830 MIRRORS 08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08952 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09310 CERAMIC TILE 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09622 RESILIENT SPORTS- FLOOR COVERINGS 09640 WOOD FLOORING 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09671 EPOXY FLOOR COATING 09680 CARPET 09681 CARPET TILE 09770 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 09920 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (GARAGE) 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS OZ Product Information - Unit Finishes OZ Product Information – Public Space Finishes STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10310 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES 10431 SIGNAGE 10440 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10506 WOOD LOCKERS 10508 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11110 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12364 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12375 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13150 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14560 CHUTES STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO VOLUME 3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15030 HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15240 MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15300 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15500 HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15550 BOILERS 15600 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15650 REFRIGERATION 15655 REFRIGERANT AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 15750 HEAT TRANSFER 15770 SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15780 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15975 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15980 MECHANICAL SEQUENCES OF OPERATION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16035 REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES 16055 TEMPORARY LIGHTING POWER 16060 IDENTIFICATION 16065 TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS 16102 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16120 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16122 FIRE SEALS 16125 ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS 16132 POKE THROUGH AND FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16160 PANELBOARDS 16165 LOAD CENTERS 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16175 MODULAR METER CENTERS 16181 FUSES 600 VOLTS AND LESS 16400 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) 16403 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16440 SWITCHBOARDS 16450 GROUNDING SYSTEMS 16470 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER 16490 TRANSFER SWITCHES 16500 LUMINARIES AND ACCESSORIES 16601 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16735 CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16858 ROOF, GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS SNOWMELT SYSTEMS 16930 LIGHTING CONTROL 16940 CONTACTORS DIVISION 19 – SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 19591 SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM END OF DOCUMENT 00001 12/20/2013 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110 - 1 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO SECTION 08110 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing hollow metal doors and frames, including transom frames, sidelight and window frames with provision for glazed, paneled or louvered openings, fire labeled and non-labeled, as scheduled. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. C. RELATED SECTIONS 1. 08210 – Wood Doors 2. 08212 – Stile & Rail Wood Doors 3. 08710 – Door Hardware 4. 08800 – Glass Glazing 5. 09900 – Painting 6. Division 16 – Access Control 1.02 REFERENCES A. STANDARDS 1. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows 2. ANSI/SDI-100 – Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors an Frames 3. SDI-105 – Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 4. SDI-107 – Hardware on Steel Doors (reinforcement application) 5. ANSI-A250.4 – Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance 6. UL10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies B. CODES 1. NFPA-101 – Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2003 – International Building Code 3. ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities 4. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110 - 2 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1. Submit copies of the hollow metal door and frame shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. B. PRODUCT DATA 1. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door and frame types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and door openings as those on the contract documents. Shop drawings should include the following information: a. Material thickness and/or gauge. b. Door core material. c. Mortises and reinforcements. d. Anchorage types. e. Locations of exposed fasteners. f. Glazed, louvered and paneled openings. g. Mounting locations of standard hardware. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his consultant. B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS 1. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Steel Door Institute (SDI). C. FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES 1. All labeled fire door assemblies to be of a type that have been classified and listed in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA80 and test in compliance with NFPA-252, and UL10C. A physical label is to be affixed to the fire door at an authorized facility; embossed labels are acceptable on standard 3 sided door frames. 2. For openings required to be fire rated exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer’s certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 3. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with hardware and other door manufacturers to ensure that total opening STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110 - 3 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. a. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS 1. A recognized supplier who has maintained an office and has been furnishing material in the project’s vicinity for a period of at least two (2) years. The supplier shall have warehouse and shop facilities to accommodate this project and must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified herein. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The supplier shall deliver all materials to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand. Supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor. B. Deliver doors cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and jobsite storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to any factory-finished doors. Mark all doors and frames with opening numbers as shown on the contract documents and shop drawings. C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. Otherwise, remove and replace damaged goods as directed. D. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry and secure place. 1. Place units on minimum 4” high wood blocking. 2. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. 4. Provide 1/4” spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard hollow metal doors and frames by one of the following: 1. Steelcraft Company STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110 - 4 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 2. Ceco Corporation 3. Curries Company 2.02 MATERIALS A. All doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality cold rolled steel per ASTM-A366 and A568 general requirements; galvanized to A60 or G60 or galvanealed to A40 minimum coating weight standard per ASTM-A924. Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM-A569. B. Supports and anchors shall be fabricated of not less that 18-gauge sheet steel, galvanized where galvanized frames are used. C. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, inserts, bolts and fasteners shall be hot dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM-A153, Class C or D as applicable. D. Rust inhibitive enamel or paint primer shall be used, baked on, and suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, “Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces on Steel Doors and Frames.” E. Provide all hollow metal doors and frames receiving electrified hardware with molex wiring harness and concealed plug connectors on one end to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate molex connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electrified hardware and the electric hinge. F. Where specified supply embossed steel doors with wood grain appearance. Wood grain shall follow the pattern of a stile and rail wood door with both vertical and horizontal grain patterns. Doors with vision lites are required to have wood grain window kits. 2.03 DOORS A. Provide 1 3/4” thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI-100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: Level 2, Model 2 – Seamless a. Interior doors shall be minimum 18-gauge steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door intermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of door. 1) Ceco: Regent-18-SEM 2) Curries: 707N-18 3) Steelcraft: LF18 2. Parking Garage Level Doors: Level 3, Model 2 – Seamless a. Doors shall be minimum 16-gauge steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door continuously wire welded the entire height of the door. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, insulated, and sound deadened with continuous 20 gauge vertical steel stiffeners spaced not more than 6" (152) apart. The stiffener ends shall be welded together at the top and bottom ends. All spaces between stiffeners shall be insulated with .75 pound density fiberglass insulation. The top STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110 - 5 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO of all doors shall be closed flush by the addition of a 16-gauge screwed-in top cap and sealed to prevent water infiltration. The bottom channel shall include weep-holes. 1) Ceco: Medallion-16 2) Curries: 747T-16 3) Steelcraft: BW16 3. Exterior Energy Efficiency Hollow Metal Doors a. General: Provide 1 3/4 inch doors of design specific, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without any visible joints or seams on exposed face unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMMA 867. b. Exterior doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model. ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level, and HMMA 867 for design construction. c. Design: Flush panel. d. Core Construction: Foamed in place polyurethane and steel stiffened laminated core with no steel face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 “Laminated Core”. e. Provide 22 gauge steel stiffeners at 6 inches on-center internally welded at 5” on- center to integral core assembly, foamed in place polyurethane core chemically bonded to all interior surfaces. No stiffener face welding is permitted. f. Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.29 and R- Value 3.4, including insulated door, thermal break frame and threshold. g. Level/Model: Level 2 and physical performance level A (Extra Heavy Duty), minimum 16 gauge thick steel, model 2. h. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to be mechanically interlocked with hairline seam. Beveled lock edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3mm in 50mm). i. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with inverted top channels to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. j. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3 1/6”) plate 1-1/4” x 9”. k. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. 1) Ceco: Trio-E/Trio Series 2) Curries: 777 Trio-E/Trio Series B. All non-energy efficiency doors shall be reinforced for hardware as shown below where necessary to preclude the use of thru-bolts. 1. Exit Devices: 14-gauge 2. Door Closers: 12-gauge C. All doors shall be beveled 1/8” in 2” and shall have top and bottom channels of not less than 16-gauge, flush or inverted, welded to the face sheets. Doors shall have a full STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110 - 6 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO height 14-gauge hinge rail reinforcement channel, or individual 10 gauge hinge reinforcements. D. All doors to conform to ANSI-A250.4 Level “A” criteria and shall be tested to 1,000,000 operating cycles and 23 twist tests. Certification of Level “A” doors is to be submitted with approval drawings by supplier upon request. Do no bid or supply any type or gauge of door not having been tested and passed these criteria. 2.04 FRAMES A. Provide hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on the drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interior Frames: Level 2, 16-gauge 2. Parking Garage level Frames: Level 2, 16-gauge, galvanized or galvannealed 3. Exterior Frames: Energy Efficiency Hollow Metal Frames (Thermal Break) galvannealed 4. Security Grade Frames: 14-gauge a. Ceco: SU Series (Thermal Break SQT & SRT Series) b. Curries: M Series (Thermal Break M & C Series) c. Steelcraft: F Series B. All frames over 36” in width shall be 14 gauge. C. Fabricate frames with mitered and faces only welded corners, re-prime at the welded areas. All welds to be flush with neatly mitered or butted material cuts. D. All frames shall have minimum 7 gauge hinge reinforcements, 14-gauge lock strike reinforcing, and 12-gauge closer reinforcing. E. Provide temporary shipping bars to be removed before setting frames. F. Except on weather stripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on strike jambs of single frames and two (2) silencers on heads of double frames. G. Provide minimum 0.0179” thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. H. Thermal Break Frames: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal frames, provide where indicated thermally broken frame profiles available for use in both masonry and drywall construction. Fabricate from minimum 16 gauge galvannealed steel, with positive 3/8” vinyl thermal break and integral vinyl weather stripping. Thermal break frames available as knock down types only. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110 - 7 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. 1. Clearances shall be no more than 1/8” at jambs and heads except between non fire rated pairs of doors which may be no more than 1/4.” Not more than 3/4” at the bottom of the doors. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only cold-rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exposed fasteners with countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. F. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI-107 and ANSI-A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Provide internal reinforcements for all doors to receive door closers and exit devices. H. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." I. Provide glazing stops with minimum 0.0359-inch- thick steel or 0.040-inch- thick aluminum. J. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. K. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass and other panels in doors PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110 - 8 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO B. Comply with provisions of SDI-105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Door Frames,” unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. 3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 4. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100. Install fire rated doors with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer B. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM DOORS 08120 - 1 OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08120 - ALUMINUM DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum panel doors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 8 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts” for framing for aluminum panel doors. B. Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tube. C. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. D. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. E. ASTM D 2126 - Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging. F. ASTM D 6670-01 - Standard Practice for Full-Scale Chamber Determination of Volatile Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products G. ASTM E 283 - Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. H. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide door assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard systems. B. Air Infiltration: For a single door, test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at pressure differential of 6.24 psf. Door shall not exceed 0.28 cfm per square foot. C. Uniform Structural Load: For a single door, test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 330: Plus or minus 120 pounds per square foot. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM DOORS 08120 - 2 OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Compressive Strength, Foam Core, Nominal Value, ASTM D 1621: 79.9 psi. E. Compressive Modulus, Foam Core, Nominal Value, ASTM D 1621: 370 psi. F. Tensile Adhesion, Foam Core, Nominal Value, ASTM D 1623: 45.3 psi. G. Thermal and Humid Aging, Nominal Value, 158 Degrees F and 100 Percent Humidity for 14 Days, ASTM D 2126: Minus 5.14 percent volume change. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01330 “Submittal Procedures”. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials, components, fabrication, finishes, and installation. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details, indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials, fabrication, doors, panels, framing, hardware schedule, finish, options, and accessories. 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. D. Samples: 1. Door: Submit manufacturer's sample of door showing face sheets, core, framing, finish, and accessories. 2. Color: Submit manufacturer's samples of standard colors of doors and frames. E. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating doors comply with specified performance requirements. F. Manufacturer's Project References: Submit list of successfully completed projects including project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of doors manufactured. G. Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning instructions for doors, including maintenance and operating instructions for hardware. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified, with a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing aluminum doors with a record of successful in- service performance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM DOORS 08120 - 3 OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying opening door mark and manufacturer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warrant doors and factory hardware against failure in materials and workmanship, including excessive deflection, faulty operation, defects in hardware installation, and deterioration of finish or construction in excess of normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: Ten years starting on date of shipment. In addition, a limited lifetime (while the door is in its specified application in its original installation) warranty covering: failure of corner joinery, core deterioration, delamination or bubbling of door skin. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Special-Lite, Inc.; Model SL-16 or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Alutech Corp. 2. CMI Architectural Products, Inc. 2.2 ALUMINUM PANEL DOORS A. Door Opening Sizes and Styles: As indicated. B. Construction: 1. Door Overall Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Stiles and Rails: Aluminum Alloy 6063-T5, minimum of 2-5/16-inch depth. 3. Panels: 1 inches thick with foam polyurethane core, minimum 5 pounds per cubic foot density; Face Sheets: 0.062-inch thick aluminum; Rigid Backing: 1/8-inch thick hardboard. 4. Corners: Mitered. 5. Provide joinery of 3/8-inch diameter full-width tie rods through extruded splines top and bottom as standard tubular shaped stiles and rails reinforced to accept hardware as specified. 6. Securing Internal Door Extrusions: 3/16-inch angle blocks and locking hex nuts for joinery. Welds, glue, or other methods are not acceptable. 7. Furnish extruded stiles and rails with integral reglets to accept face sheets. Lock face sheets into place to permit flush appearance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM DOORS 08120 - 4 OZ Architecture Denver, CO 8. Rail caps or other face sheet capture methods are not acceptable. 9. Meeting Stiles: Pile brush weatherseals. Extrude meeting stile to include integral pocket to accept pile brush weatherseals. 10. Glue: Use of glue to bond sheet to core or extrusions is not acceptable. C. Face Sheets: 1. Material: 0.062-inch thick aluminum. 2. Texture: Smooth . D. Cores: 1. Material: Poured-in-place polyurethane foam. 2. Density: Minimum of 5 pounds per cubic foot. E. Hardware: 1. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule. 2. Factory install hardware. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221. 2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 3. Alloy and Temper: As required by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, application of required finish, and control of color. B. Components: Door components from same manufacturer. C. Fasteners: 1. Material: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or other non-corrosive metal. 2. Compatibility: Compatible with items to be fastened. 3. Exposed Fasteners: Screws with finish matching items to be fastened. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door units, and profile requirements shall be as indicated on the Drawings. B. Coordination of Fabrication: Field measure before fabrication and show recorded measurements on shop drawings. C. Assembly: 1. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal before assembly. 2. Remove burrs from cut edges. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM DOORS 08120 - 5 OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Welding: Welding of doors or frames is not acceptable. E. Fit: 1. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. 2. Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting members. 2.5 HARDWARE A. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule. B. Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. C. Hardware Schedule: See Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”. . 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack. C. Anchor frames securely in place. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM DOORS 08120 - 6 OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved by Architect. E. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and backseal. F. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect. G. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of doors. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08120 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08212 - 1 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO SECTION 08212 – STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART I – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing stile and rail wood doors light frames, factory fitting and machining and factory finishing for fire labeled and non labeled wood doors. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. C. RELATED SECTIONS 1. 06200 – Finish Carpentry 2. 08110 – Metal Doors and Frames 3. 08410 – Entrances and Storefronts 4. 08710 – Door Hardware 5. 08810 – Glass and Glazing 6. Division 16 – Access Control 1.02 REFERENCES A. STANDARDS 1. NFPA-80 – Fire Doors and Windows 2. NFPA-105 – Recommend Practice for Installation of Smoke Controlled Door Assemblies 3. WDMA I.S. 6A – Industry Standard for Architectural Stile and Rail Doors. 4. UL10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies B. CODES 1. NFPA-101 – Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2003 – International Building Code 3. ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 4. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08212 - 2 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Submit copies of the hollow metal door and frame shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. B. PRODUCT DATA 1. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of wood doors. Include details of door elevations, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door hardware. C. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and door openings as those on the contract documents. Shop drawings should include the following information: a. Door core material. b. Mortises and reinforcements. c. Glazed and louvered openings and material. d. Mounting locations of standard hardware. e. Elevation drawings. D. SAMPLES 1. Upon request submit the following samples: a. Corner sections of doors approximately 8” x 10” with door faces and edgings representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8” x 10” inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. c. Frames for light openings, 6” long, for each material, type, and finish required. d. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his consultant. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08212 - 3 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS 1. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Wood Door Manufacturer’s Association (WDMA). 2. Wherever possible obtain wood doors from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity in quality of appearance and construction. All material supplied for this project to conform to WDMA I.S. 6A, “Industry Standard for Architectural Stile and Rail Doors.” C. FIRE RATED DOORS 1. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with hardware and other door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. a. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. b. For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 2. A physical label to be permanently affixed to the fire door at an authorized facility. Furthermore, all 45, 60, and 90 minute label fire doors are to have manufacturer’s standard laminated stiles for improved screw holding and split resistance capability. 3. Provide safety glass complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Doors are to be shipped from manufacturer in individual polybags, and shall be inspected immediately upon arrival at jobsite for any damage of defects. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers that correlate with designation system used on shop drawings and contract drawings for door, frames and hardware. Use only temporary, removable, or concealed markings. C. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed and weather tight, wet-work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and relative humidity at occupancy level in storage and installation areas. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of other rights the owner may have under the contract documents. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08212 - 4 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO B. Submit written warranty on manufacturer’s standard form signed by the manufacturer agreeing to replace or repair defective doors which have: 1. Defective materials or workmanship. 2. Warp or twist of 1/4” or more in a 42” x 84” section. C. Contractor shall replace or refinish doors where contractor’s work contributed to rejection or voiding of manufacturer’s warranty. D. Interior doors shall be warranted for the life of their installation. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wood doors by one of the manufacturers as listed. 2.02 FIRE RATED DOORS 1. All fire rated doors shall be supplied to meet UL10C positive pressure standards for category “A” doors. All required intumescent seals shall be concealed into the edge of the door; frame applied intumescent seals are not acceptable. 2.03 STILE AND RAIL DOORS A. MATERIALS 1. Assemble doors, including components, with minimum WDMA Type II adhesives. 2. Provide interior doors made with composite wood products that have urea- formaldehyde emission levels below the published maximums in the ANSI A208.1- latest edition Particleboard standard. B. DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 1. Provide doors with elevations as shown on drawings or submit manufacturer’s nearest standard equivalent for approval. a. Maiman Company STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08212 - 5 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 2. Stile and rail construction shall be veneered with a structural engineered core and edge-bands of the same species as the face veneer. 3. Raised-panel construction shall be veneered, wood-based product with mitered, raised rims made from matching clear lumber. Panel thickness shall be not less than 1-5/8 inches for 2-1/4 inch thick doors, 1-1/8 inches for 1-3/4 inch thick doors, and 3/4 inches for 1-3/8 inch thick doors. 4. Flat-panel construction shall be veneered, wood-based product. Panel Thickness shall be not less than 1-1/4 inches for 2-1/4 inch thick doors, 1 1/8 inches for 1-3/4 inch thick doors, and 1 inch for 1-3/8 inch thick doors. 5. Provide WDMA Premium Grade faces as follows: a. Veneer Cut: Plain Sawn b. Veneer Species: Sassafras 6. FIRE RATED DOORS a. Construction of 20 minute fire-rated doors shall have 1-3/4 inch thick stiles and rails and veneered flat panels not less than 5/8 inch thick or raised panels not less than 1-1/8 inches thick, complying with requirements indicated for interior doors. b. Construction of 45 and 60 minute fire-rated doors shall be “true” stile and rail, and not simulated with 1-3/4 inch thick, edged and veneered non combustible- core stiles and rails and 1-1/8 inch thick, veneered non combustible-core raised panels or 1-1/8 inch thick, veneered non combustible-core flat panels with no sticking, complying with requirements indicated for interior doors. c. Construction of 90 minute fire-rated doors shall be “true” stile and rail, and not simulated with 2-1/4 inch thick, edged and veneered non combustible-core stiles and rails and 1-5/8 inch thick, veneered non combustible-core raised panels or 1- 1/8 inch thick, veneered non combustible-core flat panels, complying with requirements indicated for interior doors. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for project-site fitting. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08212 - 6 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO C. Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Section 08 81 00. Glaze doors using solid wood moldings for non fire-rated and 20 minute fire- rated. For 45, 60 and 90 minute fire-rated doors, glaze using veneered metal for transparent finish. D. Fabricate transom and side panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHING A. Finish all doors to receive a transparent finish at the factory as indicated below; field finish doors indicated to receive an opaque finish in accordance with Division 9, Finishes. 1. Grade: Premium 2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane 3. Stain: Per architects selection B. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. C. Factory seal transparent finish doors on all six (6) sides using manufacturer’s standard meeting these applications. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. For hardware installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Align factory fitted doors in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08212 - 7 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 3.03 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08112 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08263 - SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sliding wood-framed glass doors for exterior locations with aluminum- clad exterior exposed surfaces and interior surfaces prepared to receive field- applied stains. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section “Quality Control” for Exterior Envelope Mockup incorporating sliding wood-framed glass doors. 2. Division 8 Section "Swinging Wood- Framed Glass Doors". 3. Division 8 Section "Wood Windows" for related wood-framed transom and sidelight windows and mullions. 4. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware " for hardware not specified in this Section. 5. Division 9 Section "Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes" for on-site finishing of prepared unfinished surfaces of sliding wood-framed glass doors. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide sliding wood-framed glass doors capable of complying with performance requirements indicated based on testing manufacturers' sliding doors that are representative of those specified and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Size indicated on Drawings . B. Structural Performance: Provide sliding wood-framed doors capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads according to ASCE/SEI 7 for project location . 2. Deflection Limits: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform Load Deflection Test, or structural computations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Shop Drawings: For sliding wood-framed glass doors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and the following: 1. Mullion details for fenestration combinations including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Glazing details. 7. Accessories. C. Samples for Verification: For sliding wood-framed glass doors and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Main Framing Member: 12-inch- long section with weather stripping, glazing bead and factory-applied color finish. 2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sliding wood-framed glass doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation and used to determine the following: 1. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated. 2. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, manufacturer and professional engineer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency, for each class, grade, and size of sliding wood- framed glass doors. Test results based on use of downsized test doors will not be accepted. G. Maintenance Data: For finishes, weather stripping, operable panels, and operating hardware to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating sliding wood-framed glass doors that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to sliding door manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility including preparation of data for sliding wood- framed glass doors, including Shop Drawings and Designated-Design Submittal, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding wood-framed glass doors from single source from single manufacturer. D. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, "Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. 1. Provide AAMA-certified, sliding wood-framed glass doors with an attached label. E. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect sliding doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Store off ground and covered in a clean, dry, well-ventilated, protected space. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify sliding wood-framed glass door openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sliding wood-framed glass doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection. c. Water leakage or air infiltration. d. Faulty operation of movable panels and hardware. e. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. f. Deterioration of insulating glass as defined in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 2. Warranty Period: a. Sliding Door: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO c. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Sierra Pacific Doors, "Standard Series" or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Aluminum-Clad Sliding Wood-Framed Glass Doors: a. JELD-WEN, Inc. b. Marvin Windows and Doors. c. Peachtree Windows. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear fir or pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln-dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water- repellent preservative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard formed sheet or extruded-aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by sliding wood-framed glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish. 1. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 3. Polyester Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer’s standard factory- applied, baked- on high molecular weight polyester (HMP) resin- based paint coating, AAMA 2604. a. Acceptable Product: “Super Dynapon”, Valspar Corp. 1) Color and Gloss: Match Sierra Pacific Windows “Heritage” Collection, Bronze. C. Clad Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match clad frame members. D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive for SC 3 severe service conditions and compatible with sliding wood-framed glass door members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 456 or ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. F. Integral Fin: PVC or extruded- or rolled-aluminum nailing fins for securing frame to structure; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. H. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when sliding wood-framed glass door is closed. 1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. I. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701. 1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 702. J. Drip Caps: Extruded aluminum, factory fabricated and finished to match aluminum cladding; designed to direct water away from building when installed horizontally at head of aluminum-clad sliding wood-framed glass door units. 2.3 SLIDING DOOR A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA Performance Requirements: Provide sliding wood-framed glass doors of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 unless more stringent performance requirements are indicated. 1. Performance Class and Grade: C 40. B. Thermal Transmittance: Provide sliding wood-framed glass doors with a whole- fenestration-product U-factor maximum indicated, when determined according to NFRC 100. 1. U-Factor: 0.34 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. for aluminum-clad sliding wood-framed glass doors with insulating glass. C. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide sliding wood-framed glass doors with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.19 , determined according to NFRC 200. D. Air-Leakage Resistance: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Air Leakage Resistance Test. 1. Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Water-Penetration Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA/CSA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Water Penetration Resistance Test. 1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 6 lbf/sq.ft nor more than 15 lbf/sq. ft. F. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide sliding wood- framed glass doors rated for not less than STC indicated when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413. 1. Standard Performance: 25 2. Improved Performance: 31 a. Locations: 1) North Elevation: All sliding glass doors, including all doors at east and west returns. 2) West Elevation: All sliding glass doors between Grids B7 and B12, including all doors at north and south returns. 3) East Elevation: All sliding glass doors between Grids A11 and A15.2 at Levels 2 through 6, including all doors at north and south returns. G. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Grade 25 requirements when tested according to ASTM F 842. H. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Tested according to and complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed sliding wood- framed glass door units to the extent not herein specified. B. Glass : Clear, insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing", and pressure- equalized for anticipated elevations. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Cardinal Glass, LoE2-366. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Manufacturer’s standard, in compliance with performance requirements indicated. 3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 5. Visible Light Transmittance: 66 percent minimum. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.25 maximum. 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.17 maximum. 8. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 percent maximum. 9. Spacer: Non- metallic, extruded thermoset polymer structural silicone foam with integrally incorporated dessicants and pre- applied adhesive. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 10. Provide manufacturer’s standard insulating units incorporating laminated lites for improved STC performance as indicated, at locations indicated. C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. 2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, fabricated from a corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding complying with AAMA 907; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock sliding wood-framed glass doors and sized to accommodate panel weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel. 1. Hardware Finish: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range . B. Roller Assemblies: Provide movable panels with adjustable-height roller assemblies, complying with AAMA 906, consisting of self-lubricating, dual tandem stainless-steel ball- bearing rollers; two roller assemblies per panel. C. Threshold and Sill Cap/Track: Provide extruded-aluminum threshold, thermally broken, and track of thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to exterior; with manufacturer's standard finish. D. Door Pulls: Provide manufacturer's standard metal pull grips. E. Lock: Install manufacturer's keyed cylinder lock, and multipoint locking device on each movable panel, lockable from the inside only. Adjust locking device to allow unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction indicated. 1. Keying System: All cylinders keyed alike . G. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber. 2.6 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design sliding doors and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with door frame. Locate screens on the outside of door and provide for each operable door panel. Comply with SMA 1201. B. Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum members, with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners, adjustable rollers, and removable PVC or PE spline/anchor concealing edge of mesh. 1. Finish: Match door panels. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: ASTM D 3656, 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 count per sq. in. mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration in the following color: 1. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray . D. Hardware: Extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum . 1. Lock: Manufacturer's standard pull and keyless locking device on each movable panel, lockable from inside only. Adjust locking device to allow unobstructed movement of panel across adjacent panel in direction indicated. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate sliding wood-framed glass doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate sliding wood-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling panel framing. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable panel unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory machine sliding wood-framed glass doors for openings and hardware that is not surface applied. E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze sliding wood-framed glass doors in the factory. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 2.8 WOOD FINISHES A. Interior Exposed Wood: Factory prepared to receive field- applied stain. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of threshold substrate, and operational clearances. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight sliding door installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood-Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry and clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install sliding doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, warp or rack of frames and panels, or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing, vapor retarders, air barriers, water/weather barriers, and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials according to ASTM E 2112, Section 5.12 "Dissimilar Materials." 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Adjust operating panels and screens to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation, without binding, and weathertight closure. C. Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching without unnecessary force or excessive clearance. D. Clean frame surfaces immediately after installing sliding doors. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. E. Clean glass immediately after installing sliding doors. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. F. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO G. Protect sliding door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor sliding door surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact sliding door surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Refinish or replace sliding doors with damaged finishes. I. Replace damaged components. END OF SECTION 08263 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08264 - SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes swinging wood-framed glass doors for exterior locations with aluminum- clad exterior exposed surfaces and interior surfaces prepared to receive field- applied stains. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Sliding Wood- Framed Glass Doors". 2. Division 8 Section "Wood Windows" for related wood-framed transom and sidelight windows and mullions. 3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware " for hardware not specified in this Section. 4. Division 9 Section "Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes" for on-site finishing of prepared unfinished surfaces of swinging wood-framed glass doors. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide swinging wood-framed glass doors capable of complying with performance requirements indicated based on testing manufacturers' swinging doors that are representative of those specified and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Size indicated on Drawings . B. Structural Performance: Provide swinging wood-framed doors capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads according to ASCE/SEI 7 for project location . 2. Deflection Limits: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform Load Deflection Test, or structural computations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Shop Drawings: For swinging wood-framed glass doors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and the following: 1. Mullion details for fenestration combinations including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Glazing details. 7. Accessories. C. Samples for Verification: For swinging wood-framed glass doors and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Main Framing Member: 12-inch- long section with weather stripping, glazing bead and factory-applied color finish. 2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For swinging wood-framed glass doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation and used to determine the following: 1. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated. 2. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, manufacturer and professional engineer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency, for each class, grade, and size of swinging wood-framed glass doors. Test results based on use of downsized test doors will not be accepted. G. Maintenance Data: For finishes, weather stripping, operable panels, and operating hardware to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating swinging wood-framed glass doors that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to swinging door manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility including preparation of data for swinging wood- framed glass doors, including Shop Drawings and Designated-Design Submittal, STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain swinging wood-framed glass doors from single source from single manufacturer. D. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, "Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. 1. Provide AAMA-certified, swinging wood-framed glass doors with an attached label. E. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect swinging doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Store off ground and covered in a clean, dry, well-ventilated, protected space. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify swinging wood-framed glass door openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace swinging wood-framed glass doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection. c. Water leakage or air infiltration. d. Faulty operation of operable leaves and hardware. e. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. f. Deterioration of insulating glass as defined in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 2. Warranty Period: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Swinging Door: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Sierra Pacific Doors, ' Aspen Series" or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Aluminum-Clad Swinging Wood-Framed Glass Doors: a. JELD-WEN, Inc. b. Marvin Windows and Doors. c. Peachtree Windows. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear fir or pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln-dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water- repellent preservative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard formed sheet or extruded-aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by swinging wood-framed glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish. 1. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 3. Polyester Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer’s standard factory- applied, baked- on high molecular weight polyester (HMP) resin- based paint coating, AAMA 2604. a. Acceptable Product: “Super Dynapon”, Valspar Corp. 1) Color and Gloss: Match Sierra Pacific Windows “Heritage” Collection, Bronze. C. Clad Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match clad frame members. D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive for SC 3 severe service conditions and compatible with swinging wood-framed glass door members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 456 or ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. F. Integral Fin: PVC or extruded- or rolled-aluminum nailing fins for securing frame to structure; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. H. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing, and completely concealed when swinging wood-framed glass door is closed. 1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. I. Drip Caps: Extruded aluminum, factory fabricated and finished to match aluminum cladding; designed to direct water away from building when installed horizontally at head of aluminum-clad swinging wood-framed glass door units. 2.3 SWINGING DOOR A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA Performance Requirements: Provide swinging wood-framed glass doors of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 unless more stringent performance requirements are indicated. 1. Performance Class and Grade: C 40. B. Thermal Transmittance: Provide swinging wood-framed glass doors with a whole- fenestration-product U-factor maximum indicated, when determined according to NFRC 100. 1. U-Factor: 0.34 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. for aluminum-clad swinging wood-framed glass doors with insulating glass. C. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide swinging wood-framed glass doors with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.17 , determined according to NFRC 200. D. Air-Leakage Resistance: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Air Leakage Resistance Test. 1. Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Water-Penetration Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA/CSA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Water Penetration Resistance Test. 1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 6 lbf/sq.ft nor more than 15 lbf/sq. ft. F. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide swinging wood- framed glass doors rated for not less than STC indicated when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413. 1. Standard Performance: 25 2. Improved Performance: 32 a. Locations: 1) North Elevation: All swinging glass doors, including all doors at east and west returns. 2) West Elevation: All swinging glass doors between Grids B7 and B12, including all doors at north and south returns. 3) East Elevation: All swinging glass doors between Grids A11 and A15.2 at Levels 2 through 6, including all doors at north and south returns. G. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Grade 10 requirements when tested according to ASTM F 842. H. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Tested according to and complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed swinging wood- framed glass door units to the extent not herein specified. B. Glass : Clear, insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing", and pressure- equalized for anticipated elevations. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Cardinal Glass, LoE2-366. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Manufacturer’s standard, in compliance with performance requirements indicated. 3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 5. Visible Light Transmittance: 66 percent minimum. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.25 maximum. 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.17 maximum. 8. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 percent maximum. 9. Spacer: Non- metallic, extruded thermoset polymer structural silicone foam with integrally incorporated dessicants and pre- applied adhesive. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 10. Provide manufacturer’s standard insulating units incorporating laminated lites for improved STC performance as indicated, at locations indicated. C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. 2.5 HARDWARE A. Reference Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware not specified in this Section. B. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, fabricated from a corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding complying with AAMA 907; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock swinging wood-framed glass doors and sized to accommodate panel weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel. 1. Hardware Finish: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range . C. Multi-point Locking System: 1. Active Leaf: 3-point lock. 2. Inactive Leaf: 2-point lock. D. Hinges: Adjustable Hinges 1. Provide three hinges on 80 inch and 82 inch height doors. 2. Provide four hinges on doors over 87 inches in height. 3. Provide two hinges on each out-swing door with non-removable pins. 4. Provide stainless steel hinges on out-swing doors. E. Strike Plates: Door manufacturer’s heavy gauge type. F. Threshold: Provide manufacturer's standard threshold of thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to exterior; with manufacturer's standard finish. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate swinging wood-framed glass doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate swinging wood-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling panel framing. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable panel unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory machine swinging wood-framed glass doors for openings and hardware that is not surface applied. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze swinging wood-framed glass doors in the factory. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 2.7 WOOD FINISHES A. Interior Exposed Wood: Factory prepared to receive field- applied stain. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of threshold substrate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight swinging door installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood-Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry and clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install swinging doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, warp or rack of frames and panels, or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing, vapor retarders, air barriers, water/weather barriers, and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials according to ASTM E 2112, Section 5.12 "Dissimilar Materials." 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Adjust operable leaves to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation, without binding, and weathertight closure. C. Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching without unnecessary force or excessive clearance. D. Clean frame surfaces immediately after installing swinging doors. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. E. Clean glass immediately after installing swinging doors. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. F. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. G. Protect swinging door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor swinging door surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact swinging door surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Refinish or replace swinging doors with damaged finishes. I. Replace damaged components. END OF SECTION 08264 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches. 2. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for suspended acoustical tile ceilings. 3. Division 15 Sections for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. E. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. F. Ceiling Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling- mounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and special trim are shown and coordinated with each other. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2 STEEL MATERIALS C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. E. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 3. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. F. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board. 2.5 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 8. J. L. Industries, Inc. 10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 12. Milcor Inc. 13. Nystrom, Inc. E. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch for gypsum board infill. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board surfaces . 4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type or concealed pivoting rod hinge. 5. Latch: Cam latch operated by pinned hex head wrench with interior release. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO K. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction . 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch . 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead. 6. Hinges: Continuous piano. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 9. Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 2. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames. 4. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 5. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors. D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Frames with masonry anchors: Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08311 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulated service doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 11 Section "Parking Control Equipment" for parking control equipment interlocked to overhead coiling doors. 2. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design overhead coiling doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7 . 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. C. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 lbf/sq. ft. wind load, acting inward and outward. D. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 . E. Operation Cycles: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Curtain Slats: 12 inches long. 2. Bottom Bar: 6 inches long. 3. Guides: 6 inches long. 4. Brackets: 6 inches square. 5. Hood: 6 inches square. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For overhead coiling doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. d. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 zinc coating; nominal sheet thickness (coated) of 0.034 inch and as required to meet requirements. 2. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 3. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face. 4. Gasket Seal: Provide insulated slats with manufacturer's standard interior-to-exterior thermal break or with continuous gaskets between slats. B. Endlocks and Windlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. C. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from manufacturer's standard hot-dip galvanized steel, stainless steel, or aluminum extrusions to match curtain slats and finish. D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At door head, use 1/8-inch- thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood. 2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene. 2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load. C. Spring Balance: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs. D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.4 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door. 1. Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted to the inside front wall on the left or right side of door and connected to door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Side room is STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO required for this type of mounting. Wall mounted operator can also be mounted above or below shaft; if above shaft, headroom is required. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrical Characteristics: a. Phase: Single phase . b. Volts: 115 V. c. Hertz: 60. 2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 5. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. 2. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge. G. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf . H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.5 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Stormtite 625 Series Rolling Service Door, Overhead Door Corporation, or comparable product by one of the following: 1) AlumaTek, Inc. 2) Cookson Company. 3) McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. B. Operation Cycles: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 100,000 cycles and for 50 cycles per day. 1. Include tamperproof cycle counter. C. Curtain R-Value: 7.7 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu . D. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel . E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile. 1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. G. Electric Door Operator: 1. Basis-of-Design Model: Model RDB, Overhead Door Corporation. 2. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour . 3. Operator Location: Wall. 4. Motor Exposure: Interior. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor and electric sensor edge on bottom bar; self-monitoring types. a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black . H. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as indicated by manufacturer's designations . 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face . 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door. C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 08331 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08334 - OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Electric-motor-operated overhead coiling grilles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 11 Section "Parking Control Equipment" for parking control equipment interlocked to overhead coiling grilles. 2. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators, and accessories. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling grille components and operators capable of operating for not less than 100,000 cycles and for 50 cycles per day. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling grille and accessory. 1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling grilles through one source from a single manufacturer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling grille manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 671 Series Security Grille, Overhead Door Corporation, or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Cookson Company. 2) McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 2.2 GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. General: Fabricate overhead coiling grille curtain consisting of a network of 5/16-inch minimum diameter horizontal rods, or rods covered with tube spacers, spaced as indicated. Interconnect rods by vertical links approximately 5/8 inch wide, spaced as indicated and rotating on rods. 1. Space rods at approximately 2 inches o.c. 2. Space links approximately 9 inches apart in a straight in-line pattern. 3. Steel Grille Curtain: Hot-dip zinc-coated (galvanized), complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M, or electrogalvanized complying with ASTM 653/A 653M, and phosphatized before fabrication. B. Endlocks: Continuous end links, chains, or other devices at ends of rods; locking and retaining grille curtain in guides against excessive pressures, maintaining grille curtain alignment, and preventing lateral movement. C. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel, tubular shape, or two angles, finished to match grille. 1. Astragal: Provide a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene; for placement between angles or fitted to shape, as a cushion bumper for grille. 2. Provide motor-operated grilles with combination bottom astragal and sensor edge. D. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum shape having curtain groove with return lips or bars to retain curtain. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise; with removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.3 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES A. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated grilles, provide manufacturer's standard lifting handles on each side of grille. B. If grille curtain is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when grille is locked. 2.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance grille curtain by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to grille curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up grille curtain without distortion of curtain and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load. C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of grille curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.5 ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS A. General: Provide electric grille operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by grille manufacturer for grille and operation-cycle requirements specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid- operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking grille, and accessories required for proper operation. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging chain and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc. F. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors complying with NEMA MG 1; with overload protection; sized to start, accelerate, and operate grille in either direction from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps and not more than 1 fps, without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 1. Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type. 2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electric characteristics of motors with building electrical system. 4. Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. G. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized grille with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of grille opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward grille travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in grille opening without contact between grille and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with grille operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, grille closes only with sustained pressure on close button. 2. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized grille with an automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses downward grille travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a. Provide pneumatically actuated automatic bottom bar. 1) Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device. H. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop grille at fully opened and fully closed positions. I. Activation: By card reader on entry and detector loop on exit. Reference Division 11 Section "Parking Control Equipment" for additional information. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.7 STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES A. Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder-coat finish consisting of primer and topcoat according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install grilles and operating equipment, complete with necessary hardware, according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust grilles to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion and with tight fit around entire perimeter. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICES A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 08334 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08361 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7 . 1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and outward . 2. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width. D. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283 . 1. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph. E. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 . F. Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Flat Door Sections: 6 inches square. 2. Frame for Paneled Door Sections: 6 inches long of each width of stile and rail required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sectional doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals. G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. d. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Panel Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sectional door panels showing evidence of rust- through due to defects or failure in paint system materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated zinc coating and thickness. 1. Fabricate section faces from single sheets to provide sections not more than 24 inches high and of indicated thickness. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return. 2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch- nominal coated thickness and welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches apart. C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile and allowing installation of astragal. D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place. E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. F. Foamed-in-Place Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC-free polyurethane insulation, foamed in place to completely fill interior of section and pressure bonded to face sheets to prevent delamination under wind load, and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior facing material, with no exposed insulation: 1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated thickness. G. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and free of warp, twist, and deformation. 2.2 `TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M for minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. 1. Vertical Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and attached to wall with jamb brackets, or wall jamb brackets attached to track and attached to wall, as standard with manufacturer. 2. Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and supported at points from curve in track to end of track by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Track Acoustical Isolation Mounts: Provide neoprene isolation mounts designed to minimize transfer of door operation sound and vibration from track assembly to supporting construction. a. Product: Type RBA, Mason Industries, Inc. C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- diameter roller tires for 3-inch- wide track and 2-inch- diameter roller tires for 2-inch- wide track. D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door. 2.4 LOCKING DEVICES A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying system. 2. Keys: Two for each cylinder. B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer. C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks. E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. 1. Trolley: Trolley operator mounted to ceiling above and to rear of door in raised position and directly connected to door with drawbar. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrical Characteristics: a. Phase: Single phase . b. Volts: 115 V. c. Hertz: 60. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 5. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. 6. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button. 2. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door-operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge. G. Normal Operation: 1. Active Card Reader Controlled Unit: a. Functions only when authorized card is presented. b. System: Programmable, multiple-code capability permitting validating or voiding of individual cards. c. Reader: Long Range Proximity type for proximity active cards. d. Operation: Standalone. e. Mounting: Wall. f. Active Cards: Provide 5 cards. H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf . I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. 2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 418 Series, Overhead Door Corporation, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Clopay Building Products; a Griffon company. c. Raynor. B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 50,000 . C. R-Value: 7.35 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu . D. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G90zinc coating. 1. Section Thickness: 2 inches. 2. Exterior-Face, Steel Sheet Thickness: 0.064-inch- nominal coated thickness. a. Surface: Flat. 3. Insulation: Foamed in place. 4. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet of0.022-inch- nominal coated thickness. E. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track. F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door. Provide combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. G. Roller-Tire Material: Case-hardened steel . H. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly . 1. Locking Device Assembly: Cremone type, both jamb sides, locking bars, operable from inside with thumbturn and outside with cylinder . I. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring . J. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. 2. Operator Type: Trolley . 3. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type. 5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor and electric sensor edge on bottom bar; self-monitoring types. a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black. K. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color and gloss as indicated by manufacturer's designations . 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Finish as indicated by manufacturer's designations . 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.9 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Tracks: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches apart. 2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. 3. Install track acoustical isolation mounts at each track support as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICES A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. D. Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. END OF SECTION 08361 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Doors" for panel aluminum doors installed in storefront framing. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for curtain-wall systems that mechanically retain glazing on four sides. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) . E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) . G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind- load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. . H. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C) . I. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 74 (frame) and 60 (glass) when tested according to AAMA 1503. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO J. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.60 when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum- framed systems. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Welding certificates. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. H. Source quality-control reports. I. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1. E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Trifab VG 451T, Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. United States Aluminum. 2. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 3. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken . 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides . 3. Glazing Plane: As indicated . B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system . D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. F. Provide manufacturer’s high- performance flashing receivers at sills and where elsewhere indicated. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/4-inch (50.8- to 57.2-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior . b. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane. 2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Match Kawneer “Champagne”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. E. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. PRIVATE tbl1 END OF SECTION 08411 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08450 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior manual-swinging all-glass entrance doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for general glass requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Structural Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Deflection normal to glazing plane is limited to 1 inch. C. Delegated Design: Design all-glass systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for all-glass system. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1. Plans, elevations, and sections. 2. Details of fittings and glazing, including isometric drawings of rail fittings. 3. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For all-glass systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of all-glass systems. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For all-glass systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for all-glass systems. H. Maintenance Data: For all-glass systems to include in maintenance manuals. I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for all-glass systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain all-glass systems from single source from single manufacturer. D. Accessible All-Glass Entrance Doors: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with all-glass systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: a. Concealed Floor Closers: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh. 2. Oldcastle Glass, Inc. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Class 1: Clear monolithic. a. Locations: As indicated. 2. Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.3 METAL COMPONENTS A. Fitting Configuration: 1. Manual-Swinging, All-Glass Entrance Doors: Continuous rail fitting at top and bottom. B. Rail Fittings: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Height: a. Top Rail: 3-1/2 inches. b. Bottom Rail: 3-1/2 inches. 3. Profile: Tapered at 60 degrees minimum from the horizontal. 4. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for rail fittings. C. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. Reference Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering. 1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite. B. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest extent possible. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Match Kawneer “Champagne”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components. D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated. F. Install joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust all-glass entrance doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. For all-glass entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch measured to the leading door edge. B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces. END OF SECTION 08450 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEAM ROOM DOORS 08452 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08452 – STEAM ROOM DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual-swinging steam room doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for general glass requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Door systems shall withstand the effects gravity and operating loads without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Design door systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for door system. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1. Plans, elevations, and sections. 2. Details of fittings and glazing. 3. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Finishes: 6-inch- long sections of door frame head/ jamb and door sill/ threshold. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEAM ROOM DOORS 08452 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Glass: 6 inches square, showing tint and including door edge trim two sides, with standard joint. 3. Door Hardware: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size. D. Maintenance Data: For door systems to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for door systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain door systems from single source from single manufacturer. C. Accessible Steam Room Doors: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with door systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Tylo AB; Model 99 G. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Class 2: Tinted monolithic. a. Color: Gray. b. Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Edges: Flat ground to receive edge trim. B. Aluminum Frame Extrusions: ASTM B 221, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEAM ROOM DOORS 08452 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Stainless-Steel Edge Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.3 METAL COMPONENTS A. Fitting Configuration: 1. Manual-swinging, steam room doors: Prehung unit with aluminum frame and glass door with perimeter stainless steel edge trim; magnetic weather stripping. B. Patch Hinges: Aluminum. C. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed. 2.4 DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Heavy-duty hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended by manufacturer for door indicated. For exposed parts, match metal and finish of patch hinges. B. Push-Pull Set: As standard with manufacturer for door model indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering. 1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite. B. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest extent possible. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEAM ROOM DOORS 08452 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install door systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components. D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust steam room doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points and weather stripping. B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces. END OF SECTION 08452 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08550 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed and operable wood-framed windows of the following type: 1. Aluminum clad. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section “Quality Control” for Exterior Envelope Mockup incorporating wood windows. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1. C: Commercial. B. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Size indicated on Drawings B. Structural Performance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph . b. Importance Factor: 1.00 c. Exposure Category: B. 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations. C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide wood window systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 15 percent of positive wind- load design pressure, but not less than 6.00 lbf/sq. ft. . 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Thermal-break details. 7. Glazing details. 8. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of wood windows and used to determine the following: a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds indicated. b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. C. Samples for Verification: For wood windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Window Corner Fabrication: 12--by-12-inch- long, full-size window corner including full-size sections of window frame with factory-applied color finish, weather stripping, and glazing. 2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. D. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of wood window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. G. Maintenance Data: For operating hardware, weather stripping, and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for wood windows, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating wood windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of wood windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Provide AAMA-certified wood windows with an attached label. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for types, sizes, and locations of windows as directed by Architect. 2. Mockup requirements may be satisfied by Exterior Envelope Mockup (reference Division 1 Section “Quality Control”) if requirements above are incorporated into Exterior Envelope Mockup. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to wood windows including, but not limited to, the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Require attendance by installers of windows, cold- formed metal framing, sheathing, flashings, weather- resistive barriers, sealants, and exterior finishes that interface with windows. Require attendance by window manufacturer’s representative, contractor, Architect, and other interested parties. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of wood windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing, flashing, weeping, sealants, and protection of finishes. 4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope. 5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. d. Labor: 2 years from date of manufacture. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Sierra Pacific Windows Aspen Series and Geometric or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: a. JELD-WEN, Inc. b. Marvin Windows and Doors. c. Peachtree Doors and Windows. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water-repellent preservative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard formed sheet or extruded-aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by wood window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength, and not less than 16,000-psi minimum yield strength. 1. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 3. Polyester Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer’s standard factory- applied, baked- on high molecular weight polyester (HMP) resin- based paint coating, AAMA 2604. a. Acceptable Product: “Super Dynapon”, Valspar Corp. 1) Color and Gloss: Match Sierra Pacific Windows “Heritage” Collection, Bronze. C. Trim and Glazing Stops: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard materials and construction for window specified with finish to match frame members. D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. F. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when wood window is closed. 1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. H. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. 2.3 WINDOWS A. Window Types: As indicated on Drawings . B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 1. Performance Class and Grade: C 40. C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide wood windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF indicated for the following window types:. 1. Casement Windows: Minimum 53. 2. Fixed Windows: Minimum 49. D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to NFRC 100. 1. U-Factor: 0.34 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less. E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.22, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. F. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than STC indicated when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Standard STC Performance: a. Casement Windows: 30. b. Fixed Windows: 29. 2. Improved STC Performance: a. Casement Windows: 35. b. Fixed Windows: 33. c. Locations and Windows: 1) North Elevation: All windows, including all windows at east and west returns. 2) West Elevation: All windows between Grids B7 and B12, including all windows at north and south returns. 3) East Elevation: All windows between Grids A11 and A15.2 at Levels 2 through 6, including all windows at north and south returns. G. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test. 1. Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. H. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test. 1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 6 lbf/sq.ft nor more than 15 lbf/sq. ft. I. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Grade 10 requirements when tested according to ASTM F 588. J. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for operating window types indicated. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units to the extent not herein specified. B. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing", and pressure- equalized for anticipated elevations. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Cardinal Glass, LoE2-366. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Manufacturer’s standard, in compliance with performance requirements indicated. 3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 5. Visible Light Transmittance: 66 percent minimum. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.25 maximum. 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.22 maximum. 8. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 percent maximum. 9. Spacer: Non- metallic, extruded thermoset polymer structural silicone foam with integrally incorporated dessicants and pre- applied adhesive. 10. Provide manufacturer’s standard insulating units incorporating laminated lites for improved STC performance as indicated, at locations indicated. C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. 2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel. B. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according to ASTM E 405, Method A. C. Four- or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904. 1. Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation. 2. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material. 2.6 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Baked-on organic coating in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray . 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied. E. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. F. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 2.8 WOOD FINISHES C. Interior Exposed Wood: Factory prepared to receive field- applied stain. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Protocol: Should testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements take place, do not proceed with installation of subsequent areas until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Wood window assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 08550 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 1 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO SECTION 08710 – DOOR HARDWARE PART I – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary for all swinging, sliding, folding and other doors. Except items, which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification or of unique hardware, specified in the same sections as the doors and frames on which they are installed. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. C. RELATED SECTIONS 1. 06200 – Finish Carpentry 2. 08110 – Metal Doors and Frames 3. 08212 – Stile and Rail Wood Doors 4. 08410 – Entrances and Storefronts 5. Division 16 – Access Control 1.02 REFERENCES A. STANDARDS 1. ANSI-A250.4 – Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance 2. ANSI A156.1 – Butts and Hinges 3. ANSI A156.2 – Bored Locks and Latches 4. ANSI A156.3 – Exit Devices 5. ANSI A156.4 – Door Controls – Door Closers 6. ANSI A156.5 – Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products 7. ANSI A156.6 – Architectural Door Trim 8. ANSI A156.7 – Template Hinge Dimensions 9. ANSI A156.8 – Door Controls – Overhead Holders 10. ANSI A156.13 – Mortise Locks and Latches 11. ANSI A156.15 – Closer Holder Release Devices 12. ANSI A156.16 – Auxiliary Hardware 13. ANSI A156.18 – Material and Finishes 14. ANSI A156.26 – Continuous Hinges 15. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies B. CODES STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 2 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2003 – International Building Code 3. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 4. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. B. SCHEDULES AND PRODUCT DATA 1. Schedules to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, and organized into “hardware sets” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening to function as intended. Hardware schedule shall be submitted within two (2) weeks from date the purchase order is received by the finish hardware supplier. Furnish four (4) copies of revised schedules after approval for field and file use. Note any special mounting instructions or requirements with the hardware schedule. Schedules to include the following information: a. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. b. Handing and degree of swing of each door. c. Door and frame sizes and materials. d. Keying information. e. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. f. Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings. g. Name and manufacturer of each hardware item. h. Fastenings and other pertinent information. i. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule j. Mounting locations for hardware when varies from standard. 2. Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware. 3. Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the owner’s final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. C. SAMPLES 1. Upon request, samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated shall be submitted. Samples are to remain undamaged and in working condition through submittal and review process. Items will be returned to the supplier or incorporated into the work within limitations of keying coordination requirements. D. TEMPLATES 1. Furnish a complete list and suitable templates, together with finish hardware schedule to contractor, for distribution to necessary trades supplying materials to be prepped for finish hardware. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 3 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO E. ELECTRONIC HARDWARE SYSTEMS 1. Provide complete wiring diagrams prepared by an authorized factory employee for each opening requiring electronic hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-open devices are specified. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted after approval. 2. Provide complete operational descriptions of electronic components listed by opening in the hardware submittals. Operational descriptions to detail how each electrical component functions within the opening incorporating all conditions of ingress and egress. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval. 3. Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations of the system components with respect to their placement in the door opening. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval. 4. Prior to installation of electronic hardware, arrange conference between supplier, installers and related trades to review materials, procedures and coordinating related work. 5. The electrical products contained within this specification represent a complete engineered system. If alternate electrical products are submitted, it is the responsibility of the distributor to bear the cost of providing a complete and working system including re-engineering of electrical diagrams and system layout, as well as power supplies, power transfers and all required electrical components. Coordinate with electrical engineer and electrician to ensure that line voltage and low voltage wiring is coordinated to provide a complete and working system. 6. For each item of electrified hardware specified, provide standardized molex plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Molex plug connectors shall plug directly into through-door wiring harnesses, frame wiring harnesses, electric locking devices and power supplies. F. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance manuals to the owner. Manuals to include the following items: a. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule. b. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions. c. Manufacturer’s written warranty information. d. Wiring diagrams, elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 4 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. All substitution requests must be submitted before bidding and within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant. B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS 1. A recognized architectural door hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has been furnishing hardware in the project’s vicinity for a period of at least two (2) years. Hardware supplier shall have office and warehouse facilities to accommodate this project and must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified herein. Hardware supplier shall have in his employment at least one (1) Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available at reasonable times during business hours for consultation about the project’s hardware and requirements to the owner, architect and contractor. 1.05 FIRE-RATED OPENINGS 1. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that comply with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey (WH) for use on types and sizes of doors indicated. 2. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. a. Hardware required for fire doors shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for ratings specified. b. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. MARKING AND PACKAGING 1. Properly package and mark items according to the approved hardware schedule, complete with necessary screws and accessories, instructions and installation templates for spotting mortising tools. Contractor shall check deliveries against accepted list and provide receipt for them, after which he is responsible for storage and care. Any shortage or damaged good shall be made without cost to the owner. 2. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As hardware supplier receives material from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set and door numbers to match STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 5 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO the approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. B. DELIVERY 1. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer/contractor until each is satisfied that count is correct. 2. No keys, other than construction master keys and/or temporary keys are to be packed in boxes with the locks. 3. At time of hardware delivery, door openings supplier in conjunction with the contractor shall check in all hardware and set up a hardware storage room. C. STORAGE 1. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. In the event of product failure, promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the owner. 1. Mortise locksets: Seven (7) years 2. Tubular locksets: One (1) Year 3. Exit Devices: Five (5) years 4. Door closers: Ten (10) years 5. Securitron (and approved equals) electrified hardware: Unlimited Lifetime PART II – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Only manufacturers as listed below shall be accepted. Obtain each type of finish hardware (hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, door closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. SCREWS AND FASTENERS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 6 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1. All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish hardware in the appropriate manner. Thru-bolts shall be supplied for exit devices and door closers where required by code and the appropriate blocking or reinforcing is not present in the door to preclude their use. B. HANGING DEVICES 1. HINGES a. Hinges shall conform to ANSI A156.1 and have the number of knuckles as specified, oil-impregnated bearings as specified with (NRP) non-removable pin feature, at all lockable reverse bevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, supply one (1) hinge for every 30” of door height. Unless otherwise specified, supply hinges 4 1/2" in height on doors up to 36” and hinges 5” in height on doors over 36” and up to 48” in width; heavy weight hinges (.180) shall be supplied at all doors where specified. 1) Specified Manufacturer: McKinney 2) Approved Substitutes: Hager, Stanley 2. ELECTRIC HINGES a. Electric hinges shall be provided with molex standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Plug connectors shall plug directly into molex through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a mortar guard for each electric hinge specified. 1) Specified Manufacturer: McKinney QC Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Hager ETW-QC Series 3. PIVOTS a. All pivots shall conform to ANSI 156.4 Grade 1 and shall have oil impregnated bronze bearing in the top pivot and a radial roller and thrust bearing in the bottom pivot. The bottom pivot shall carry the full weight of the door. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Rixson 2) Approved Substitutes: NONE 4. FLOOR CLOSERS a. Floor closer shall be of offset hung type and available for labeled, lead lined and regular doors. Floor closer shall have independent and adjustable valves for closing speed, latch speed, and backcheck. Floor closers shall have a built in dead stop to prevent the door from swinging beyond the opening degree and all shall be of non-hold open type unless specified otherwise. Include top and intermediate pivots per the manufacturer’s recommendations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 7 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1) Specified Manufacturer: Rixson (series as specified) 2) Approved Substitutes: NONE C. FLUSH BOLTS AND ACCESSORIES 1. All manual and automatic flush bolts to be furnished as specified. a. Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood b. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Trimco D. CYLINDERS AND KEYING 1. CYLINDERS a. Where specified, high security cylinders shall be supplied. Provide Patented High security keys able to operate both the appropriate conventional and high security cylinder within the same master key system while the keys for the conventional cylinders will not operate the high security cylinders. The high security cylinder can be easily re-configured by the Owner to void existing keys without disturbing the pinning of the master key system. If the master key system is compromised by the loss of a top-level master key, the system can be changed through a simple realignment of the barrel/plug components. The existing keys are then voided from operating the cylinder. Stamp all change keys with keyset symbol (VKC), but do not stamp with key section or bitting number. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent Signature UL (exterior openings) 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin Pyramid PHS, Yale U5000 Series 2. CYLINDERS a. Where specified, high security cylinders shall be supplied. Provide Patented High security keys able to operate both the appropriate conventional and high security cylinder within the same master key system while the keys for the conventional cylinders will not operate the high security cylinders. The high security cylinder can be easily re-configured by the Owner to void existing keys without disturbing the pinning of the master key system. If the master key system is compromised by the loss of a top-level master key, the system can be changed through a simple realignment of the barrel/plug components. The existing keys are then voided from operating the cylinder. Stamp all change keys with keyset symbol (VKC), but do not stamp with key section or bitting number. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent Signature (interior openings) 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin Pyramid PS, Yale 5000 Series 3. KEYING a. All locks and cylinders shall be construction master-keyed. All locks and cylinders to be master-keyed or grandmaster-keyed as directed by the owner. The factory shall key all locks and cylinders. Furnish the following key amounts: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 8 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1) Two (2) change keys per lock 2) Three (3) grand master keys 3) Six (6) master keys per master level 4) Fifteen (15) construction/temporary keys b. Master keys and all high-security or restricted keyway blanks shall be sealed in tamper-proof packaged boxes when shipped from the factory. The boxes shall be shrink wrapped and imprinted to ensure the integrity of the packaging. 4. KEY CABINET a. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self- locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Telkee 2) Approved Substitutes: Lund E. LOCKSETS 1. MORTISE LOCKSETS a. All locksets shall be ANSI 156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Certified. All functions shall be manufactured in a single sized case formed from 12 gauge steel minimum. The lockset shall have a field-adjustable, beveled armored front, with a .125” minimum thickness and shall be reversible without opening the lock body. The lockset shall be 2 3/4” backset with a one-piece 3/4” anti-friction stainless steel latchbolt and the deadbolt shall be a full 1” throw made of stainless. All strikes shall be non-handed with a curved lip. To insure proper alignment, all trim, shall be thru-bolted and fully interchangeable between rose and escutcheon designs and shall be the product of one manufacturer. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 8200 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin ML2000 Series, Yale 8800 Series 2. TUBULAR LOCKSETS a. All locksets shall fit an ANSI standard 161 door prep and shall be usable with 1 3/8” or 1 3/4" thick doors. Lever designs shall be available to match other locksets and exit devices. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent DL Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin TL Series, Yale RL Series 3. LOCKSET STRIKES a. Strikes shall be non-handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes as required. Provide strikes with lip-length required to accommodate jamb and/or trim detail and projection. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 9 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO F. AUXILIARY LOCKS 1. NARROW STILE DEADBOLTS 1) Specified Manufacturer: Adams Rite 2) Approved Substitutes: NONE G. ELECTRIC STRIKES 1. STANDARD STRIKES a. All standard electric strikes shall meet BHMA standard 501, grade 1 and be UL Listed for Burglary Resistance, category 1034. Strikes shall be all stainless steel construction for corrosion resistance, strength and durability. Strikes shall have been tested to withstand a forcing strength of a minimum 2400 lbs. before releasing and perform with a minimum of one million cycles of operation. Strikes shall be 24VDC fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Provide an in-line power controller with all electric strikes. 1) Specified Manufacturers: HES 1006 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Folger Adams 742 Series 2. SURFACE MOUNTED STRIKES a. All surface mounted electric strikes shall meet BHMA standard 501, grade 1 and be UL Listed for Burglary Resistance, category 1034. Strikes shall have two heavy-duty, stainless steel locking mechanisms operating independently to provide tamper resistance. Optional latchbolt and latchbolt strike monitoring that indicates position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike shall be available. Strikes shall have been tested for a minimum of 500,000 operating cycles. Provide an in-line power controller with all electric strikes. 1) Specified Manufacturers: HES 9500 Genesis 2) Approved Substitutes: NONE H. EXIT DEVICES 1. CONVENTIONAL DEVICES – PUSH RAIL a. All exit devices shall be ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 Certified and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and bear the UL label for life safety in full compliance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of stainless steel, brass or bronze no less than 0.072” thick. Push rails shall be constructed of 0.062” thick material. Lever trim shall be available in finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 80 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin ED5000 Series, Yale 7000 Series STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 10 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 2. ELECTRIFIED DEVICES a. Electrified exit devices shall conform to all traditional exit device standards as specified above. All power requirements for exit devices used must utilize a continuous circuit electric hinge for clean design and no visible means of interrupting power to device. b. All exit devices, both fire labeled and non-labeled devices, requiring electric dogging shall be held in the "dogged" or retracted position. All exit devices with electric latch retraction shall provide for a remote means of unlocking for momentary or maintained periods of time. c. Exit devices with electrified trim shall be fail-secure unless otherwise specified. 1) Specified Manufacturers: Sargent 2) Approved Manufacturers: Corbin Russwin, Yale I. DOOR CLOSERS 1. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS – HEAVY DUTY a. All door closers shall be ANSI 156.4, Grade 1 Certified. All closers shall have aluminum alloy bodies, forged steel arms, and separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arms mounting on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates or other accessories as required for proper mounting. Provide all required brackets and templates for mounting with overhead stops. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Norton 7500 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin DC6000, Sargent 351 Series, Yale 4400 Series 2. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS – STANDARD DUTY a. All door closers shall be ANSI 156.4, Grade 1 Certified. All closers shall have aluminum alloy bodies, forged steel arms, and separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arms mounting on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates or other accessories as required for proper mounting. Provide all required brackets and templates for mounting with overhead stops. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Norton 8500 Series STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 11 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin DC3200, Sargent 1431 Series, Yale 3500 Series J. DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES 1. Kick plates shall be .050 gauges and two (2) inches less than door width on push side and one (1) inch less than door width on pull side; height as specified in headings. Coordinate and provide width required where possible conflicting hardware dictates otherwise. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware schedule. a. Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood b. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Trimco K. DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS 1. WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPS a. Where a door is indicated on the plans to strike flush against a wall, wall bumpers shall be provided. Provide convex or concave design as indicated. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood 2) Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Trimco 2. OVERHEAD STOPS/HOLDERS a. Where specified, overhead stops/holders as shown in the hardware sets are to be provided. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket shall be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring shall be of heavy tempered steel. Overhead stops shall be of non-handed design. 1) Specified Manufacturers: Rixson (series as specified) 2) Approved Substitutes: Sargent (series as specified) 3. MAGNETIC HOLD-OPENS a. Magnetic door holders shall meet or exceed ANSI A156.15 and be UL listed 228 for Door Closer and Holders, with or without integral smoke detectors. Holding force shall be 25 to 40 pounds and shall be fail-safe. Pushpin release that eliminates residual magnetism shall be standard. Provide magnetic hold-opens with triple-voltage coil that can receive 12 VDC, 24 VAC/DC, or 120VAC; or coordinate required voltage with electrical. 1) Specified Manufacturers: Rixson 2) Approved Substitutes: HES, Sargent L. GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS 1. Provide continuous weatherseal on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide intumescent seals as STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 12 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO required to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 2. Provide threshold units not less than 4” wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames. All threshold units shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). a. Specified Manufacturers: Pemko b. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Reese, Zero M. SILENCERS 1. Furnish rubber door silencers all hollow metal frames; two (2) per pair and three (3) per single door frame. N. ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES 1. CARD ACCESS LOCKS AND SOFTWARE – HOSPITALITY LOCKSETS a. All locksets shall be ANSI 156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1. Locksets shall have flash RAM memory and a 600 even audit trail. Lockcases shall be motorized with locking mechanisms located in the lockcase and no accessible parts from the outside. Locksets shall be powered by 4.5 volts via 3 standard AAA batteries. Locksets shall have panic release where the deadbolt and latch are automatically retracted by the inside handle for easy egress in emergency situations. Auto deadbolt option where both the latch and deadbolt lock the door independently from each other shall be available. Where specified, locksets shall be supplied with an optional mechanical override cylinder. Use of mechanical key override shall be registered in the lock memory for audit trail. b. Remote card readers shall be easily reprogrammed and upgraded on site without replacing expensive hardware or components with a 100 event audit trail stored in the unit and sealed electronics located on the inside of the door, enhance security and durability. Units shall be powered by standard AA-battery-operated and have a simple, reliable magnetic stripe card reader with keycards read during removal, for maximum performance. c. The software shall utilize global standard Windows 95/98/2000/NT applications and LAN networking. Software shall have TCP/IP addressing capabilities and shall interface with the major PMS and IT systems. The system shall feature 16,000 user ID’s, 255 user groups, 31 keycard types, 8 lock timetables and unlimited common doors. d. Keycard encoders shall be automatic motor driven units allowing for rapid card encoding and verification. System shall be capable of up to 99 encoders and shall be connected in the LAN network directly, using TCP/IP addressing or the PC serial port. Multi-track encoders shall be used (Multi Track Network Encoder, 10bT, TCP/IP). STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 13 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1) Specified Manufacturers: VingCard Signature Series / VingCard Vision System 2) Approved Manufacturers: Or Equal Manufacturer. 2. IN-LINE POWER CONTROLLER a. Where specified, electrified products shall be supplied with an in-line power controller that enables the hardware to operate from 12 to 32 volts. On board safety features shall include an in-line fuse to protect the hardware and host system from any possible reverse current surges. The controller shall regulate current to provide continuous duty operation without the typical head build up. 1) Specified Manufacturers: HES 2005 Smart-Pac II 2) Approved Manufacturers: Folger Adams 3. POWER SUPPLIES a. Power supplies shall furnish regulated 24VDC and shall be UL class 2 listed. LED’s shall monitor zone status (voltage/no voltage) and slide switches shall be provided to connect or disconnect the load from power; 1, 4 or 8 separate output circuit breakers shall be provided to divide the load. Power supplies shall have the internal capability of charging optional 24VDC sealed lead acid batteries in addition to operating the DC load. Power supplies shall be supplied complete requiring only 120VAC to the fused input and shall be supplied in an enclosure. Power supplies shall be provided with emergency release terminals that allow the release of all devices upon activation of the fire alarm system. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Securitron BPS 2) Approved Substitutes: Folger Adams 2.03 FINISHES A. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 or traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. C. Where specified hardware shall have an antimicrobial coating which permanently suppresses the growth of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and mildew applied. The finish shall control the spread and growth of bacteria, mold and mildew and shall be FDA listed for use in medical and food preparation equipment. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 14 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO PART III – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to installing interior door hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free of defects. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations. 1. “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI.) 2. WDMA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, “Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors.” 3. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops are to be located. B. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with best trade practice by an experienced hardware installer. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. D. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The hardware supplier shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure that all hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order. B. The manufacturer’s representative shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure that all hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order. 3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 15 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore to proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes and usage of any electronic devices. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Contractor shall protect all hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. 3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor; do not consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware heading, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes. Hardware supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products as listed in the hardware heading. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. AD – Adams Rite 2. BA – Baldwin 3. BO – By Others 4. HS – HES 5. MK – McKinney 6. NO – Norton 7. PE – Pemko 8. RO – Rockwood 9. RF – Rixson 10. SA – Sargent 11. SU – Securitron 12. VI – Vingcard STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 16 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO Hardware Schedule Set: 1.0 Doors: A102B, A131C 2 Floor Closer SC 27NHO 90 DEG 3/4" OS CWF 626 RF 3 Side Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Electric Side Pivot EM19-QC 626 RF 1 Exit Device (Exit Only) 10 16 NB-8710 862 US32D SA 1 Electrified Exit Device 10UL 16 56 NB-8710 306 x 862 US32D SA 1 Controller DC6866 X FLUSH MOUNT US32D VI 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Threshold PH 3 X 700 (PR) X L.A.R. AL RF 1 Weatherstrip 45041CNB @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Door Sweep 309AP X L.A.R. PE 2 Split Astragal 18041CNB X L.A.R. PE 1 Power Supply BPS-24 SU 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C003P MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK 1 Door Buzzer BY OTHERS BO 2 Quickspotter Installation 1859001 RF Notes: Doors normally closed and locked. Access by authorized use of card reader (controller) or by use of authorized key. During certain hours, exit devices can be dogged down allowing doors to act as push pull doors. Doors always have free egress. Set: 2.0 Doors: A108B, A125A, A125B, A140A, A140B, A140C 2 Floor Closer SC 27NHO 90 DEG 3/4" OS CWF 626 RF 4 Side Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Exit Device (Exit Only) 10 16 NB-8710 862 US32D SA 1 Exit Device (Night Latch) 10UL 16 NB-8710 306 x 862 US32D SA 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Threshold PH 3 X 700 (PR) X L.A.R. AL RF 1 Weatherstrip 45041CNB @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Door Sweep 345ANB X L.A.R. PE 2 Split Astragal 18041CNB X L.A.R. PE 2 Quickspotter Installation 1859001 RF STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 17 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO Set: 3.0 Doors: A102A, A104A, A131A, A131B 2 Floor Closer SC 27NHO 90 DEG 3/4" OS CWF 626 RF 4 Side Pivot M19 626 RF 2 Push Bar & Pull BF15747 X L.A.R. US32D RO 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Threshold PH 3 X 700 (PR) X L.A.R. AL RF 1 Weatherstrip 45041CNB @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Door Sweep 345ANB X L.A.R. PE 2 Split Astragal 18041CNB X L.A.R. PE 2 Quickspotter Installation 1859001 RF Set: 4.0 Doors: B129C 2 Floor Closer SC 27NHO 90 DEG 3/4" OS CWF 626 RF 3 Side Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Electric Side Pivot EM19-QC 626 RF 1 Exit Device (Exit Only) NB-8710 US32D SA 1 Electrified Exit Device 10UL 56 NB-8710 306 x 862 US32D SA 1 Controller DC6866 X FLUSH MOUNT US32D VI 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Threshold PH 3 X 700 (PR) X L.A.R. AL RF 1 Weatherstrip 45041CNB @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Door Sweep 345ANB X L.A.R. PE 2 Split Astragal 18041CNB X L.A.R. PE 1 Power Supply BPS-24 SU 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C003P MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK 2 Quickspotter Installation 1859001 RF Notes: Doors normally closed and locked. Access by authorized use of card reader (controller) or by use of authorized key. Doors always have free egress. Set: 5.0 Doors: A142A Doors: A142A Doors: A142A Doors: A142A Doors: A142A Doors: A142A 4 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Exit Device (Night Latch) 10UL 8804 FSW US32D SA 1 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 1 Drop Plate 7788 (as required) 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2001AT X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303AS @ Head & Jambs PE STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 18 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Door Sweep 345AV X L.A.R. PE Set: 5.A Doors: A111, B111 4 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Exit Device (Night Latch) 10UL 12 8804 FSW US32D SA 1 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2001AT X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303AS @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Door Sweep 345AV X L.A.R. PE Set: 6.0 Doors: A104B 2 Floor Closer SC 27NHO 90 DEG 3/4" OS CWF 626 RF 3 Side Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Electric Side Pivot EM19-QC 626 RF 1 Exit Device (Exit Only) 10 16 NB-8710 862 US32D SA 1 Electrified Exit Device 10UL 16 56 NB-8710 306 x 862 US32D SA 1 Controller DC6866 X FLUSH MOUNT US32D VI 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Threshold PH 3 X 700 (PR) X L.A.R. AL RF 1 Weatherstrip 45041CNB @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Door Sweep 309AP X L.A.R. PE 2 Split Astragal 18041CNB X L.A.R. PE 1 Power Supply BPS-24 SU 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C003P MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK 2 Quickspotter Installation 1859001 RF Notes: Doors normally closed and locked. Access by authorized use of card reader (controller) or by use of authorized key. During certain hours, exit devices can be dogged down allowing doors to act as push pull doors. Doors always have free egress. Set: 7.0 Doors: B110A 4 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Exit Device (Passage) 8815 ETMD US32D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 2001AT X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303AS @ Head & Jambs PE STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 19 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Door Sweep 345AV X L.A.R. PE Set: 8.0 Doors: A142B 2 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Electric Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" QC US26D MK 1 Electrified Exit Device 10 12 8876 ETMD US32D SA 1 Controller DC6866 X FLUSH MOUNT US32D VI 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Power Supply BPS-24 SU 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005 HS 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C300P MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK Notes: Door normally closed and locked. Access by authorized use of card reader (controller) or by use of authorized key. Door always has free egress. Set: 9.0 Doors: B117A 8 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10UL 8204 TEMD US32D SA 1 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA (active leaf) 689 NO 2 Armor Plate K1050 36" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Threshold 253x3AFG X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303AS @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Sweep 315CN X L.A.R. PE 1 Astragal 357SP X S88D X L.A.R. PE Set: 10.0 Doors: A120A 3 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10UL 8204 TEMD US32D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 253x3AFG X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303AS @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Sweep 315CN X L.A.R. PE STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 20 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO Set: 11.0 Doors: B104A, B106A, B119A 3 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Lockset (Classroom) 10UL 8237 TEMD US32D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303AS @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Auto Door Bottom 420APKL X L.A.R. PE Set: 12.0 Doors: A605D 3 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Lockset (Passage) 8215 TEMD US32D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 253x3AFG X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303AS @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Sweep 315CN X L.A.R. PE Set: 13.0 Doors: A105, A116A 8 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Deadlock 10UL 4875 US32D SA 1 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO 4 Door Pull RM3310-36 BTB US32D RO 2 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 2 Drop Plate 7786/7788 (as required) 689 NO 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Threshold 272A X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 45041CNB @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Door Sweep 309AP X L.A.R. PE 2 Split Astragal 18041CNB X L.A.R. PE Set: 14.0 Doors: A124, A126 1 Floor Closer SC 28SHO X 554 90 DEG CWF 626 RF 2 Door Pull RM3310-36 BTB US32D RO 1 Floor Stop 482 US26D RO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 21 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 BALANCE BY DOOR SUPPLIER BO Set: 15.0 Doors: AP118B, AP323, BP115A, BP115B, BP116 3 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Exit Device (Storeroom) 10 12 8804 ETMD US32D SA 1 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 16.0 Doors: AP118A, BP216 6 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Removable Mullion 10 12-L980 X L.A.R. PC SA 1 Exit Device (Exit Only) 12 8810 US32D SA 1 Exit Device (Storeroom) 10 12 8804 ETMD US32D SA 2 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Split Astragal 305CN X L.A.R. PE Set: 16.A Doors: B118 8 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Removable Mullion 10 12-L980 X L.A.R. PC SA 1 Exit Device (Exit Only) 12 8810 US32D SA 1 Exit Device (Storeroom) 10 12 8804 ETMD US32D SA 2 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A X L.A.R. PE 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Sweep 315CN X L.A.R. PE 2 Split Astragal 305CN X L.A.R. PE Set: 17.0 Doors: A211, A214, A311, A314, A411, A414, A511, A514, A611, A614, B211, B212, B311, B312, B411, B412, B511, B512, B611, B612, B616, B711, B716 3 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Exit Device (Passage) 12 8815 ETMD US32D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 22 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 17.A Doors: A114, B112 3 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Exit Device (Passage) 12 8815 ETMD US32D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA X 2018S 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Overhead Stop 9-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 17.B Doors: AP111, AP211, AP311, BP111, BP112, BP211, BP212, BP311, BP312 3 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Exit Device (Passage) 12 8815 ETMD US32D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A X L.A.R. PE 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Sweep 315CN X L.A.R. PE Set: 18.0 Doors: AP218, AP220, AP321, AP322 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO 1 Card Key Lockset SIGNATURE-TREND MD Lever 626 Cover US26D VI 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA (active leaf) 689 NO 2 Armor Plate K1050 36" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Astragal 357SP X L.A.R. PE Set: 18.A Doors: AP124 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Auto Flush Bolt 1842 US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Card Key Lockset SIGNATURE-TREND MD Lever 626 Cover US26D VI 1 Coordinator 1672 Black RO 2 Mounting Bracket 1601AB (as required) Black RO 2 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 23 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 2 Armor Plate K1050 36" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Astragal 357SP X S88D X L.A.R. PE Set: 18.B Doors: AP120A 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Auto Flush Bolt 1842 US26D RO 1 Card Key Lockset SIGNATURE-TREND MD Lever 626 Cover US26D VI 1 Coordinator 1672 Black RO 2 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 2 Armor Plate K1050 36" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A X L.A.R. PE 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Sweep 315CN X L.A.R. PE 1 Astragal 357SP X S88D X L.A.R. PE Set: 19.0 Doors: B107 1 Pivot Set L147 626 RF 2 Side Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Exit Device (Night Latch) 10 8504 862 US32D SA 1 Electric Strike 9500 630 HS 1 Controller DC6866 X FLUSH MOUNT US32D VI 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Drop Plate 7788 (as required) 689 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Power Supply BPS-24 SU 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005 HS 1 Door Seal DOOR MANUFACTURERS STANDARD Set: 20.0 Doors: B108B 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Card Key Lockset SIGNATURE-TREND MD Lever 626 Cover US26D VI 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 21.0 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 24 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO Doors: A218, A318, A418, A518, A618, B215, B315, B415, B515, B615, B714 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Card Key Lockset SIGNATURE-TREND MD Lever 626 Cover US26D VI 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 22.0 Doors: B122 8 Hinge TA2314 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO 1 Mortise Deadlock MS1850S X 4089 628 AD 1 Thumb Turn 4066 628 AD 1 Mortise Cylinder 10 41 X 101 US26D SA 2 Push Bar & Pull BF15747 X L.A.R. US32D RO 1 Door Closer CLP7500 (active leaf) 689 NO 1 Drop Plate 7788 (as required) 689 NO 1 Overhead Stop 9-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Door Seal DOOR MANUFACTURERS STANDARD BO Set: 23.0 Doors: B620A, B620B, B620C 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Auto Flush Bolt 1942 US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Coordinator 1672 Black RO 2 Mounting Bracket 1601AB (as required) Black RO 2 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Split Astragal 18041CNB X L.A.R. PE Set: 23.A Doors: BP119A 6 Hinge TA2714 5" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Flush Bolt 555 X (rod length as required) US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA (active leaf) 689 NO 2 Armor Plate K1050 36" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 25 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Astragal 357SP X S88D X L.A.R. PE Set: 24.0 Doors: AP126, AP216, AP324, B115, BP316 6 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Auto Flush Bolt 1842 US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Coordinator 1672 Black RO 2 Mounting Bracket 1601AB (as required) Black RO 2 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 2 Armor Plate K1050 36" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Astragal 357SP X S88D X L.A.R. PE Set: 25.0 Doors: AP217, AP318, B116, B703, B704 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO Set: 25.A Doors: B130 1 Pivot 147 626 RF 2 Side Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Mortise Deadlock MS1850S X 4089 628 AD 1 Thumb Turn 4066 628 AD 1 Mortise Cylinder 10 41 X 101 US26D SA 2 Door Pull BF157 BTB US32D RO 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Drop Plate 7786/7788 (as required) 689 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Door Seal DOOR MANUFACTURERS STANDARD BO Set: 26.0 Doors: A106, A107, B109 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 26 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO Set: 26.A Doors: BP315 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 253x3AFG X L.A.R. PE 1 Gasketing S44D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Auto Door Bottom 420APKL X L.A.R. PE Set: 27.0 Doors: AP120B 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA X 2018S 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Overhead Stop 9-X36 (size as required) 630 RF Set: 28.0 Doors: A110 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 29.0 Doors: A121, A217, A317, A417, A517, A617, A619, AP117, AP219, AP315, AP319, AP320, B216, B316, B416, B516, B619 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 27 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO Set: 30.0 Doors: AP214, AP316, AP317, BP318 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 30.A Doors: AP119 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2001AT X L.A.R. PE 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Auto Door Bottom 420APKL X L.A.R. PE Set: 31.0 Doors: AP123 3 Hinge TA2714 5" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 32.0 Doors: AP120C, AP125, BP117, BP117A, BP117B, BP119B 3 Hinge TA2714 5" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA X 2018S 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Overhead Stop 9-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 33.0 Doors: A117, A119 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Office) 10 8205 TEMD US26D SA STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 28 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO Set: 34.0 Doors: A116B 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Classroom) 10 8237 TEMD US26D SA 1 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF Set: 35.0 Doors: AP121 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Classroom) 10 8237 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO Set: 35.A Doors: AP122 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Classroom) 10 8237 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 253x3AFG X L.A.R. PE 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Auto Door Bottom 420APKL X L.A.R. PE Set: 36.0 Doors: A128, A129 4 Hinge TA714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 4 Spring Hinge 1502 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Lockset (Privacy) SG 49 8265 TEMD US26D SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Mop Plate K1050 6" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO Set: 37.0 Doors: A109, A115, A127, A130 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Privacy) SG 49 8265 TEMD US26D SA STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 29 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Mop Plate K1050 6" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 38.0 Doors: B125, B127 4 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Mortise Deadlock MS1850S X 4089 628 AD 1 Thumb Turn 4066 628 AD 2 Door Pull BF157 BTB US32D RO 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Drop Plate 7786/7788 (as required) 689 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Door Seal DOOR MANUFACTURERS STANDARD BO Set: 39.0 Doors: B124, B128 4 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Mortise Deadlock MS1850S X 4089 628 AD 1 Thumb Turn 4066 628 AD 2 Door Pull BF157 BTB US32D RO 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Drop Plate 7786/7788 (as required) 689 NO 1 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Door Seal DOOR MANUFACTURERS STANDARD BO Set: 40.0 Doors: B105A, B106B, B108A 1 Pivot Set L147 626 RF 2 Side Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Push Bar & Pull BF15747 X L.A.R. US32D RO 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Drop Plate 7786/7788 (as required) 689 NO 1 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Door Seal DOOR MANUFACTURERS STANDARD BO Set: 41.0 Doors: AP116, AP215, AP314, BP118, BP215, BP317 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Passage) 8215 TEMD US26D SA STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 30 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A X L.A.R. PE 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Auto Door Bottom 420APKL X L.A.R. PE Set: 41.A Doors: B129A, B129B 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Passage) 8215 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A X L.A.R. PE 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Auto Door Bottom 420APKL X L.A.R. PE Set: 42.0 Doors: A120B 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Lockset (Storeroom) 10 8204 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Set: 43.0 Doors: A118, AP114 3 Hinge TA2798 4-1/2" x 6" US26D MK 1 Lockset (Passage) 8215 TEMD US26D SA 1 Door Closer 7500ST-180 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Electromagnetic Holder 998 689 RF 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Notes: Door normally held open by electromagnetic holder. Holder to be tied into the building fire alarm system. During an alarm electromagnetic holder will release, allowing door to close and latch. Set: 44.0 Doors: B123, B126 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 31 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Pivot Set L147 626 RF 2 Side Pivot M19 626 RF 2 Door Pull BF157 BTB US32D RO 1 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Drop Plate 7786/7788 (as required) 689 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Door Seal DOOR MANUFACTURERS STANDARD BO Set: 45.0 Doors: A108A 8 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US26D MK 1 Flush Bolt 555 X (rod length as required) US26D RO 1 Deadlock 10 4875 US26D SA 4 Door Pull RM3310-36 BTB US32D RO 2 Door Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 2 Drop Plate 7786 (as required) 689 NO 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 1" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (size as required) 630 RF 1 Weatherstrip 45041CNB @ Head & Jambs PE 2 Door Sweep 309AP X L.A.R. PE 2 Split Astragal 18041CNB X L.A.R. PE Set: 46.0 Doors: A101, A605C, B101A, B102A 4 Hinge TA2314 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Card Key Lockset SIGNATURE-TREND MD Lever 626 Cover US26D VI 1 Door Closer 8500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 519 (as required) US26D RO 1 Threshold 272A X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303AS @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Sweep 315CN X L.A.R. PE 1 Door Guard 604 US26D RO 1 Viewer 622 US26D RO Set: 46.A Doors: B605B 3 Hinge TA2314 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP) US32D MK 1 Card Key Lockset SIGNATURE-TREND MD Lever 626 Cover US26D VI 1 Door Closer 8500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 519 (as required) US26D RO 1 Threshold 272A X L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303AS @ Head & Jambs PE STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 32 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Sweep 315CN X L.A.R. PE 1 Door Guard 604 US26D RO 1 Viewer 622 US26D RO Set: 47.0 Doors: A201, A202, A203, A204A, A204B, A205A, A205B, A206, A207, A208, A209, A301, A302, A303, A304A, A304B, A305A, A305B, A306, A307, A308, A309, A310, A401, A402, A403, A404A, A404B, A405A, A405B, A406, A407, A408, A409, A410, A501, A502, A503, A504A, A504B, A505A, A505B, A506, A507, A508, A509, A510, A601, A602A, A603A, A604, B101B, B102B, B103, B201A, B201B, B202, B203, B204, B205, B301, B302, B303A, B303B, B304, B305, B306, B307, B401, B402, B403A, B403B, B404, B405, B406, B407, B501, B502, B503A, B503B, B504, B505, B506, B507, B601, B602A, B603, B604, B605A, B701A, B701B, B702A 1 Hinge TA714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Spring Hinge 1502 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Card Key Lockset SIGNATURE-TREND MD Lever 626 Cover US26D VI 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 519 (as required) US26D RO 1 Threshold V232D X L.A.R. PE 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Auto Door Bottom 411ARL X L.A.R. PE 1 Door Guard 604 US26D RO 1 Viewer 622 US26D RO Set: 48.0 Doors: Unit Communicating Doors 45MIN. (Verify Quantities) 1 Hinge TA714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Spring Hinge 1502 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Lockset (Communicating) 8213 TOMD US26D SA 1 Deadlock 10 4875 US26D SA 1 Door Stop 519 (as required) US26D RO 1 Gasketing S773D @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Auto Door Bottom 411ARL X L.A.R. PE Notes: Provide hinge pin stop where required. Set: 49.0 Doors: Unit Communicating Doors Non-Rated (Verify Quantities) 3 Hinge T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Tubular Lockset (Passage) 243 Sunrise US32D IX 1 Deadlock 10 4875 US26D SA 1 Door Stop 519 (as required) US26D RO Notes: Provide hinge pin stop where required. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 33 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO Set: 50.0 Doors: Unit Single Swing Bathroom & Bedroom Doors (Verify Quantities) 3 Hinge T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Tubular Lockset (Privacy) 243 Sunrise US32D IX 1 Door Stop 519 (as required) US26D RO Notes: Provide hinge pin stop where required. Set: 51.0 Doors: Unit Single Swing Closet, Laundry & Mech. Room Doors (Verify Quantities) 3 Hinge T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Tubular Lockset (Passage) 243 Sunrise US32D IX 1 Door Stop 519 (as required) US26D RO Notes: Provide hinge pin stop where required. Set: 52.0 Doors: Unit Pairs Closet, Laundry & Mech. Room Doors (Verify Quantities) 6 Hinge T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Roller Latch 590 US26D RO 2 Tubular Lockset (Dummy) 243 Sunrise US32D IX 2 Door Stop 519 (as required) US26D RO Notes: Provide hinge pin stop where required. Set: 53.0 Doors: Unit Pocket Bathroom Doors (Verify Quantities) 1 Pockset Door Set PF28200A X L.A.R. PE 1 Pocket Door Privacy 8585 264 BA Set: 54.0 Doors: Unit By-Pass Doors (Verify Quantities) 1 Bypass Hardware Set HBP200A X L.A.R. PE 2 Flush Pull 95A US26D RO Set: 55.0 Doors: Unit Sliding Balcony Doors (Verify Quantities) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 34 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO 1 Cylinder CYLINDER AS REQUIRED US26D SA 1 BALANCE BY DOOR SUPPLIER BO Set: 56.0 Doors: Unit Pair Balcony Doors (Verify Quantities) 2 Flush Bolt 555 X (rod length as required) US26D RO 1 Tubular Lockset (Passage) 243 Sunrise US32D IX 1 Deadbolt 10 485 US26D SA 1 BALANCE BY DOOR SUPPLIER BO Set: 57.0 Doors: Unit Single Swing Balcony Doors (Verify Quantities) 1 Deadbolt 10 485 US26D SA 1 Tubular Lockset (Passage) 243 Sunrise US32D IX 1 Door Stop 519 (as required) US26D RO 1 BALANCE BY DOOR SUPPLIER BO Set: 58.0 Doors: B117B, B119B 1 Controller DC6866 X FLUSH MOUNT US32D VI 1 BALANCE BY DOOR SUPPLIER BO Set: Misc-1 1 Software VISION SOFTWARE VI 1 Misc SOFTWARE/LOCK TRAINING VI 1 Misc ENCODER VI 1 Misc CARDS (Confirm quantity with owner) VI Set: Misc-2 2 Knox Box 3200R X 3200RMK Black KX Notes: Locations of knox boxes to be determined by the local fire department. Set: Misc-3 Doors: B121 1 HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER BO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Door Hardware 08710 - 35 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Denver, CO END OF SECTION 08710 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed curtain walls. 4. Glazed entrances. 5. Interior borrowed lites. 6. Storefront framing. 7. Shower enclosures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for glass panels forming guards in railings. 2. Division 8 Section "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts." 3. Division 8 Section "Mirrored Glass." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated, but not less than wind loads applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.0 "Wind Loads." b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less . c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick . 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass. 1. Wired glass. 2. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. 3. For each color (except black) of exposed glazing sealant indicated. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. For low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For installers. F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. G. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: 1. Insulating glass. 2. Glazing sealants. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: insulating glass. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. E. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants: 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, glazing materials matching those submitted. G. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. H. Glazing for Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. I. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. J. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." K. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. L. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating- glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product specified. 4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 6. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat- strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated, or if not indicated, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Pyrolytic-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide coating applied by pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, and complying with other requirements specified. D. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide or -nitride coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), and complying with other requirements specified. E. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q-6; and of form and mesh pattern specified. F. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated or, if not indicated, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: a. Manufacturer's standard sealants. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. a. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. b. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction. 2.3 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 4. Any material indicated above. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. EPDM. 2. Silicone. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 4. Any material indicated above. 2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants : a. Available Products: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 795. 2) GE Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000. 3) Pecora Corporation; 895. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. 1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass; aluminum coated with a high- performance coating . f. Applications: 1) As cap, toe, and heel beads in non- structural glazing applications. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants for Butt- Glazed Shower Enclosures: a. Available Products: 1) GE Silicones; SCS1701. 2) Pecora Corporation; 895. 3) Tremco; Proglaze b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. f. Color: Clear. C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating. 2.5 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.6 SHOWER ENCLOSURE GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Channel: C.R. Laurence Co.; CRL Brite Anodized Frameless Shower Door Aluminum Deep U-Channel for 3/8" Thick Glass. B. Seals: C.R. Laurence Co.: 1. Door Bottom: Model No. P500BR, CRL Polycarbonate Bottom Rail with Wipe for 3/8" Glass. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Door Jamb Fin: Model No. SDTDF, CRL Translucent Vinyl "Double Leg" Seal for 5/16" Maximum Gap. 3. Door Jamb Strike: Model No. P12LJ, CRL Multi-Purpose Polycarbonate Clear Strike Angle Jamb. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating. 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.9 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units : Class 1 (clear) float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.10 MONOLITHIC WIRED-GLASS UNITS A. Polished Wired-Glass Units: Form 1 (wired glass, polished both sides), Quality-Q6, Mesh 2 (M2) (Square), 6.0 mm thick. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Asahi/AMA Glass Corp.; affiliated with AFG Industries, Inc. b. Central Glass Co., Ltd.; distributed by Northwestern Industries Inc. c. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd. 2.11 CONVENTIONAL INSULATING-GLASS UNITS A. Clear Insulating-Glass Units: 1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6.0 mm. 2. Interspace Content: Air. 3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 2.12 LOW-EMISSIVITY INSULATING-GLASS UNITS A. Clear Low-E Insulating-Glass Units : 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG; Solarban 60, or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Guardian Industries. b. Pilkington. c. Viracon. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6.0 mm, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Interspace Content: Air. a. Kind HS (heat strengthened); Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 5. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38 maximum. 9. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 percent maximum. 10. Shading Coefficient: 0.44 maximum. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 13 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 14 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MIRRORS 08830 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08830 - MIRRORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors. 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. 2. Tempered glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and spandrel lites. 2. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. 2. Mirror mastic. 3. Mirror hardware. B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of mirror product required, in the form indicated below: 1. Mirrors, 12 inches square, including edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges. 2. Mirror trim, 12 inches long. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MIRRORS 08830 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, signed by product manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from one source for each type of mirror indicated. B. Source Limitations for Mirror Glazing Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from one source for each type of accessory indicated. C. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." D. Safety Glazing Products: For tempered mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. E. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MIRRORS 08830 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below: 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of manufacture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering mirrors that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. Lenoir Mirror Company. 3. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. 4. VVP America, Inc.; Binswanger Mirror Products. 2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS A. Clear Glass Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Select Quality. 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm . B. Tempered Clear Glass Mirrors: Comply with ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, for blemish requirements in annealed float glass before silver coating is applied, for coating requirements, and with other requirements not affected by tempering process; and comply with ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied. 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm . 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MIRRORS 08830 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Gunther Mirror Mastics. b. Palmer Products Corporation. 2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE 1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/16 and 3/4 inch in height, respectively. 2. Top Trim: Formed with front leg with a height of 5/16 inch and back leg designed to fit into the pocket created by wall-mounted aluminum cleat. 3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Bottom Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D638 FHA Type "J" Channel. b. Top Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D 1638 Top Channel. c. Cleat: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D 1637M Mirror Mount System Cleat. B. Plated Steel Hardware: Formed-steel shapes with plated finish indicated. 1. Profile: As indicated. 2. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full line. C. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. D. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, and before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts before tempering for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge . 1. Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MIRRORS 08830 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with mirror installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. For wall-mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. 1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 2. For mirror hardware in the form of a continuous J-channel at bottom and continuous top trim at top, fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall. 3. Where indicated, install mirror hardware in the form of bottom J-channels and top trim that are fabricated in single lengths to fit and cover top and bottom edges of mirrors. 4. Install mastic as follows: a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material. b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MIRRORS 08830 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. END OF SECTION 08830 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08911 – GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior curtainwall framing. 2. Curtainwall framing for punched openings. 3. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts" for systems without aluminum support framing. 2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for interior systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) . E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) . G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind- load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. . H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. . 1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes. I. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C) . J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 74 (frame) and 60 (glass) when tested according to AAMA 1503. K. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.60 when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum- framed systems. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Welding certificates. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO H. Source quality-control reports. I. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1. E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 2250 L-R Wall, Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. United States Aluminum. 2. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 3. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken . 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides . 3. Glazing Plane: As indicated . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system . D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457-mm-) thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. G. Provide manufacturer’s high- performance flashing receivers at sills and where elsewhere indicated. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/4-inch (50.8- to 57.2-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior . 2. Door Design: As indicated . a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior . 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Match Kawneer “Champagne”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm). STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08911 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. PRIVATE tbl1 END OF SECTION 08911 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08952 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 08952 - FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes assemblies incorporating fiberglass sandwich panels and aluminum frame systems as follows: 1. Wall assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for steel framing that supports skin-system assemblies. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal flashings installed at perimeters of assemblies. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed at perimeters of assemblies. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide assemblies, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. B. Failure includes the following: 1. Deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. Water leakage. 3. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. 4. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. 5. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 6. Delamination of fiberglass-sandwich-panel faces from panel cores. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated by structural design data on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated by earthquake design data on Drawings. 3. Load Combinations: Calculate according to requirements of applicable code indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Assemblies: 1. Vertical Assemblies: Limited to 1/45 of clear span for each assembly component. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08952 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 1.3 PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Provide assemblies that comply with test-performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Structural-Performance Test: ASTM E 330. 1. Performance at Design Load: When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. Performance at Maximum Test Load: When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main supporting members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds. C. Air-Infiltration Test: ASTM E 283. 1. Minimum Static-Air-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) . 2. Maximum Air Leakage: 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m). D. Test for Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. 1. Minimum Static-Air-Pressure Difference: 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. (479 Pa). 2. Water Leakage: None. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for assemblies. B. Shop Drawings: For assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for assemblies. D. Maintenance Data: For assemblies to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08952 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Entity capable of assuming engineering responsibility, including preparation of Shop Drawings, and performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: For fiberglass sandwich panels, a qualified manufacturer whose facilities, processes, and products are monitored by an independent, accredited quality-control agency for compliance with applicable requirements in ICBO ES AC04, "Sandwich Panels." C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for assemblies' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including testing conducted by an independent testing agency and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-test-response characteristics are indicated for assemblies and components, provide products identical to those tested per test method indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. NFRC Certification: Provide fiberglass sandwich panels that are certified for U-factors indicated according to NFRC 100 and listed in its "National Fenestration Council Incorporated - Certified Products Directory." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Water leakage. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08952 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Special Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace panels that exhibit defects in materials or workmanship. 1. Defects include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fiberbloom. b. Delamination of coating, if any, from exterior face sheet. c. Discoloration of exterior face sheet of more than 8.0 units Delta E when measured according ASTM D 2244. d. Delamination of panel face sheets from panel cores. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Aluminum-Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, and fading of finishes. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for assemblies is based on Kalwall Corporation; Insulated Translucent Fiberglass Sandwich Panel Wall/ Roof System. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Major Industries, Inc. 2. Skywall Translucent Systems; Vistawall Group (The). 2.2 ALUMINUM FRAME SYSTEMS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. B. Components: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken; framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded-aluminum components permanently bonded by a material of low thermal conductance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08952 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not less than 0.040 inch (1.016 mm) thick. D. Frame-System Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard. E. Frame-System Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer. F. Anchors, Fasteners, and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding; compatible with adjacent materials. 1. At closures, retaining caps, or battens, use ASTM A 193/A 193M, 300 series stainless-steel screws. 2. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. 3. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type recommended in writing by manufacturer. G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. H. Frame System Fabrication: 1. Fabricate components before finishing. 2. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: a. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. b. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. c. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within components, and moisture migrating within the assembly to exterior. 3. Fabricate sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous component. 4. Reinforce components as required to receive fastener threads. 2.3 FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANELS A. Panel Construction: Assembly of uniformly colored, translucent, thermoset, fiberglass- reinforced-polymer face sheets bonded to both sides of a grid core and complying with requirements applicable to panel materials in ICBO ES AC04, "Sandwich Panels." 1. Face-Sheet, Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F (343 deg C) or more per ASTM D 1929. 2. Face-Sheet Burning Extent: 1 inch (25 mm) or less per ASTM D 635. 3. Face-Sheet, Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less per ASTM E 84. 4. Interior Face-Sheet, Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 50 per ASTM E 84. B. Panel Thickness: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) . C. Panel U-Factor: Not more than 0.23 (1.31) , measured in Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K) according to NFRC 100 or ASTM C 1363 using procedures described in ASTM C 1199 and ASTM E 1423. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08952 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Panel Strength Characteristics: 1. Maximum Panel Deflection: 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) when a 4-by-12-foot (1.2-by-3.6-m) panel is tested according to ASTM E 72 at 34 lbf/ sq. ft. (1.6 kPa), with a maximum 0.090-inch (2.3-mm) set deflection after 5 minutes. 2. Panel Support Strength: Capable of supporting, without failure, a 300-lbf (1334 N) concentrated load when applied to a 3-inch (76-mm-) diameter disk according to ASTM E 661. E. Grid Core: Mechanically interlocked extruded-aluminum I-beams, with a minimum flange width of 7/16 inch (11.1 mm). 1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), in alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. I-Beam Construction: Thermally broken; two separate extruded-aluminum components permanently bonded by a material of low thermal conductance. 3. Grid Pattern: Nominal 24 by 12 inches, reverse shoji, symmetrical about the horizontal centerline for each panel. F. Exterior Face Sheet: 1. Thickness: 0.070 inches (1.778 mm) . 2. Color: Crystal . 3. Color Stability: Not more than 3.0 units Delta E when measured according to ASTM D 2244 after outdoor weathering in southern Florida according to procedures in ASTM D 1435 with panels mounted facing south and as follows: a. Panel Mounting Angle: Not more than 5 degrees from horizontal. b. Exposure Period: 60 months . 4. Erosion Protection: Integral, embedded glass erosion barrier . 5. Impact Resistance: No fracture or tear at impact of 70 ft. x lbf (95 J) by a 3-1/4-inch (83-mm-) diameter, 5-lb (2.3-kg) free-falling ball according to test procedure in UL 972. G. Interior Face Sheet: 1. Thickness: 0.045 inch (1.143 mm) . 2. Color: White . H. Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Adhesive: ASTM D 2559. 1. Compatible with facing and core materials. 2. Tensile and shear bond strength of aged adhesive ensures permanent adhesion of facings to cores, as evidenced by testing according to ASTM C 297 and ASTM D 1002 after accelerated aging procedures that comply with aging requirements for adhesives with high resistance to moisture in ICBO ES AC05, "Sandwich Panel Adhesives." I. Panel Fabrication: Factory assemble and seal panels. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08952 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Laminate face sheets to grid core under a controlled process using heat and pressure to produce straight adhesive bonding lines that cover width of core members and that have sharp edges. a. White spots indicating lack of bond at intersections of grid-core members are limited in number to 4 for every 40 sq. ft. (3.7 sq. m) of panel and limited in diameter to 3/64 inch (1.2 mm). 2. Fabricate with grid pattern that is symmetrical about centerlines of each panel. 3. Fabricate panel to allow condensation within panel to escape. 4. Reinforce panel corners. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. High-Performance Organic Finish (3-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08952 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum components will contact dissimilar materials, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose. C. Install continuous aluminum sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed or welded corners. Locate weep holes at rafters. D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within aluminum members and panels, and moisture migrating within assembly to exterior. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations. F. Erection Tolerances: Install assemblies to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) where surfaces abut in line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches (76 mm); otherwise, limit offset to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.7 m); 1/2 inch (13 mm) over total length. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 08952 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 2. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed with non-load-bearing steel framing. 3. Division 9 Section "Portland Cement Plaster" for metal lath supported by non-load- bearing steel framing. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for non-load-bearing metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum panels, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 1.4 Performance Requirements A. Select steel studs in accordance with the manufacturer's standard load tables and the following Design Pressures and Maximum Deflections: B. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Use Condition 2 Design Pressure Maxi- mum De- flection 1 Wall enclosing stairs, elevator hoist- ways, and other vertical shafts 10 PSF L/240 Wall enclosing vestibules, ground floor lobbies, and similar spaces subject to in- termittent exposure to exterior wind condi- tions 15 PSF L/240 Typical Interior Walls/Partitions (those not listed above) 5 PSF L/240 Walls scheduled with Tile Backing Panels, Moisture and Mold-Resistant Type Panels, High- Impact Type Panels, and Abuse-Resistant Type Panels. 5 PSF L/360 Interior Soffits and Bulkheads 5 PSF L/360 Notes: 1. Limit deflection to L/360 where wall cladding on either face is any of the following: Ceramic Tile, Stone Tile, Porcelain Tile, Thin Brick,, Lath & Plaster, Simulated Masonry or Veneer Plaster. 2. Where elements meet multiple conditions; Use most stringent Deflection and Design Pressure values. A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by, and displaying a classification label from, an independent testing agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 1. Construct fire-resistance rated partitions in compliance with tested assembly requirements indicated on Drawings. 2. Rated assemblies to be substantiated from applicable testing using proposed products, by Contractor. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Design framing systems in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute Publication “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Framing – NonStructural Members”, except as otherwise shown or specified. D. Design loads: As indicated on the Architectural Drawings or 5 PSF minimum as required by the International Building Code. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Design framing systems to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances and to withstand design loads with a maximum deflection indicated on Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Basis of Design : Provide products as manufactured by ClarkDietrich Building Systems B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 645 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Comply with ASTM C 645; roll-formed from hot-dipped galvanized steel; complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M and ASTM A 653/A 653M G40 (Z120) or having a coating that provides equivalent corrosion resistance. A40 galvannealed products are not acceptable. C. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Minimum Thickness: a. Interior Partitions: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm) unless indicated or required otherwise. b. Stud Jambs: 0.027 inch (0.68 mm)unless indicated or required otherwise. c. Tiled Walls, comply with TCNA recommendations minimum 0.029 inch (0.752 mm) 3 1/2 inch deep, not to exceed 16 inches on center. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 3. Protective Coating: Comply with ASTM C 645; roll-formed from hot-dipped galvanized steel; complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M and ASTM A 653/A 653M G40 (Z120) or having a coating that provides equivalent corrosion resistance. A40 galvannealed products are not acceptable. D. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm) unless indicated or required otherwise. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due to deflection of structure above. E. Non-Structural Track: Cold-formed galvanized steel runner tracks, drywall track, in conformance with ASTM C 645. F. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm- ) deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. G. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. H. Control Joint Backer: Metal profile which supports intumescent materials located inside and spanning gap between opposing drywall edge at control joint locations. I. Backing Plate: Proprietary fire-resistance-treated blocking and bracing in width indicated. J. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. K. Channel Bridging and Bracing: Steel, 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72- mm-) thick, galvanized steel. L. U-Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. M. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) unless indicated or required otherwise. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. N. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Product: RC Deluxe Resilient Channel O. Carrying Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.0296 inch (0.75 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59- mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. P. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1. Refer to Division 09 Section “Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing”. Q. Radius Framing: Steel sheet runner for non-load-bearing curves, bends, variable radii and arches using a work-hardened steel base strip. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) unless indicated or required otherwise. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. R. Headers and Jambs: Manufacturer’s proprietary shape used to form header beams and jambs, columns or posts, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges and as follows: 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm). 2. Web and Flange Widths, Type HDS: As indicated on Drawings. S. Framed Openings: Galvanized steel one piece header and jamb studs meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C754 for conditions indicated below. 1. Header Clip: Attachment screw pattern per manufacturer’s printed literature. 2. Header Flange Length: 3 inch (76 mm) HS300 flange. 3. Jamb Flange Length: 3 inch (76 mm) JS300 flange. 4. Minimum Yield Strength: 33ksi (227 MPa). 5. Minimum Material Thickness: .As required by design. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, in size as indicated on Drawings. E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Non-Structural Studs: Cold-formed galvanized steel C-studs, as per ASTM C 645 a. Flange Size: 1 1/4 inch (32mm). b. Web Depth: As specified on drawings. 4. Non-Structural Track: Cold-Formed galvanized steel runner tracks in conformance with ASTM C 645 for conditions indicated below: a. Flange Size: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm). b. Web Depth: Track web to match stud web size. c. Minimum Material Thickness: Track thickness to match wall stud thickness or as per design. 5. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Hat shaped. G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. All sealants and adhesives applied within the air barrier of the building must comply with VOC requirements as indicated in Division 01 Section “Sustainable Design Requirements”. B. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. D. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. E. Z-Furring Members: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09111 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath plaster bases. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section “Quality Control” for Exterior Envelope Mockup incorporating Portland cement plaster. 2. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 3. Division 6 Section “Sheathing” for weather- resistive building paper. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed with exterior portland cement plaster (stucco). 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENST A. Structural (wind and axial loads) 1. Design for maximum allowable system deflection, normal to the plane of the wall, of L/360. 2. Design for wind load in conformance with code requirements. Also consult applicable code compliance report. 3. Refer to Structural Drawings. B. Moisture Control 1. Prevent the accumulation of water into or behind the stucco, either by condensation or leakage into the wall construction, in the design and detailing of the wall assembly. a. Provide corrosion resistant flashing to direct water to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly, including, above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills, at roof/wall intersections, decks, abutments of lower walls with higher walls, above projecting features, and at the base of the wall. b. Air Leakage Prevention—prevent excess air leakage in the design and detailing of the wall assembly. Provide continuity between air barrier components in the wall assembly. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO c. Vapor Diffusion and Condensation-- perform a dew point analysis of the wall assembly to determine the potential for accumulation of moisture in the wall assembly as a result of water vapor diffusion and condensation. Adjust insulation thickness and/or other wall assembly components accordingly to minimize the risk of condensation. Avoid the use of vapor retarders on the interior side of the wall in warm, humid climates. d. On framed wall construction provide a code compliant moisture barrier over sheathing. Note: building codes vary with respect to the type moisture barrier required and the number of layers. For example, the International Building Code (IBC) requires two layers of Type 1 Grade D building paper over wood- based sheathings. Check the applicable code and code compliance report for the appropriate type. e. Protect sills of rough openings with barrier membrane. Where casing bead is used back-to-back at expansion joints, back joints with barrier membrane. Refer to manufacturer’s details. C. Grade Condition 1. Do not specify stucco for use below grade or on surfaces subject to continuous or intermittent water immersion or hydrostatic pressure. Provide minimum 4 inch clearance above earth grade, minimum 2 inch clearance above finished grade (pavers/sidewalk). Provide increased clearance in freeze/thaw climate zones. D. Joints and Accessories 1. Provide two piece expansion joints in the stucco system where building movement is anticipated: at joints in the substrate or supporting construction, where the system is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates, at changes in building height, at floor lines, at columns and cantilevered areas. 2. Provide one piece expansion joints every 144 ft2 (13 m2). Cut and wire tie lath to the expansion joint accessory so lath is discontinuous at or beneath the accessory. Do not exceed length to width ratio of 2-1/2:1 in expansion joint layout and do not exceed more than 18 feet (5.5 m) in any direction without an expansion joint. Where casing bead is used back-to-back as the expansion joint, back the joint with barrier membrane. 3. Provide one piece expansion joints at through wall penetrations, for example, above and below doors or windows. 4. Provide minimum 3/8 inch (9 mm) wide joints where the system abuts windows, doors and other through wall penetrations. 5. Provide appropriate accessories at stucco terminations and joints. 6. CAUTION: Exercise extreme care in design and detailing when incorporating channel reveal accessories in the stucco wall assembly. Embed in sealant and apply surface sealant as necessary to prevent water leakage where channel reveal accessories abut or intersect with other accessories. Do not use channel reveal accessories in lieu of expansion or control joints. The use of channel reveal accessories may interfere with drainage and cause excess cracking where stucco adjoins the accessory. Limit use to areas that can be easily maintained or avoid their use. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 7. Provide appropriate sealant at stucco terminations and at stucco accessory butt joints. 8. Indicate location of joints, accessories and accessory type on architectural drawings. E. Fire Protection 1. “One Coat” Stuccos: refer to ICC ESR 2323 or other manufactured listed “one coat” stucco ESR’s for limitations that apply with respect to construction Type and/or fire- resistive rated construction. 2. ASTM C 926 Compliant Stuccos: Refer to IBC Table 720.1(2) for hourly rated assemblies. F. Stucco Thickness (does not include primer or textured finish coat) 1. Application to Metal Plaster Bases: a. Minimum stucco thickness shall be 5/8 inch (16 mm) for “one coat” stucco. Minimum stucco thickness shall be ¾ inch (19 mm) for ASTM C 926 compliant stucco. b. Stucco thickness shall not exceed 7/8 inch (22 mm). 2. Stucco shall be applied in 2 coats (including “one coat” stucco), scratch and brown coat, to achieve the prescribed thickness. a. Thickness shall be uniform throughout the wall area. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 3. Mockup requirements may be satisfied by Exterior Envelope Mockup (reference Division 1 Section “Quality Control”) if requirements above are incorporated into Exterior Envelope Mockup. B. Inspections STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Provide independent third party inspection where required by code or contract documents. 2. Conduct inspections in accordance with code requirements and contract documents. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. C. Protection: 1. Protect adjacent finished surfaces prior to stuccoing. 2. Maintain protection in place until completion of work. 3. Protect finished work when stopping for the day or when completing an area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS, GENERAL A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 1063. For steel sheet components not included in ASTM C 1063, comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated. C. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 3/4 or 7/8 inches, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1. Refer to Division 09 Section “Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing”. 2.3 EXTERIOR WALL SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G- P Gypsum Corporation. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches. 2.4 WEATHER- RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Composite Air Barrier/Vapor Retarder: Nonwoven, unperforated polymer sheet laminated to Grade “D” asphalt- saturated kraft building paper and weighing not less than 7.9 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.0025 perm. 2.5 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Minimum 2.5 lb/yd2. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Accessories: 1. Manufacturers: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). b. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO). c. Dietrich Industries, Inc. d. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating. 3. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. 5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 6. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece- type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 7. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4-to- 5/8-inch wide; with perforated flanges. C. Aluminum Accessories: 1. Corner Molding: “X” Corner Molding, Fry Reglet. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. C. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed threads. D. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. E. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and system. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.8 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. D. Preblended Stucco System: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide StoPowerwall Stucco as manufactured by Sto Corp., or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Dryvit Systems, Inc. b. Senergy, Inc. 2. Integrally colored, factory blended, flexible acrylic textured finish with graded marble aggregate. a. StoPowerwall Finish b. Color and Texture: Match Architect's sample. 3. Thickness: ½ inches/ 2.9 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. B. 102 StoPowerwall Stucco Pre-Blended: fiber reinforced one coat portland cement stucco pre-blended with graded sand, and in compliance with ICC AC 11. See ICC ESR 2323. 1. Mix approximately 1-1.5 gallons (3.8-5.7 L) of clean, potable water with each 80 lb (36 kg) bag of pre-blended stucco. 2. Add slight amount of water if needed for consistency . Measure total amount of water and use the same amount for each batch. 3. Add ½ to 2/3 of the required water and one bag of StoPowerwall Stucco Pre-Blended in a paddle type mortar mixer. Then add sufficient water to achieve a uniform mix of workable consistency. 4. Mix for 3-5 minutes after all materials are in the mixer. Stucco material can be re- tempered once in the first hour after mixing. Avoid re-tempering after the first hour and discard material older than 1.5 hours. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 5. Keep mix ratio consistent from batch to batch and mix each batch separately. 6. USE ONLY THE AMOUNT OF WATER NECESSARY FOR A WORKABLE MIX. 7. Use of excess water is detrimental to performance. C. Finish--mix with a clean, rust-free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency. A small amount of water (up to 12 ounces [0.4 L]) may be added to adjust workability. Limit addition of water to amount needed to achieve the finish texture. D. Mix only as much material as can readily be used. E. Do not add lime, anti-freeze compounds, or other additives to any of the materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Install z-shaped furring vertically, with shorter flange attached to substrate, refer to manufacturers recommendation for fastener recommendation and spacing. C. Verify proper installation of insulation prior to the installation of portland cement plaster system 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING A. Fasten sheathing to z-shaped furring, using fasteners as per manufacturers recommendation. B. Surface Preparation of Sheathing 1. Remove surface contaminants and replace damaged sheathing. 2. All sheathing must be handled and installed in compliance with applicable code and/or manufacturer requirements. Installed sheathing must be clean, dry and free from damage and frost. Abut gypsum sheathing joints. Gap wood sheathing 1/8 inch (3 mm) at joints. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 INSTALLTION OF WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Install in compliance with the applicable building code requirements for building paper. Lap paper over foundation weep screed attachment flange, floor line flashing, and window/door head flashings. 3.5 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. General--install metal lath with the long dimension at right angles to structural framing. Terminate lath at expansion joints. Do no install continuously beneath joints. 2. Install lath perpendicular to z-furring. 3. Seams/Overlaps--overlap side seams minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) and end seams minimum 1 inch (25 mm). Stagger end seams. Overlap casing beads and expansion joints minimum 1 inch (25 mm) over narrow wing accessories, minimum 2 inches (51 mm) over expanded flange accessories. Do not install lath continuously beneath expansion joints. 4. Attachment--fasten securely through sheathing into structural framing at 7 inches (178 mm) on center maximum vertically and 16 inches (406 mm) on center horizontally*. Wire tie at no more than 9 inches (225 mm) on center at: side laps, accessory overlaps, and where end laps occur between supports. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. Install lath-type external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at interior locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at the following locations: D. One Piece Expansion Joint Installation 1. Install one piece expansion joints over lath at through wall penetrations, for example, above and below doors or windows. 2. Wire tie one piece expansion joints to lath at no more than 7 inches (178 mm) on center. a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m), or as indicated. b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m), or as indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO c. Make certain lath is discontinuous beneath joints. 3. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c. 4. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 5. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 6. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. E. Inside and Outside Corners 1. Install corner lath at inside corners and corner bead at outside corners over lath. Attach through lath into framing at no more than 7 inches (178 mm) on center with appropriate fasteners. 3.7 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base-coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor. 3. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. B. Scratch and Brown Coat: Apply sufficient material, to cover the metal lath and to permit scoring the surface. Score the stucco upon completion of each panel in preparation for a second coat. Score horizontally. C. Apply primer evenly, allow to dry thoroughly before applying finish. D. Finish Installation: 1. Apply finish directly over the stucco and foam build-outs when dry. Apply finish by spraying or troweling with a stainless steel trowel, depending on the finish specified. Follow these general rules for application of finish: a. Allow primed stucco wall surface to dry minimum 28 days. b. Avoid application in direct sunlight. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO c. Apply finish in a continuous application, and work a wet edge towards the unfinished wall area. Work to an architectural break in the wall before stopping to avoid cold joints. d. Weather conditions affect application and drying time. Hot or dry conditions limit working time and accelerate drying. Adjustments in the scheduling of work may be required to achieve desired results; cool or damp conditions extend working time and retard drying and may require added measures of protection against wind, dust, dirt, rain and freezing. Adjust work schedule and provide protection. e. Float "R" (rilled texture) finishes with a plastic float to achieve their rilled texture. f. Do not install separate batches of finish side-by-side. g. Do not apply finish into or over joints or accessories. Apply finish to outside face of wall only. h. Do not apply finish over irregular or unprepared surfaces, or surfaces not in compliance with the requirements of the project specifications. i. Do not install finish over high pH (> 10) stucco surfaces or surfaces that have not been fully cured. 3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. B. Provide protection of installed stucco from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing. C. Provide protection of installed primer and finish from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high humidity until fully dry. D. Provide sealant and backer material at stucco terminations to protect against air, water and insect infiltration. Provide weeps at floor lines, window and door heads, and other areas to conduct water to the exterior. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from doorframes, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 09220 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel framing that supports gypsum board. 2. Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing. 3. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 4. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 5. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. 6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 7. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. For the purposes of this Section, exposure to moisture or water shall be defined as follows: 1. Direct Exposure: Gypsum Board products behind finished surfaces that will normally and regularly be exposed to liquid water and/ or water condensation in the course of normal building operation or use. 2. Incidental Exposure: Gypsum Board products behind finished surfaces that may intermittently be exposed to liquid water and/ or water condensation in the course of normal building operation or use. 3. No Exposure: Gypsum Board products behind finished surfaces that will not be exposed to liquid water and/ or water condensation in the course of normal building operation or use. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size, but no smaller than 12-inches-square, for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Mockups: Before beginning interior non- load- bearing steel framing installation, install mockup of typical unit-to-unit demising partition to demonstrate acoustical and aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Include the following: a. Steel framing and acoustical accessories. b. Electrical outlets and other typical partition penetrations. Incorporate acoustical construction and accessories. c. Acoustical insulation. d. Gypsum board, including all layers and construction for indicated partition type. e. Acoustical sealant. f. Level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. g. Each texture finish indicated, if any. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELS, GENERAL A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with Material Quality Standard(s) as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated. When more than one Standard is indicated, comply with more stringent requirements. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BPB America Inc. b. G-P Gypsum. c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. B. Typical (Type X): 1. Material Quality Standards: ASTM C 36 and ASTM C 1396. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Type C: 1. Material Quality Standards: ASTM C 36 and ASTM C 1396. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. E. Moisture-Resistant Type: Paper-faced, with treated, water resistant gypsum core: 1. Material Quality Standards: ASTM C 36 and ASTM C 1396. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Basis-of-Design Product: “Sheetrock Humitek Gypsum Panels”, USG Corporation. F. Mold-Resistant Type: Paperless, with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Material Quality Standards: ASTM C 630 and ASTM C 1177. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Basis-of-Design Product: "DensArmor Plus Interior Drywall", G-P Gypsum. 2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G- P Gypsum. 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: 1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1178. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Square. 4. Basis-of-Design Product: "DensShield Tile Backer", G-P Gypsum. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc . 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. 1) Basis-of-Design Product: “103 Deluxe Corner Bead”; Dietrich Metal Framing. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 1) Basis-of-Design Product: “M20A Metal U- Trim/ Spackle J”; Dietrich Metal Framing. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1) Basis-of-Design Product: “M20B Metal L- Trim”; Dietrich Metal Framing. d. Expansion (control) joint. 1) Basis-of-Design Product: “093 Zinc Control Joint”; Dietrich Metal Framing. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. b. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3.3 APPLYING VAPOR RETARDERS A. Comply with general requirements in Division 7 Section “Building Insulation”. B. In addition to vapor retarders indicated at exterior envelope assemblies and where elsewhere indicated, provide reinforced-polyethylene vapor retarders at the following interior assemblies: a. Partitions and ceilings enclosing Steam Room B121, Indoor Pool B108, and Locker Entry B120. 3.4 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Provide interior gypsum board types in the following locations, unless otherwise indicated: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Typical (Type X): Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated; Ceiling and other horizontal surfaces where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated . 2. Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 3. Ceiling Type: Gypsum board ceiling surfaces where no fire-resistance-rated assembly is indicated. 4. Tile Backing Panels: a. Glass- Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Board: 1) Backing for vertical and horizontal tile installations, unless otherwise indicated. 2) Non- tiled gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces at Indoor Pool B108 and Locker Entry B120. b. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. 1) Backing for vertical and horizontal tile installations, unless otherwise indicated, at Steam Room B121. B. Provide Moisture- and Mold- Resistant Types according to the following tables: MO I S T U R E - R E S I S T A N T T Y P E MO L D - R E S I S T A N T T Y P E Walls and Ceilings within following room types (Incidental Exposure): Mechanical Equipment Rooms Janitor Closets Laundry Rooms Linen and Refuse Chute Rooms Finishes: Paint Wall Coverings X X STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO MO I S T U R E - R E S I S T A N T T Y P E MO L D - R E S I S T A N T T Y P E Walls Incorporating the following Ele-ments (Incidental Exposure): Drinking Fountains Isolated Wall-Hung Lavatories Countertop Sinks Any Other Water Source (Assume 4’-0” width of exposure, cen-tered on fixture or other water source) Finishes: Paint Wall Coverings X X TO I L E T S A N D B A T H R O O M S Walls with adjacent plumbing fixtures (“wet walls”) (Incidental Exposure) Finishes: Paint Wall Coverings X Walls other than “wet walls” (No Exposure) Finishes: Paint Wall Coverings X X Tub and Shower Walls (Direct Exposure) Finishes: Paint and Wall Cover- ings above other fin-ishes X Suspended Ceilings (No Exposure) Finishes: Paint only X X Walls above ceilings (Incidental Exposure) X X Interior Face Of Exterior Walls (No Expo-sure, except for future potential of water or moisture infiltration through exterior wall) Finishes: Paint Wall Coverings X X C. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. D. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base- layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.5 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. Provide continuous edge trim and sealant bead. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. 3.6 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, install according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. L-Bead: Use at exposed conditions where trim is installed after wallboard installation.. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed conditions where trim is installed during wallboard installation.. D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Schedule of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide following levels of gypsum board finish per ASTM C 840 and GA-214. 1. Level 1: a. Plenum areas above ceilings. b. Substrate for stone veneers. c. Substrate for wood paneling. d. Shell areas (Tenant finish out). 2. Level 2: a. Moisture resistant gypsum board used as substrate for ceramic tile. 3. Level 3: a. Mechanical, electrical, telephone and elevator equipment rooms. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Level 4: a. Areas to receive paints over no texture, unless listed above for Level 3. b. Areas to receive Type II vinyl wall coverings. c. Areas to receive fabric wall coverings. 5. Level 5: a. Areas where critical lighting conditions occur, including the following: 1) Building A Level 1 public areas where adjustable down lighting is located with the purpose of illuminating specific wall or partition surfaces. 2) Building B Level 1 public areas where adjustable down lighting is located with the purpose of illuminating specific wall or partition surfaces. 3) Walls or partitions in public areas specifically illuminated by directional flood or spot lights. 4) Walls or partitions in residential corridors specifically illuminated by directional flood or spot lights. b. Areas to receive lightweight Type I vinyl wall coverings. c. Areas to receive unbacked vinyl wallcoverings. d. Areas to receive gloss paints or high- performance coatings. E. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for the following: 1. Shaft-wall enclosures. 2. Stair enclosures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: 1. Provide gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies capable of withstanding the full air-pressure loads indicated for maximum heights of partitions without failing and while maintaining an airtight and smoke-tight seal. Evidence of failure includes deflections exceeding limits indicated, bending stresses causing studs to break or to distort, and end-reaction shear causing track (runners) to bend or to shear and studs to become crippled. 2. Air-pressure loads and deflection limits are specified in "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall" Article(s) in Part 2. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. B. Engineering data (limiting height load charts) from gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer substantiating compliance of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies with structural performance requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. BPB America Inc. 2. G-P Gypsum. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG Corporation. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated. 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M. 1. Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces. a. Core: 1 inch thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. 2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces; comply with ASTM D 3273. a. Core: 1 inch thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. B. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 , hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 9 Section " Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." D. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer construction. E. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03 inch thick. F. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO G. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. H. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. I. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated. C. STC Rating: As indicated. D. Sustained Air-Pressure Loads: 7.5 lbf/sq. ft. (0.36 kPa). E. Deflection Limits: 1. L/240 unless otherwise indicated. F. Minimum Base Metal Thicknesses: Manufacturer's standard thicknesses that comply with structural performance requirements for depth indicated for studs, runner tracks, and other components. G. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Depth: As indicated . H. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs. I. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. J. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs. K. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials." 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels. B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. 2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 gypsum board face-layer panel. D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required to enclose rods. E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. G. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. H. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or, if not shown, according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. I. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. J. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 4 inches of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch- thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. No recesses allowed (at steel beams especially). 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws fastened to shaft-wall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing. K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09265 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Acoustical underlayment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units and glass-mat, water-resistant backer board. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: 1. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square , but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. F. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Joint sealants. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge- mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific tile selections. 2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane. b. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic L (PRP M19). 2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane. b. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic L (PRP M19). 2.5 ACOUSTICAL UNDERLAYMENT A. Sound Control Underlayment: (On all floors unless indicated otherwise.) 1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. NobelSeal SIS as manufactured by Noble Company. 1) Thickness: 3/64 inch 2) Material: Non-plastic Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) 3) Thickness: 50 mils 4) Performance: a) Sound Transmission Class: According to ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413, 59 b) Impact Insulation Glass (IIC) ASTM E 492 and ASTM E 989, 62 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. 1. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm) by 0.062-inch (1.57-mm) diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. B. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of ¾ inch . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ”Full Contact 907”, C-Cure, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Jamo Inc. b. Laticrete International. c. MAPEI Corporation. d. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ”Permabond 902”, C-Cure, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International d. MAPEI Corporation. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene- butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout (Sanded): ANSI A118.7. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ”MP Sanded 924”, C- Cure, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Summitville Tiles, Inc. c. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout (Unsanded): ANSI A118.7. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ”MP NonSanded 923”, C- Cure, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Summitville Tiles, Inc. c. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. C. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Wall Joints: One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White. D. Floor Joints: Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan. b. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-2c SL. c. Tremco Incorporated.; THC-900 . 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds for Concrete Substrates: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. E. Wall Access Panel System: Aluminum brackets with molded casings containing magnets that are clamped to lateral, movable guide shoes, and ferromagnetic metal counterplates. a. Product: Schluter REMA. b. Locations: Tiled access panels for whirlpool tubs and similar fixtures requiring access through tiled vertical surfaces. 2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives, bonded mortar bed, or thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors in laundries. c. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. d. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. E. Joint Widths: Reference Interior Finish Legends/ Schedules. F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured. 3.6 ACOUSTICAL UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical underlayment to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions to produce continuous underlayment bonded to substrate and ready to receive scheduled tile. 3.7 WALL ACCESS PANEL INSTALLATION A. Coordinate placement of access panels with fixture controls and other components requiring access. B. Install tiled access panels and panel magnetic holders as recommended by manufacturer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.9 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Suspended Slabs: Tile Installation F125A: Thin-set or medium bed mortar on crack isolation membrane; TCA F125A. a. Tile Type: As indicated in Finish Schedule. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Medium Bed Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. d. Grout: Polymer-modified, sanded or unsanded as appropriate for joint width. B. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (Pool and Related Areas): 1. Tile Installation F121: Cement mortar bed (thickset) on waterproof membrane; TCA F121 and ANSI A108.1C. a. Tile Type: As indicated in Finish Schedule. b. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured- Bed Method: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified, sanded or unsanded as appropriate for joint width. C. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; thin-set mortar; TCA W245 and ANSI A108.5. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Tile Type: As indicated in Finish Schedule. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified, sanded or unsanded as appropriate for joint width. D. Bathtub/Shower Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation B419: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; TCA B419. a. Tile Type: As indicated in Finish Schedule. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified, sanded or unsanded as appropriate for joint width. E. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation: Interior wall and shower-receptor installation over coated glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; thin-set mortar; TCA B420, TCA W245, and ANSI A108.5. a. Tile Type: As indicated in Finish Schedule. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified, sanded or unsanded as appropriate for joint width. d. Include waterproofing membrane and/ or shower pan as required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Steam Room, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation: Interior ceiling, wall and receptor installation over cementitious backer unit; thin-set mortar; TCA SR614 and TCA B422. a. Tile Type: As indicated in Finish Schedule. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified, sanded or unsanded as appropriate for joint width. END OF SECTION 09310 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot . C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components. F. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings-- Seismic Zones 0-2." 2. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Reference Drawings for specific acoustical panel ceiling selections. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. 1. Structural Classification: Provide Intermediate-duty systems minimum, but in no case less than that required for system loading. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Reference Interior Finish Legend in the Drawings for specific metal suspension system selections. 2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Reference Interior Finish Legend in the Drawings for specific molding and trim selections. B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 9. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT SPORTS-FLOOR COVERINGS 09622 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09622 - RESILIENT SPORTS-FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rubber sheet floor covering. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Sections for resilient floor coverings installed in areas other than athletic-activity spaces. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for wall base and accessories installed with floor coverings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details and locations of the following: 1. Floor patterns. 2. Locations of floor inserts for athletic equipment. 3. Seam locations. C. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, and pattern of floor covering indicated, 6- inch square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. D. Qualification Data: For sheet vinyl floor covering Installer. E. Maintenance Data: For floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storing. B. Store materials to prevent deterioration. Store rolls upright. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Adhesively Applied Products: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT SPORTS-FLOOR COVERINGS 09622 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: a. 48 hours before installation, unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. b. During installation. c. 48 hours after installation, unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 95 deg F . 3. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. 4. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation, unless manufacturer recommends longer period in writing. B. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER SHEET FLOOR COVERING A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. ECORE International; ECOsand Recycled Rubber Flooring B. Material: Recycled-rubber compound. C. Installation Method: Adhered. D. Traffic-Surface Texture: Smooth E. Roll Size: Not less than 48 inches wide by longest length that is practical to minimize splicing during installation. F. Thickness: 1/4 inch. G. Color and Pattern: Reference “TRH PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for manufacturer's designations. H. Accessories: 1. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by floor covering manufacturer. 2. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and conditions indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT SPORTS-FLOOR COVERINGS 09622 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended in writing by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 5.5 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. 1) Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. and perform not less than 2 tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. b. Perform tests recommended in writing by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in writing. 1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT SPORTS-FLOOR COVERINGS 09622 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Scribe, cut, and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface. C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings, unless otherwise indicated. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating subfloor markings on floor coverings. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. E. Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and floor covering manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 SHEET FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. B. Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. C. Seams: Prepare and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT SPORTS-FLOOR COVERINGS 09622 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Protect floor coverings with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over floor coverings. END OF SECTION 09622 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT SPORTS-FLOOR COVERINGS 09622 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD FLOORING 09640 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09640 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes prefinished and field-finished wood flooring. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including location and layout of each type of wood flooring and accessory. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA's "Official Flooring Grading Rules" for species, grade, and cut. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. B. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet work is complete and dry. C. Store wood flooring materials in a dry, warm, ventilated, weathertight location. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after wood flooring installation. 1. Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F and relative humidity planned for building occupants in spaces to receive wood flooring during the conditioning period. 2. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later than the beginning of the conditioning period. a. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is at same temperature as, space where it is to be installed. b. Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize immediately on moving flooring into spaces in which it will be installed. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD FLOORING 09640 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PREFINISHED AND FIELD-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific wood flooring and finish selections. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bonding Underlayment: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “AcouBond System”, Sika Corporation. B. Vapor Retarder: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Primer MB”, Sika Corporation. C. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by wood flooring manufacturer. D. Trim: In same species and grade as wood flooring, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Base: Nominal 1 inch thick by 4 inches high. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood flooring. 1. Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections. 2. For adhesively applied wood flooring, verify that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Substrate Moisture Testing, General: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer or, if none, comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." 1. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Concrete Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test per ASTM F 1869, as follows: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD FLOORING 09640 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. and perform not less than 2 tests in each installation area with test areas evenly spaced in installation area. 2. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Perform alkalinity and adhesion tests recommended in writing by manufacturer or, if none, according to NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Grind high spots and fill low spots on concrete substrates to produce a maximum deviation in any direction when checked with a straight edge. 1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances on substrates that are incompatible with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. C. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with flooring and bonding underlayment manufacturers’ written installation instructions, but not less than applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." B. Vapor Retarder: 1. When required to establish moisture-vapor-emission rate in compliance with wood flooring manufacturer’s requirements, install liquid- applied vapor retarder according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Roll out bonding underlayment on properly prepared subfloor, approximately 3/4-inch away from walls. Apply adhesive in cutouts in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Position flooring and press firmly into place. Utilize spacers to maintain required expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less than 1/4 inch or as otherwise recommended by manufacturer. E. Calk expansion spaces with acoustical sealant acceptable to manufacturer. F. Wood Trim: Nail baseboard to wall and nail shoe molding or other trim to baseboard; do not nail to flooring. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD FLOORING 09640 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 FIELD FINISHING A. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish. 1. Comply with wood flooring manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Fill and repair wood flooring seams and defects. C. Apply floor-finish materials in number of coats recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than one coat of floor sealer and three finish coats. 1. Apply stains to achieve an even color distribution matching approved Samples. 2. For water-based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish manufacturer to minimize grain raise. D. Cover wood flooring before finishing. E. Do not cover wood flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after applying last finish coat. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause condensation. 1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over kraft-paper-covered wood flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring. END OF SECTION 09640 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Sports-Floor Coverings" for resilient floor coverings for use in athletic-activity or support areas. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Floor Tile” for resilient floor tile. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. C. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific resilient wall base selections. B. Resilient Base: C. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) . 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) . 3. Style: As indicated. D. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch . E. Height: As indicated. F. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length . G. Outside Corners: Preformed. H. Inside Corners: Job formed . I. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. J. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed outside corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09653 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EPOXY FLOOR COATING 09671 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09671 - EPOXY FLOOR COATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes floor coating systems with epoxy body coats. 1. Application Method: Squeegee and roller. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each floor coating component required. B. Material Test Reports: For each floor coating component. C. Maintenance Data: For floor coating to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who is experienced in applying floor coating systems similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to floor coating manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary floor coating materials through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. C. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and performance characteristics and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 72-inch square floor area selected by Architect. a. Include aggregate to demonstrate slip resistance characteristics. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EPOXY FLOOR COATING 09671 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Store materials to prevent deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with floor coating manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting floor coating application. B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during floor coating application. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor coating application and for not less than 24 hours after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EPOXY FLOOR COATING A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dur-A-Flex Inc.; Dur-A-Gard High Build Epoxy Coating. B. System Characteristics: 1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance. 3. Overall System Thickness: 20 mils DFT. C. System Components: Manufacturer's standard components that are compatible with each other and as follows: 1. Body Coat(s): a. Resin: Epoxy. b. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids. c. Application Method: Squeegee and roller. 1) Thickness of Each Coat: 8 mils DFT. 2) Number of Coats: Two. d. Aggregates: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coat(s) indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EPOXY FLOOR COATING 09671 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Patching and Fill Material: product of or approved by floor coating manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to floor coating manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral Ph substrate for floor coating application. B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with floor coating. 1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows: a. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent. 2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to floor coating manufacturer's written recommendations. 3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry. a. Perform plastic sheet test, ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates. b. Perform additional moisture tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. 4. Verify that concrete substrates have neutral Ph and that floor coating will adhere to them. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. C. Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to floor coating manufacturer's written instructions. D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through floor coating according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.2 APPLICATION A. General: Apply components of floor coating system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EPOXY FLOOR COATING 09671 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of floor coating system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure floor coating components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. 3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in floor coating to comply with floor coating manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply body coats in number of coats indicated for floor coating system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Protect floor coating from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by floor coating manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09671 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET 09680 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Broadloom carpet. 2. Carpet cushion. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate: 1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics and durability. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Seam locations, types, and methods. 4. Type of subfloor. 5. Type of installation. 6. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 9. Transition details to other flooring materials. 10. Type of carpet cushion. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- square Sample. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET 09680 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Methods for maintaining carpet and carpet cushion, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and carpet cushion. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: As indicated by reference to manufacturer’s designations. B. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories. 2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET 09680 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BROADLOOM CARPET A. Reference “TRH PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific carpet selections. 2.2 CARPET CUSHION A. Products: 1. Residential Units: Bonded, density 8.0 lb./cu.ft., anti- microbial, 3/8-inch thick. 2. Public Areas: Tred-mor 2500, Sponge Cushion, Inc. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET 09680 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and written installation instructions for carpet and substrates indicated. 1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." 4. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch-in Installation." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET 09680 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO F. For patterned carpets, install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations. G. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet cushion manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET 09680 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET TILE 09681 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes modular carpet tile. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section " Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 2. Division 9 Section "Carpet." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 9. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples. D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. G. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET TILE 09681 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET TILE 09681 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: As referenced by specific carpet tile selections . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific carpet tile selections. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET TILE 09681 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure- sensitive adhesive . C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET TILE 09681 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09681 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CARPET TILE 09681 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS 09770 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09770 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fiberglass- reinforced plastic panels, accessories, and trim. 1.2 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor. 2. ASTM D5420 Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact). 3. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels which have been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each product type. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. Indicate location and dimension of joints and fastener attachment. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Include Samples of trim strips to verify color selected. 1. FRP Panels: 6 by 6 inches square. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS 09770 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Trim: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices. 3. Fasteners. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Material Test Reports: For each FRP panel type. G. Material Certificates: For each FRP panel type, signed by manufacturer. H. Maintenance Data: For each FRP panel type to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of FRP panels under anticipated use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. I. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in performing work of this section, with a record of successful installation of FRP products and systems. C. Source Limitations: Obtain FRP panels, trim, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact- resistant wall-protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Package sheets on skids or pallets for shipment to project site. B. Store FRP panels, trim, and accessories in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep material out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS 09770 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Handling: Remove foreign matter from face of panel by using a soft bristle brush, avoiding abrasive action. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install FRP panels and accessories until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with FRP panels by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 FRP Panels A. Class A Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Wall Panels: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Crane Composites, “Fire-X Glasbord” or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Glasteel. b. Marlite. 3. Panel thickness: a. 0.09 IN. 4. Barcol hardness not greater than 40. 5. Interior Finish rating: Class A (I) when tested in accord with ASTM-E84: a. Flame spread: Less than 25. b. Smoke developed: Less than 450. 6. Water absorption no greater than 0.08 percent at 24 hours at 77 deg F in accordance with ASTM-D570. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS 09770 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 7. Identify boards by manufacturer's standard marking on reverse side of panel. 8. Finish: Pebble grain. 9. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard or custom range. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to substrate indicated. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine walls to which FRP panels will be attached. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails are countersunk and joints and cracks are filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing FRP panels or other system components. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install FRP panels level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Install impact-resistant wall-protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect 2. Provide trim, splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS 09770 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace products that have been installed and are damaged. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 09770 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS 09770 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 3. Steel. 4. Wood. 5. Gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 9 Section "Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 3. Division 9 Section “High- Performance Coatings”. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. B. Benchmark Samples: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. Kelly-Moore Paints. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Kwal-Howells Paint. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors and Sheens: Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections . 2.3 BLOCK FILLERS A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. 2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 2.5 METAL PRIMERS A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. 2.6 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 2.7 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex: MPI #5X (Gloss Level X). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates (Field- Applied Primers): Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. H. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed to the public including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 3.1E. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. B. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. C. Steel Substrates: 1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. D. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood . 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. E. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. END OF SECTION 09912 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (GARAGE) 09920 - 1 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO SECTION 09920 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS (GARAGE) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Conditions of the Contract for Construction and the General Requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work of this Section includes furnishing all material, labor, equipment and services to paint the following items of the types, patterns, sizes and colors in the Parking Garage as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Parking stripes 2. Traffic arrows 3. Walkway stripes 4. Text 5. ADA accessible space logo 1.3 RELATED WORK A. The following Work is related to this Section: 1. Submittals Procedures Section 01330 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 3. Concrete Sealers Section 07180 4. Traffic-Bearing Membranes Section 07570 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review and approval Manufacturer's Spec Data Sheets of each product to be used. B. Submit for record Material Safety Data Sheets of each product, solvent, or related chemicals to be used, and certification that the materials conform to local, state, and federal environmental and worker’s safety laws and regulations. C. Submit for record standard color chip. D. Submit for review and approval shop drawings indicating stall size, spacing, etc. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (GARAGE) 09920 - 2 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer and Installer are required to confirm that all materials used in accordance with this Section conform to local, state, and federal environmental and workers' safety laws and regulations. 1. VOC content of materials shall not exceed the limits per Environmental Protection Agency National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings (40CFR59). B. The Installer is solely responsible for fume control and shall take all necessary pre- cautions against injury to personnel or adjacent building occupants during application. As a minimum, Installer shall take the following precautions: 1. Provide and maintain barricades. 2. Locate and protect building air intakes during application. 3. Follow all state, federal, and local safety regulations. 4. Follow all Manufacturer's safety requirements. 5. Dispose empty containers immediately and properly. 6. Use protective equipment. 7. Ensure work area is well vented to the exterior. 1.6 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to site in original, unopened containers bearing the following information: 1. Name of Product 2. Name of Manufacturer 3. Date of Manufacture 4. Lot or Batch Number B. Store materials under cover and protected from the weather. C. Replace containers showing any signs of damage with new material at no additional cost to Owner. D. Mix and prepare coatings only in areas designated by the Contractor for that purpose. E. Take precautions to prevent fire in or around coatings materials. Provide and maintain hand fire extinguisher near storage and mixing area. F. At no time shall the weight of the stored material placed on a slab area exceed 30 PSF or 2,000 lbs. over 20 square inches. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (GARAGE) 09920 - 3 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS – ALKYD (SOLVENT BASED) A. All materials shall meet Federal Specification TT-P-115F B. Provide pavement markings as indicated on the Drawings. C. Approved alkyd pavement markings are: 1. SetFast Premium Alkyd Zone Marking Paint, The Sherwin Williams Company, Cleveland, Ohio. a. A300 White b. A303 Lead-Free Yellow c. A302 Red d. A305 Black e. Handicap Blue Use A300 White as base and tint 2. Alkyd Zone Marking Paint, ICI Dulux Paints, Cleveland, Ohio. a. 22694/22693 White b. 20086/20126 Lead-Free Yellow c. 20081/20082 Red d. 20085/28744 Black e. 20083/20084 Handicap Blue 3. Or approved equal. 2.2 PAVEMENT MARKING BEADS A. All materials shall meet AASHTO Standard Specification M247, Glass Beads used in traffic paints, Type I. Beads shall be treated with a performance adhesion coating. B. Provide Glass Beads at a rate of 6 pounds per gallon into all traffic arrows, center traffic lines, walkway stripes and floor text to produce reflectorized pavement markings. Glass beads are not required in parking space striping. C. Approved pavement marking bead manufacturers are: 1. Cataphote Inc., Jackson, MS. 2. Potters Industries Inc., Valley Forge, PA. 3. Flex-O-Lite, St. Louis, MO. 4. Or approved equal. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (GARAGE) 09920 - 4 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect surfaces to which paint will be applied and report immediately in writing to the Engineer as required in the General Conditions any conditions detrimental to the proper execution of this work. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are acceptably remedied. Commence- ment of work implies acceptance of related work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before commencing work, make certain that surfaces are clean, dry, and in sound condition. B. Do not paint any surface which is wet or damp. C. Remove all oil, dust, grease, dirt, and other foreign material to ensure adequate adhesion. D. Lay out all striping on each level, using dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Report any discrepancies, interferences or changes in striping due to field conditions to the Engineer prior to painting. Paint Contractor shall be required to remove paint, repair surface and repaint stripes not applied in strict accordance with the Drawings. E. Verify compatibility with concrete sealer, joint sealant, traffic bearing membrane, and all other surface treatments as specified in Division 7. 3.3 MIXING A. Do not intermix different types of materials or materials from different Manufacturers. B. Do not thin material except as recommended by Manufacturer for spray application. C. Mix paint thoroughly by boxing, stirring or power agitation before use. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with the Manufacturer's directions. Use techniques best suited for the material and surfaces to which applied. Apply at 15 mils wet thickness. B. Do not apply paint when the air and/or surface temperature is below 50 degrees F, when relative humidity exceeds 85%, when rain is threatening or late in the evening when dew might form before drying. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (GARAGE) 09920 - 5 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO C. Allow concrete to age 60 days before coating. D. Parking space striping dimensions indicated on the Drawings are nominal dimensions. Tolerances shall be as follows: 1. Parking space length shall equal indicated length ± 2 inches. 2. Parking space width (or base line dimension) shall equal indicated width ± 1 inch. 3. Striping shall extend to within not more than 3 inches from walls or other vertical surfaces. 4. A string of parking spaces shall equal indicated dimension ± 2 inches per run. 5. Stripe width shall equal 4 inches ± 1/2 inch. E. For traffic arrows, walkways stripes, and floor text add glass beads on wet paint so that proper bead embedment and retention is achieved. 3.5 CLEANING A. Immediately upon completion of work, clean up all paint spots, remove excess materials and equipment, and repair all paint damage to other finishes. END OF SECTION 09920 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 09960 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Steel. b. Galvanized metal. c. Stainless steel. 2. Interior Substrates: a. Gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primer material produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. B. Material Quality: Provide the best quality grade of the various coatings as regularly manu- factured by acceptable coating manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a best-grade product will not be acceptable. C. Regulatory Requirements: Coating products shall meet Federal, State and Local EPA re- quirements for maximum VOC. D. Applicator: Applicator shall be licensed by Supplier. E. Benchmark Samples: Apply benchmark samples of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Products: High- performance coatings systems are based on products of The Tnemec Company. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high- performance coating systems by the named company or one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. Kelly-Moore Paints. 4. Kwal-Howells Paint. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. B. Colors: Match Architect's samples. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. 1. Blast clean according to SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Clean per SSPC-SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner to remove greases and oils. Apply a test area, priming as required. Allow the coating to dry at least one week before testing. If adhesion is poor, blast clean per SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." F. Stainless Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. 1. Blast clean according to SSPC-SP 7, "Brush- Off Blast Cleaning." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied: 1. Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Primer: Rust- inhibiting primer, minimum 3.0 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc. 2. Intermediate Coat: Minimum 4.0 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 161-1255 Fastcure. 3. Finish Coat: Minimum 3.0 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 73U Endurashield with UV Blocker additive. 4. Finish Coat: For High Temperature Conditions only. a. HI –Temp Coatings Technologies: Series 1027. b. Locations: As Indicated on the Drawings. B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Spot Primer: Rust- inhibiting primer, minimum 3.0 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc. 2. Intermediate Coat: Minimum 3.0 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 161-1255 Fastcure. 3. Finish Coat: Minimum 3.0 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 73U Endurashield with UV Blocker additive. C. Stainless Steel Substrates: 1. Primer: Polyamide Epoxy, minimum 4.0 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 161 Tneme-Fascure. b. Color: Grey. 2. Finish Coat: Fluoropolymer, minimum 2.5 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 1072 Fluoronar, Satin. b. Color: Black STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Primer: Epoxy primer, minimum 4.0 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 201 Epoxoprime. 2. Finish Coat: Minimum 4.0 mils DFT. a. Tnemec: Series 280 Tneme-Glaze. END OF SECTION 09960 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Strata Vail Vail, Colorado OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION UNIT FINISHES FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample AP-1Kitchen Manf.:Kitchen AidKitchen Aid Refrigerator Type:Counter depth refrigeratorSeries:Architect Series II Model #KBRC36FTS Finish:Stainless Steel Size:36"W x 27-7/8"D x 83-3/8"H Depth with Handles 27-7/8" Remarks:Energy Star Rated See elevations for location. AP-2Kitchen Manf.:Kitchen AidKitchen Aid Refrigerator Type:Undercounter 24" Refrigerator Style #:KURS24LSBS @ Studio Units Finish:Stainless Steel Size:23 5/8"W x 47 1/4" (with door open) x 34 1/4"H Remarks:See elevations for location. AP-3Kitchen Manf.:Kitchen AidKitchen Aid Gas Cooktop Type:36" 6-Burner Cooktop Model #:KGCP467VSS Finish:Stainless Steel Size:36"W x 26 1/4"D x 7 1/2"H Remarks:See elevations for location. AP-3-30Kitchen Manf.:Jenn-AirKitchen Aid Gas Range Type:30" Dual Fuel Range Model #:JDRP430WP Finish:Stainless Steel Size:29-7/8"W x 29 1/4"D x 36 3/4"H Remarks:See elevations for location. 1 bedroom units only OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - APPLIANCES STRATA VAIL UNITS 17004PROJECT #: FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - APPLIANCES STRATA VAIL UNITS 17004PROJECT #: AP-4Studio Manf.:Kitchen Aid Kitchen Aid Electric Cooktop Type:2-Burner Built-In Electric Cooktop Style #:KECC056RBL Finish:Black Size:15"W x 21 5/16"D x 3 1/16"H Remarks:See elevations for location. AP-5Kitchen Manf.:Kitchen AidKitchen Aid Single Oven Type:Combination Oven Model #:KEHU309SSS Finish:Stainless Steel Size:42"H x 29 3/4"W x 28 1/2"D Remarks:See elevations for location. AP-6Kitchen Manf.:Jenn-AirJenn-Air 36" Range Hood Type:Wall Mount Vent Hood Model #JXI8036WS Finish:Stainless Steel Size: 36"W Remarks:600 CFM Blower. Contractor is responsible for ordering all necessary pieces and parts. AP-6-30Kitchen Manf.:Jenn-AirJenn-Air 30" Range Hood Type:Wall Mount Vent Hood Model #JXW8030WS Finish:Stainless Steel Size:30"W x 19 3/4"D x 28 3/8"H x Remarks:600 CFM Blower. Contractor isresponsible for ordering all necessary pieces and parts. 1 bedroom units only FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - APPLIANCES STRATA VAIL UNITS 17004PROJECT #: AP-8Kitchen Manf.:Jenn-AirJenn-Air Dishwasher Type:Trifecta Dishwasher Style #:JDB8000AWS Finish:Stainless Steel Size:23 1/2"W x 26 7/8"D x 34 1/8"H Remarks:Energy Star RatedSee elevations for location. AP-9Studio Manf.:Fisher PaykelFisher Paykel Dish Drawer Type:Single DishDrawer Style #:DD24SCW7 Finish:Stainless Steel Size:23 7/16"W x 22 7/16"D X 16 3/32"H Remarks:Energy Star Rated See elevations for location. AP-11Studio Manf.:Kitchen AidKitchen Aid Microwave Type:24" Microwave Model #MK1154XPS Finish:Stainless Steel Size:21 7/8"W x 17 1/8"D x 12 1/2"H Remarks:See elevations for location. AP-12Laundry Closet Manf.:Maytag Maytag Stackable Washer Type:Stackable Washer & Dryer Combo and Dryer Style #:MHW6000AW/MED6000AW (Standard & Finish:White Penthouse)Size:27"W x 32 15/16"D Remarks:Energy Star Rated Also include stack kit #W1029831RP. Dryer is electric. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - APPLIANCES STRATA VAIL UNITS 17004PROJECT #: AP-13Kitchen Manf.:KitchenAid KitchenAid Appliances Garbage Disposer Type:3/4 HP Continuous Feed Disposer (Standard & Style #:KCDI075V Penthouse)Finish:As shown Size:42 Oz., 13"H x 9"W Remarks: AP-14TYPE A ACCESSIBLE Manf.:Kitchen Aid kitchenaid.com 30" BUILT-IN ELECTRIC Type:30" Single Built-In Oven OVEN Model #KEBS109BSS Finish:Stainless steel Size:28 3/4"H X 29 3/4"W X 23"D Remarks:See elevations for location. AP-15TYPE A ACCESSIBLE Manf.:Kitchen Aid kitchenaid.com KITCHEN 30" Type:30" Microwae Oven MICROWAVE OVEN Model #KBHS109BSS Finish:Stainless Steel Size:20 5/16" H x 29 3/4"W x 23" D Remarks:See elevations for location. AP-16TYPE A ACCESSIBLE Manf.:Fisher & PaykelFisherpaykel.com 30" DISH DRAWER Type:Double Dish Drawer Model #DD24DCX7 Finish:Stainless Steel Size:32 9/32"H x 23 19/32"W x 22 9/16"D Remarks:See elevations for location. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - APPLIANCES STRATA VAIL UNITS 17004PROJECT #: AP-100Penthouse Manf.:Subzero Subzero.com Kitchen Type:Over-and-Under Refrigerator/Freezer Refrigerator Model #bi-48S Side by Side Finish:Classic Stainless Steel Size:48"W x 24"D x 84"H Remarks:See elevations for location Built-in AP-101Penthouse Manf.:Subzero/WolfSubzero.com Kitchen Type:36" Gas Rangetop Gas Cooktop Model #SRT 366 Finish:Classic Stainless Size:36"W x 27 1/4"D x 10 1/2"H Remarks:See elevations for location. 6 burner cook top AP-102Penthouse Manf.:Wolf Subzero.com Kitchen Type:30" Built In Double Oven Doulbe Convection Model #:DO30-2F/S Oven Finish:Stainless Steel Size:29 7/8" W x 50 3/8" H x 29 3/4" D Remarks:Contractor is responsible for ordering correct blower and all necessary pieces and parts. AP-103Penthouse Manf.:Subzero Subzero.com Kitchen Type:Pro Ventilation Wall Hood Range Hood Model #PW 362210R Finish:classic stainless steel finish Size:36"W x 22"D x 10"OAH Remarks:Contractor is responsible for ordering correct blower and all necessary pieces and parts. 500 cfm internal blow option FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - APPLIANCES STRATA VAIL UNITS 17004PROJECT #: AP-104Penthouse Manf.:Bosch Bosch Kitchen & Wet Bars Type:500 Series Integra Dishwasher www.bosch.com Dishwasher Style #:SHX55MO5UC Finish:Stainless Steel Size:24"W x Remarks:Energy Star Rated See elevations for location. AP-106Penthouse Manf.:Subzero Subzero.com Kitchen Type:Undercounter Wine Storage Wine Refrigerator Model #424 Finish:Stainless Steel Size:24" W x 341/2" H x 24" Remarks:See elevations for location. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample MW-1AKitchen Manf.:TBD & Bathroom Style:Slab Front Door & Drawer Cabinetry Species:Walnut Finish:Clear Stain Option 1Remarks:See elevations for layout OR& quantity. Drawers to be Option 2slab front.Contractor to submit stainsample to OZ prior to production. MW-1BKitchen Manf.:TBD & Bathroom Style:Slab Front Door & Drawer Cabinetry Species:Walnut Finish:To match custom sampleOption 1Remarks:See elevations for layoutOR& quantity. Drawers to be Option 2slab front. Contractor to submit stain sample to OZ prior to production. MW-2Door Style Manf.:See Project Manual Throughout Style:See Project Manual Species:SassafrasOption 1 Finish:Stained & Finished to matchAndOZ sample Option 2Remarks:Contractor to submit stain sample to OZ prior to production. MW-4Case Moulding Manf.:Local to bidLocal to bid Throughout Style:1 x 3 nominal w/ square edge Species:SassafrasOption 1 Finish:Stained & Finished to matchAndOZ sample Option 2 Remarks:Contractor to submit stain sample to OZ prior to production. OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - MILLWORK STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - MILLWORK STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 MW-5Base Moulding Manf.:Local to bidLocal to bid Throughout Style:1 x 4 nominal w/ square edge Species:Sassafras Option 1 Finish:Stained & Finished to match And OZ sample Option 2 Remarks:Contractor to submit stainsample to OZ prior to production. MW-10Unit Manf.:CustomTBD Wood Cladding @ Product:T&G Wood Paneling Ceilings Species:Select Alder Finish:Stained to match OZ sample Size:1x6 TrimRemarks:Contractor to submit stainsample to OZ prior to production. See Architectural sheets for location. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSampleFLR-1aOverall Unit Material:Engineered Hardwood floor CO Floorworks & Powder Bathroom Name:The Chateau Collection, Natural Hardwood Floor Species:European OakJack Sorenson Thickness:5/8" Thick303.881.4389 Option 1 Width:7-7/16" or Finish:All Natural Hard-Wax Oil Option 2Remarks:Tongue & groove configuration. Contact manf. for recommended underlayment & installation info. See floor plans for location. FLR-1bOverall Unit Material:Engineered Hardwood floor CO Floorworks & Powder Bathroom Name:The Chateau Collection, Natural Hardwood Floor Stained to match Riverstone SeineJack Sorenson Species:European Oak303.881.4389 Option 1 Thickness:5/8" Thick or Width:7-7/16" Option 2 Finish:All Natural Hard-Wax Oil Remarks:Tongue & groove configuration. Contact manf. for recommended underlayment & installation info. See floor plans for location. Finish sample to be submitted to OZ for approval. FLR-2Unit Bedrooms Material:Carpet Godfrey HirstCarpetProduct:Sisal Loop Pile1000 Holcomb Woods Pattern:TiburonSuite 118B Color:BirchRoswell, GA 30076 Content:100% Wool Width:12'-0" Remarks:See floor plans for location.CO Floorworks Jack Sorenson 303.881.4389 FLR-3All Carpet Areas Material:Carpet Cushion CO Floorworks Style: Content:Synthetic FiberJack Sorenson Weight:40 oz.303.881.4389 Density:8.0 lbs/cn./t Remarks:See product data.No Photo Available OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - FLOORING STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - FLOORING STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 FLR-4Master Bathroom Material:Marble Tile Capco Floor Tile Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Size:12" x 24"Denver, CO 80224 Thickness:3/8" Finish:HonedBob Willey Grout:Epoxy, Color TBD303.300.8242 Grout Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.Horizontal Straight stack pattern FLR-5Secondary Bathroom Material:Marble Tile Capco Floor Tile Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Size:12" x 24"Denver, CO 80224 Thickness:3/8" Finish:HonedBob Willey Grout:Epoxy, Color TBD303.300.8242 Grout Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.Horizontal Straight stack pattern FLR-6All Bathrooms Material:Marble Tile CapcoShower Floor Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Color:N/ADenver, CO 80224 Size:4" x 4" (cut at quarry) Thickness:3/8"Bob Willey Grout:Epoxy, Color TBD303.300.8242 Grout Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:Square layout - see floorplan for pattern and locations. FLR-7Laundry Room Material:Marble Tile Capco Flooring Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Color:N/ADenver, CO 80224 Size:12" x 12" Thickness:3/8"Bob Willey Grout:Epoxy, Color TBD303.300.8242 Grout Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:See floorplan for pattern and locations. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo H-4Kitchen & Bath Manf.:Doug Mockett Cabinet Pull Product:DP174 Series Angled Pull Finish:Satin Nickel Model #: DP174A-17S Size:10-1/4"L Remarks:See drawings for location H-5All Unit Baths Manf.:Kohler Kohler 24" Towel Bar Product:Stillness 24" Towel Bar Finish:Brushed Nickel Model #: K-14451 Size:24"W x 2-1/2" Proj. Remarks:See drawings for location H-6All Unit Baths Manf.:Kohler Kohler 18" Towel Bar Product:Stillness 18" Towel Bar Finish:Brushed Nickel Model #: K-14450 Size:18"W x 2-1/2" Proj. Remarks:See drawings for location H-7All Unit Baths Manf.:Kohler Kohler Towel Ring Product:Stillness Towel Ring Finish:Brushed Nickel Model #: K-14456 Size:8-7/8" W x 6" H x 2-1/2" Proj. Remarks:See drawings for location OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 H-8All Unit Baths Manf.:Kohler Kohler Toilet Paper Product:Stillness Toilet Paper Holder Holder Finish:Brushed Nickel Model #: K-14459 Size:6-5/16"H x 3"W x 4" Proj. Remarks:See drawings for location H-9All Unit Baths Manf.:Kohler Kohler Robe Hook Product:Stillness Robe Hook Finish:Brushed Nickel Model #: K-14458 Size:1-7/8" Dia x 1-1/2" Proj. Remarks:See drawings for location H-10Secondary Baths Manf.:MoenMoen (Type A Accessible)Product:5' Curved Shower Rod -Wholesale & Employee Finish:Brushed Nickel Housing Unit Model #: 2-102-5BS Shower Rod Size:5' Remarks:See drawings for location Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. H-16 ADA Bathrooms Manf.:Bobrick Grab BarElliot Associates 42" Grab Bar Product:B-5806x42 303.429.0133 Finish:Stainless Steel Model #: 1-1/4" diameter x 42"W Remarks:See drawings for location FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 H-17ADA Bathrooms Manf.:Bobrick Grab BarElliot Associates 36" Grab Bar Product:B-5806x42 303.429.0133 Finish:Stainless Steel Model #: 1-1/4" diameter x 42"W Remarks:See drawings for location H-18All Baths Manf.:Shower Buddy www.showerbuddy.com Wall Mounted Product:Satin Nickel Corner Basket Soap Basket Finish:Satin Nickel Model #: 410099 Size:13-5/8" x 8" x 3-1/2" Remarks:See elevations for location All all showers and tubs- Shower to receive corner baskets, tubs rectangular shape H-100Penthouse Bathroom Manf.:Grohe Grohe 24" Towel Bar Product:Tara Classic 24" Towel Bar Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel www.grohe.com Model #: 40 309 Size:24"W Remarks:See drawings for location H-102Penthouse Bathroom Manf.:Grohe Grohe Towel Ring Product:Atrio Towel Ring Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel www.grohe.com Model #: 40 307 Size:8" Remarks:See drawings for location FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 H-103Penthouse Bathroom Manf.:Grohe Grohe Toilet Paper Product:Atrio Toilet Paper Holder Holder Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel www.grohe.com Model #: 40 313 Size:5 5/8"W, 3 5/8" H, 3 5/8" P Remarks:See drawings for location H-104Penthouse Bathroom Manf.:Grohe Grohe Robe Hook Product:Atrio Robe Hook Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel www.grohe.com Model #: 40 312 Size:1 5/8" H, 2 1/8"P Remarks:See drawings for location FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample P-1Wall Paint Manf.:Benjamin Moore Benjamin Moore Throughout Color:Linen White1.888.854.9889 Paint Finish: Eggshell in all bathrooms, Flat at all other areas in units Wall Texture:N/A Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for approval prior to production P-2Ceiling Paint Manf.:Benjamin Moore Benjamin Moore Throughout Color:Linen White1.888.854.9889 Paint Finish: Eggshell in all bathrooms, Flat at all other areas in units Wall Texture:N/A Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for approval prior to production STRATA VAIL UNITS OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - PAINT & STAIN PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample PL-1Kitchen Manf.:Kohler Kohler Sink Product:Undertone™ extra-large, single-basin undercounter kitchen sink Style #:K-3183 Finish:Stainless Steel Size:31-1/2" x 17-3/4" Exterior Dim. Bowl Depth:7-5/8" Mount:Undercounter Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. PL-2Kitchen Sink at Manf.:Kohler Kohler Kitchenettes Product:Undertone Large Undercounter & Wet Bars Kitchen Sink Style #:K-3182 Finish:Stainless Steel Size:16-1/4" x 20-1/2" Bowl Depth:7-5/8" Mount:Undermount Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. PL-3Kitchen, Manf.:Grohe Grohe Kitchenettes &Product:Essence Low Profile w/ Pull Wet Bar Out Faucet Faucet Style #:32 170 000 Finish:Chrome Holes:1-Hole Reach:8 9/16 Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. PL-4All Bathrooms Manf.:Kohler Kohler Toilet Product:Cimarron Comfort Height Elongated Toilet Style #:K-3496 Finish:White Seat:Cache Quiet-Close quick release toilet. Seat Included. Remarks:Elongated Bowl: 12" rough in. Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces for installation. OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL UNITS FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL UNITS PL-5Master Bath Manf.:Kohler Kohler & Secondary Bath Product:Ladena Undermount Sink Sink Style #:K-2215 Finish:White Size:23-1/4" x 16-1/4" Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. ADA compliant when installed in a 21" minimum depth countertop. PL-6Powder Bath Manf.:Kohler Kohler Sink Product:Above-Counter Conical Bell Vessel Sink Style #:K-2200 Finish:White Size:16-1/4" diameter Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. No faucet holes PL-7Master Bathroom Manf.:MAAX MAAX Soaker Tub Product:Aiiki Tub www.maax.com Style #:7236 Model #:103554-000 Finish:White 001 Size:72"L x 36"W x 23-1/2"D Type:Drop-in Soaker Tub Material:Cast Acrylic Remarks: Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation and deciding oulet placement. PL-8All Bathrooms Manf.:Kohler Kohler Lavatory Faucet Product:Widespread Lavatory Faucet Series:Stillness Style #:K-942-4 Finish:Brushed Nickel Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Meets ADA requirements FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL UNITS PL-9Master Bathroom Manf.:Kohler Kohler Tub Faucet Product:Deck Mounted Tub Faucet Series:Stillness Style #:K-T954-4 Finish:Brushed Nickel Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Meets ADA requirements PL-11All Bathrooms Manf.:Kohler Kohler Shower Trim Product:Rite-temp Pressure-balancing Shower trim w/ lever handle Series:Stillness Style #:K-T949-4 Finish:Brushed Nickel Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Meets ADA requirements PL-12Powder Bath Manf.:Grohe Grohe Faucet Product:Atrio 2-Hole Wall Mount Vessel Trim www.grohe.com Style #:19 292 Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Refer to detail for mounting height. PL-13ADA Handheld Manf.:Kohler Kohler Shower Product:Multi-Function Handshower Series:Stillness Style #:K-973 & K-975 & K-8593 Finish:Brushed Nickel Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Meets ADA requirements. Refer to sheet A10.03 for ADA mounting height. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL UNITS PL-14Master Bathroom Manf.:Kohler Kohler Tub at B103 Product:Archer 5' Bathtub Style #:K-1123 Finish:White Size:60"L x 32"W x 19"D Type:Drop-in Remarks: Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation and deciding oulet placement. PL-15 Type A Kitchenette Manf.:Kohler Kohler Sink Product:Undertone® small rounded undercounter kitchen sink Style #:K-3338 Finish:Stainless Steel Size:11" x 17-1/8" Bowl Depth:5-1/2" Mount:Undercounter Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. PL-102Penthouse Manf.:InSinkErator InSinkErator Kitchen Instant Product:Instant Hot Water Dispenser Hot Water Style #:F-HC3300 Finish:Chrome Holes:1-hole Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. For full handle move-ment, faucet must be installed w/no less than 3 1/4" clearance btw the faucet and backsplash and wall PL-103Penthouse Manf.:Grohe Grohe All Bathrooms Product:Atrio High Spout Lavatory www.grohe.comLavatory Faucet Wideset Style #:20 069 Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel Holes:3-Hole Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL UNITS PL-104Penthouse Manf.:GroheGrohe Master Bathroom Product:Roman Tub Filler with Hand Tub Faucet w/Spray Shower www.grohe.com Style #:25 049 Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel Option 1 Holes:5-Hole andRemarks:Contractor is responsible for Option 2supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. PL-105Penthouse Manf.:Grohe Grohe Powder Bathroom Product:Atrio 2-Hole Wall Mount Vessel Faucet Trim www.grohe.com Style #:19 292 Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel Option 1Remarks:Contractor is responsible for andsupplying all necessary Option 2parts and pieces needed for installation. PL-106Penthouse Manf.:Grohe Grohe All Bathroom Product:Rainshower Shower System withShower Fitting with Rainshower Shower Head www.grohe.com Hand Held Spray Style #:System: 27 031, Head: 27 135 Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel Holes:2-Hole Option 1Remarks:Contractor is responsible for andsupplying all necessary Option 2parts and pieces needed for installation. PL-107Penthouse Manf.:Porcher Porcher Powder Bath Product:Effusio Bronze Above Counter Basin Sink Style #: Finish:Bronze Size:15 3/4" x 15" Option 1 andRemarks:GC to Spec all required Option 2components FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL UNITS PL-108Master Bathroom Manf.:MAAX MAAX @ Penthouse Product:Aiiki Aerofeel Tub www.maax.com Jetted Tub Style #:7236 Model #:103554-055 Finish:White 001 Dimensions:72"L x 36"W x 23-1/2"D Remarks:Drop-in Air Tub Cast Acrylic Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation and deciding oulet placement. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample T-1aKitchen Countertop Material:Granite Slab AZ Tile& Full Height Backsplash Name:Steel Gray Size:3cmDallas DrewryThickness:Slab Finish:Antiqued Option 1 Edge:Sq Eased Edge Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. T-1bKitchen Countertop Material:Granite Slab AZ Tile & Full Height Backsplash Name:Monte Cristo Size:3cmDallas Drewry Finish:Polished Edge:Sq Eased Edge Option 2Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. T-3Master Bathroom Material:Marble Slab Capco Countertop & Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Tub Deck Size:3cmDenver, CO 80224 Thickness:Slab Finish:PolishedBob Willey Grout:N/A303.300.8242 Grout Joint:N/A Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. T-4Master Bathroom Material:Marble Tile Capco Backsplash Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Size:6" x 24" (cut at quarry)Denver, CO 80224 Thickness:3/8" Finish:Polished at BacksplashBob Willey Grout:TBD303.300.8242 Grout Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.See elevations for locations and pattern. OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE & STONE STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE & STONE STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 T-6Master Bathroom Material:Marble Tile Capco Tub & Shower Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Surround Size:12" x 24"Denver, CO 80224 Thickness:3/8" Finish:HonedBob Willey Grout:TBD303.300.8242 Grout Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.See elevations for locations Horizontal straight stack pattern T-10Secondary Bathrooms Material:Marble Slab Capco Countertop Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Size:2cmDenver, CO 80224 Thickness:Slab Finish:PolishedBob Willey Grout:N/A303.300.8242 Grout Joint:N/A Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. T-11Secondary Bathrooms Material:Marble Tile Capco Backsplash Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Size:6" x 24" (cut at quarry)Denver, CO 80224 Thickness:3/8" Finish:Polished at BacksplashBob Willey Grout:TBD303.300.8242 Grout Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. See elevations for locations and pattern. T-12Secondary Bathrooms Material:Marble Tile Capco& Powder Bathrooms Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Shower Surround Size:12" x 24"Denver, CO 80224 Thickness:3/8" Finish:HonedBob Willey Grout:TBD303.300.8242 Grout Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. See elevations for locations. Horizontal straight stack pattern FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE & STONE STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 T-14Powder Bathroom Material:Limestone Slab Capco Countertop & Name:Auberge5800 E. Jewell Ave Backsplash Size:3cmDenver, CO 80224 Thickness:Slab Edge:Sq Eased EdgeBob Willey Finish:Honed303.300.8242 Backsplash:14" H Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. Note: 3 Month Lead time T-15Stone Fireplace Material:Limestone Tile U.S. Stone Industries Surround Name:Flint Hills Gray Limestone Size:SlabP: 913.529.4154 Thickness:1-1/2"F: 913.529.4158 Edge:Cleft Face Grout:None - dry stack Grount Joint:1/16" Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.See elevations for locations and pattern. T-16Stone Slab Material:Limestone Slab Capco Mantle & Hearth and Name:Auberge5800 E. Jewell Ave Floor tile in front of Size:3cmDenver, CO 80224 Fireplace Thickness:Slab Edge:Sq Eased EdgeBob Willey Grout:Honed303.300.8242 Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.See elevations for locations and pattern. Note: 3 Month Lead time T-17All Baths Material:Schluter Systems Finishing Profile Tile Finishing Profile Name:Jolly Size:For 3/8" thick tile x full length Finish:Brushed Nickel Anodized Aluminum Remarks:To be used at all base tile, shower trim, & backsplashes. (Any exposed tile edge) FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE & STONE STRATA VAIL UNITS PROJECT #:17004 T-18Master Bathroom,Material:Marble Tile Capco & Secondary Bathrooms,Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Base Tile Size:6" x 24" (cut at quarry)Denver, CO 80224 Thickness:3/8" Finish:HonedBob Willey Grout:TBD303.300.8242 Grount Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.See elevations for locations. T-19All Baths Material:Marble Tile Capco Name:Haisa Light5800 E. Jewell Ave Size:12" x 24"Denver, CO 80224 Thickness:3/8" Tile Cap at Shower Finish:HonedBob Willey Curb Grout:TBD303.300.8242 Grount Joint:Credit Card Joint Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.See elevations for locations. Strata Vail Vail, Colorado OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION PUBLIC SPACE FINISHES FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample AP-200Staff Room Manf.:U-Line U-Line Undercounter Type:ADA Undercounter Refrigerator Style #:ADA24R Finish:Sainless steel A116 door with black cabinet Size:H 32" W 24" D 23-1/2" Capacity:5.3 Cu. Ft. Remarks:Confirm swing w/architect ADA height compliant AP-201Staff Room Manf.:KitchenAid KitchenAid Garbage Type:3/4 HP MulitGrind Disposal Disposer Style #:KCD1075V A116 Finish:Black Size:3/4 HP Remarks:Please refer to style # for all components AP-202Entertainment,Manf.:U-Line U-Line Great Room,Type:ADA Ice Maker Fitness Room & Style #:ADA151M Indoor Pool Finish:Wood Front to match Ice Maker cabinetry Size:H 32 x W 15" x D 23" A131, A125, B107 & Remarks:See interior elevations for B108location. Confirm swing w/architect ADA height compliant AP- 203 Entertainment,Manuf:U-Line U-Line Great Room,Type:ADA Undercounter Fitness Room, Style#ADA24R Indoor Pool & Lounge Finish:Wood Front to match Beverage cabinetry Refrigerator Size:H 32" W 24" D 23-1/2" Remarks:See interior elevations for A131, A125, B107, location. B108 & A124Confirm swing w/architect ADA height compliant 17004 OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - APPLIANCES STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #: FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents 17004 OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - APPLIANCES STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #: AP-204Staff Room Manf.:Fisher Paykel www.fisherpaykel.com Dishwasher Type:Dish Drawer Style #:DD24SCW7 A116 Finish:White Size:H 16 13/32" W 23 7/16" D 22 7/16" Remarks:GC to include all necessary components for installation AP-205Staff Room Manf.:KitchenAid KitchenAid Microwave Type:Architect Series II Mircowave Style #:KCMS1655BWH A116 Finish:White Size:H 12 1/2" W 21 7/8" D 17 1/8" Remarks:GC to include all necessary components for installation FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionVendor Product Photo AC-500Fitness Room Manf.:3-Form 3 Form Acrylic Panels Name:Birch GroveJen Ruckell Color:N/A B107 Gauge:1/2" Size:Field Verify (approx 4'W x 6'H) Finish Front:Sandstone Finish Back:Sandstone Remarks:See elevations for location.Wood mullion supports between acrylic panels AC-501Lounge Manf.:3-Form 3 Form Acrylic Panels Name:Fossil Leaf Spade RandomJen Ruckell Color:N/A A124 Gauge:1/2" Size:Field Verify Finish Front:Sandstone Finish Back:Sandstone Remarks:See elevations for location. OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - ACRYLIC STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample MW-500Case Moulding Manf.:Local to bidLocal to bid Throughout Style:1x3 Species:Sassafras Finish:Stained & Finished to match OZ sample.Remarks:Contractor to submit stain sample to OZ prior to production. MW-501Base Moulding Manf.:Local to bidLocal to bid Throughout Style:1x6 Species:Sassafras Finish:Stained & Finished to match OZ sample. Remarks:Contractor to submit stain sample to OZ prior to production. MW-502Chair Rail Manf.:Local to bidLocal to bid At Unit Corridors Style:1x4 Species:Sassafras Finish:Stained & Finished to match OZ sample Remarks:Contractor to submit stain sample to OZ prior to production. See elevations for layout MW-503Cabinetry Manf.:TBD Throughout Style:Slab Front Door & Drawer Species:Walnut Finish:Clear Stain Remarks:See elevations for layout & quantity. Drawers to beslab front.Contractor to submit stainsample to OZ prior to production. OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - MILLWORK STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - MILLWORK STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 MW-504Wood Panels Manf.:Custom at Unit Entries Dimensions:see elevations Species:Sassafras Finish:Stained & Finished to match OZ sample Joint:1/4" Butt Joint Thickness:3/4 inchRemarks:Contractor to submit stainsample to OZ prior to production. MW-505Cubbies Manf.:Custom at Men's & Women's Dimensions:see elevations Showers at Indoor Species:Teakwood Pool Finish:Stained & Finished to match OZ sample B125 & B127 Remarks:Contractor to submit stain No Image Available sample to OZ prior to production. MW-506Wood Bench @ Manf.:Custom Entertainment Dimensions:see elevations Species:Sassafras A126 Finish:Stained & Finished to match OZ sample Remarks:Contractor to submit stain No Image Available sample to OZ prior to production. MW-508Wood Planks @ Manf.:Local to bidLocal to bid Reception Desk Dimensions:1x8 & Accent Walls Species:Select Alder at Lobby Pattern:Random Ashlar Finish:Stained & Finished to match A103 OZ sample No Image Available Remarks:Contractor to submit stain sample to OZ prior to production. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - MILLWORK STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 MW-509Common Area Manf.:Custom Wood Cladding @ Product:T&G Wood Paneling Ceilings Species:Select Alder Finish:Stained to match OZ sample Size:1x6 Remarks:Contractor to submit stain sample to OZ prior to No Image Available production. See Architectural sheets for location. MW-510Fitness and Pool Manf.:CustomTBDCeiling Wood Product:T&G Wood Paneling Paneling Species:Grade A White Cedar Finish:Stained & finished to match architects sample Size:1x8 Remarks:Contractor to submit stain No Image Available sample to OZ prior to production. See Architectural sheets for location. MW-511Mirror Frame Manf.:CustomCustom All Public Space Product:Mirror Frame Restrooms Species:To match cabinetry (EXCLUDING STAFF Finish:To match cabinetry RESTROOM)Fillet:N/A Size:1.5" x 1.5" Square Profile No Image Available Remarks:F.V. all frame sizes OZ to verify sample prior to production FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample EL-500Elev A-1, Elev A-2,Manuf.: Elev B-1 & Elev B-2 Style: Cab Walls:Custom wall. Horizontal A113, A112, B113 &Panels with stainless steel B114 wainscot bottom panel. Fabric:FA-501 Fixtures:Classic Hall Fixtures No Image Available Ceiling:Downlight; incandescent satin Stainless steel laminate Handrails:Solid Bar; satin stainless steel Door Finish:Satin stainless steel Remarks:Refer to Elevations EL-501Elev A3 Manuf.: Style: Cab Walls:P-Lam Wilsonart Pewter Brush 4T19-60 Fixtures:Classic Hall Fixtures Ceiling:Downlight; incandescent satin Stainless steel laminate Handrails:Solid Bar; satin stainless steel No Image Available Door Finish:Satin stainless steel Remarks: OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - ELEVATOR STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionVendor Product Photo FA-500Staff Shower Manf.:Pindler & Pindler Pindler & Pindler Shower Curtain Product:9360 Margeaux Color:Suede (A112)Material:100% Cotton Remarks:See elevations for location. Size to be field verified. FA-501Fabric Manf.:Carnegie at Elevator Cabs Color:Nexus 6425.410 Material:100% Xorel Remarks:See elevations for location. Size to be field verified. OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - FABRIC STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample FLR-500Stone Tile Material:Limestone AZ Tile Lobby, Elev. Area.Name:Jura Grey Elev.A-1 & Elev. A-2 Size:18" x 18"Dallas Drewry Elev.B-1 & B-2 Thickness:5/8"303.917.2957 Edge:N/A A103, A122, A113, A112,Grout:TBD B104, B113, B114, Grout Joint:1/16" Pattern:Straight Finish:Honed Remarks:Stone to be Sealed per manuf. See floor plans for locations. FLR-501Hardwood Floor Material:Engineered Hardwood floor CO Floorworks Corridor, Great Room, Name:The Vernal Collection, Davos & Entertainment Lounge Species:European OakJack Sorenson Thickness:5/8" Thick303.881.4389 A108, A123, A124, Width:7-7/16" A125, A126Finish:All Natural Hard-Wax Oil Remarks:Tongue & groove configuration. Contact manf. for recommended underlayment & installation info. See floor plans for location. Finish sample to be submitted to OZ for approval. FLR-502Carpet at Mfg:Shaw ContractShaw ContractReception Desk Product:Carpet Tile (at Lobby)Style:Earth toneLiz Eaton Office & Manager Style Number: 59338303.888.1819 Color:Iroko A103, A117, A118 Size:24" x 24" Remarks:To be installed in quarter turn pattern confirm with architect FLR-503Rubber Flooring Mfg:Eco Surfaces Eco Surfaces at Product:Ecosand Ski Lockers, Ski Locker Style:Pace Products Restrooms, Ski Locker Style Number: 1002Rise Pacacha Vestibule &Color:Sand CastleP: 303-513-8004 Fitness Room Content:100% post-consumer SBR tire rubber risepacacha@comcast.net & 30% pre-consumer ColorMill EPDM A105, A109, A104 & B107 Repeat:N/A Width:200 Sq. Ft. per roll Thickness:6mm Remarks:See Project Manual for product info. OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - FLOORING STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - FLOORING STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FLR-504Tile at Material:Porcelain Daltile Indoor Pool, Pool Name:Magma Entrance, Locker Entry Size:12x24Sara Harper & Bldg B Elev. Lobby Thickness:3/8" Color:Element MG91 B108, B105, B120, & B131 Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/8" Pattern:Straight Remarks:See floor plans for locations. FLR-505Floor Tile at Material:Porcelain Daltile Men's & Women's Name:Magma Public Restroom &Size:12x24Sara Harper Toilet Room Thickness:3/8" at Indoor Pool Color:Element MG91 Grout:TBD B123, B126, B124 & B128 Grout Joint:1/8" Pattern:Straight Remarks:See floor plans for locations. FLR-506 Shower Floor Tile at Material:Porcelain Daltile Men's & Women's Name:Magma Shower and Steam Size:Cut to 4" x 4"Sara Harper Room at Indoor Pool Thickness:3/8" Color:Element MG91 B125, B127, B121 Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/8" Pattern:Straight Remarks:See floor plans for locations. FLR-507ACarpet tile at Level 2-7 Mfg:Shaw ContractShaw ContractCorridorProduct:Carpet Tile Style:IngrainLiz Eaton Style Number:59389303.888.1819 Color:Iroko Size:24" x 24" Remarks:To be installed in ashlar pattern confirm with architect FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - FLOORING STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FLR-107BCarpet tile Accent @ Mfg:Shaw Contract Shaw Contract Level 2-7 Corridor Product:Carpet Tile Style:Earth ToneLiz Eaton Style Number:59338303.888.1819 Color:Iroko Size:24" x 24" Remarks:To be installed in quarter turn pattern confirm with architect FLR-510Staff Room &Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials Staff Restroom Name:Empire Color:General's Grey VS85Bob Hobson A116 & A115 Size:14x14303.818.9001 Thickness:3/8" Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/8" Remarks:See floor plans for location. FLR-511Entry & Vestibule Material:Walk Off Mat Ronick Walk off Mat Style:PediTred-G4 Thickness:3/4"www.ronick.com A131 & A102 Finish:Clear Anodized Insert:Heavy Duty Carpet Insert Color:9322 Slate No Image Available Remarks:Per Manuf. Recommendations FLR-512Staff Room Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials Shower Floor Tile Name:Empire Color:General's Grey VS85Bob Hobson A115 Size:3 1/2" x 3 1/2"303.818.9001 Thickness:3/8" Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/8" Remarks:See floor plans for location. FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample GL-500Fitness Room Manuf.:Guardian Corp.Guardian Galax Full Height Mirror Walls Product:Full Height Wall Mirror Name:Tempered Clear www.guardian.com B107 Size:Full Height Wall- Field Verify800.822.5599 Thickness:6mm Edge:Flat Polished Edge Remarks:Mirror Mastic adhesive setting per manuf.'s recommendation. GL-501Men's Restroom Manuf.:Custom Custom At Locker Room Product:Frosted Glass Privacy Screen Frosted Glass Size:Refer to Arch Detail Privacy Screen Edge:Flat Polished Edge Remarks:See plans for locations OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - GLAZING STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo H-500 Men's & Women's Manf.:BobrickRestrooms,Product:24" Grab Bar Ski Locker Restroom,Style:B-5806 Men's & Women's Finish:Stainless Steel Public Restroom Size:1-1/4" diameter x 24"W at Indoor PoolRemarks:Horizontal application and Staff RestroomSee drawings for exact 24" Grab Barlocations Refer to sheet A10.03 for (A, A109, A112, B123mounting heights & B127) H-501 Men's & Women's Manf.:Bobrick Restrooms,Product:36" Grab Bar Ski Locker Restroom,Style:B-5806Men's & Women's Finish:Stainless Steel Public Restroom Size:1-1/4" diameter x 36"W at Indoor PoolRemarks:Horizontal application and Staff RestroomSee drawings for exact 36" Grab Barlocations Refer to sheet A10.03 for (A, A109, A112, B123mounting heights & B127) H-502 Men's & Women's Manf.:Bobrick Restrooms,Product:42" Grab Bar Ski Locker Restroom,Style:B-5806 Men's & Women's Finish:Stainless Steel Public Restroom Size:1-1/4" diameter x 42"W at Indoor PoolRemarks:Horizontal application and Staff RestroomSee drawings for exact 42" Grab Barlocations Refer to sheet A10.03 for (A, A109, A112, B123mounting heights & B127) H-503 Staff Room Restroom Manf.:Bobrick Sanitary Napkin Disposal Product:Surface Mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal Style:B-270 (A112)Series:Contura Finish:Stainless Steel Size:7-1/2""W x 3-3/16"D x 10"H Remarks:See drawings for exact locations. 25-30" AFF (to top) to meet ADA requirements. Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 H-504 Staff Room Restroom Manf.:Bobrick Tissue Dispenser Product:Surface Mounted Multi Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser Style:B-4288 (A112)Series:Contura Finish:Stainless Steel Size:6-1/16" W x 5-15/16 D x 11" H Remarks:See drawings for exact locations. 28" AFF (to top) to meet ADA requirements. Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights H-505 Staff Room Restroom Manf.:Bobrick Paper Towel Dispenser Product:Surface Mt. Paper Towel Dispenser/waste receptacle Style:B-43949 (A112)Finish:Stainless Steel Size:17 9/16"W x 56 3/8" H Remarks:See drawings for location. 61-1/4" AFF (to top) to meet ADA requirements. Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights H-506 Men's & Women's Manf.:Frost Restrooms,Product:Signature series vanity mouned Ski Locker Restroom,Soap Dispenser Men's & Women's Finish:Polished Chrome Public Restroom Model #: 06.2110 at Indoor Pool and Staff RestroomRemarks: Soap Dispenser (A, A109, A112, B123 & B127) H-507 Staff Room Restroom Manf.:Bobrick Seat Cover Dispenser Product:Surface Mounted Toilet-Seat Cover Style:B-4221 (A112)Finish:Stainless Steel Size:15 3/4"W x 11 1/4"H Remarks:See drawings for exact locations. 30-45" AFF (to top) to meet ADA requirements. Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 H-508 Men's & Women's Manf.:Dyson Restrooms,Product:Airblade Ski Locker Restroom,Style:AB02 Men's & Women's Finish:Grey Public Restroom Size:23.10" H x 10" D at Indoor PoolRemarks:Surface Mount and Staff RestroomSee drawings for exact Hand Dryerlocations Refer to sheet A10.03 for (A, A109, A112, B123mounting heights & B127) H-509 Men's and Women's Manf.:Kohler Kohler Public Restroom Product:Stillness Robe Hook at Indoor Pool Finish:Polished Chrome & Staff Restroom Model #: K-14458 Robe Hooks Size:1-7/8" Dia x 1-1/2" Proj. Remarks:See drawings for location (A112, B124 & B128)Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights H-511 Men's & Women's Manf.:Accessory WarehouseAccessory Warehouse Restrooms,Product:Decorative Mirror Frame Ski Locker Restroom,Style:To be selected by OZ Men's & Women's Finish: Public Restroom Size:2.5"W at Indoor PoolRemarks:To be used at all powder baths where indicated. See No Image AvailableMirror Frameelevations for exact location & overall mirror size. (A, A109, B123 & B127) H-512Men's & Women's Shower Manf.:The Dispenser www.dispenser.com at Indoor Pool Product:Dispenser III Style:71344 (B124 & B128)Finish:Chrome Size: 11"H x 3 3/8"D x 8 1/8"W Remarks:Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 H-513Staff Room,Manf.:Doug Mockett Fitness and Product:DP174 Series Angled Pull Indoor Pool Finish:Satin Nickel Cabinet Pull Model #: DP174A-17S Size:10-1/4"L (A114, B107 & B108)Remarks:See drawings for location H-514 Staff Room Restroom Manf.:Bobrick Corner Grab Bar Product:Grab Bar for Tub/Shower/ToiletCompartment (A112)Style:B-58616 Finish:Stainless Steel Size:24x36 No Image Available Remarks:See drawings for location Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights H-515 Men's & Women's Manf.:Bobrick Restrooms,Product:RecessedPaper Towel Dispenser Ski Locker Restroom,with Trash Recepticle Men's & Women's Style:B-3900 Public Restroom Series:Classic at Indoor Pool Finish:Stainless Steel Size:17-3/16" w x 56"H Paper Towel DispenserRemarks:See drawings for location. 59 1/2" AFF (to top) to meet ADA (A, A109, B123 & B127)requirements. Extends 1/2" from wall. Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights H-516 Men's & Women's Manf.:BobrickRestrooms,Product:Recessed sanitary Napkin Ski Locker Restroom,Disposal Men's & Women's Style:B-353 Public Restroom Series:Classic at Indoor Pool Finish:Stainless Steel and Staff Restroom Size:12 3/4"W x 17 3/16"H Remarks:See drawings for location Sanitary Napkin Disposal30" AFF (to top) to meet ADA requirements. (A, A109, A112, B123Refer to sheet A10.03 for & B127)mounting heights FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 H-517 Men's & Women's Manf.:Bobrick Restrooms,Product:Recessed Seat Cover Dispenser Ski Locker Restroom,Style:B-301 Men's & Women's Series:Contura Public Restroom Finish:Stainless Steel at Indoor Pool Size:15 3/16"W x 10 3/4"H Remarks:See drawings for location Seat Cover Dispenser48" AFF (to top) to meet ADA requirements. (A, A109, B123 & B127)Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights H-518 Men's & Women's Manf.:Bobrick Restrooms,Product:Recessed Multi-Roll Toilet Ski Locker Restroom,Tissue Dispenser Men's & Women's Style:B-4388 Public Restroom Series:Contura at Indoor Pool Finish:Stainless Steel Size:7 9/16"W x 12 1/2"H Toilet Tissue DispenserRemarks:See drawings for location 28" AFF (to top) to meet ADA (A, A109, B123 & B127)requirements. Extends 2 3/4" from wall. Refer to sheet A10.03 formounting heights H-519 Men's & Women's Manf.:Bobrick Showers at Product:18" Grab Bar Indoor Pool Style:B-5806 Finish:Stainless Steel 18" Grab Bar Size:1-1/4" diameter x 18"W Remarks:Horizontal application (B128 & B124)See drawings for exact locations Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights H-520 Men's & Women's Manf.:BobrickElliot AssociatesShowers at Product:48" Grab Bar303.429.0133 Indoor Pool Style:B-5806 Finish:Stainless Steel 48" Grab Bar Size:1-1/4" diameter x 48"W Remarks:Horizontal application(B128 & B124)See drawings for exact locations Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 H-521Great Room &Manf.:Hafele Hafele Entertainment Product:Cabinet Pull Finish:Chrome Plated Satin Cabinet Pull Model #: 124.02.210 Size:40"L (A125 & A126)Remarks:See drawings for location **image not shown in correct finish H-522 Men's & Women's Manf.:Grohe Grohe Showers at Product:Atrio Robe Hook Indoor Pool Finish:ENO Infinity Brushed Nickel www.grohe.com Model #: 40 312 Robe Hook Size:1 5/8" H, 2 1/8"P Remarks:See drawings for location (B128 & B124)No Image Available H-523Staff Shower Manf.:Signature Hardware signaturehardware.com Curtain Rod Product:Straight Shower Curtain Rod Finish:Polished Chrome (A112)Model #: 120617 Size:1" dia x 5' Remarks:See elevations for location Cut to size in field. H-524Staff Shower Manf.:Shower Buddy www.showerbuddy.com Shower Caddy Product:Satin Nickel Corner Basket Finish:Satin Nickel (A112)Model #: 410099 Size:13-5/8" x 8" x 3-1/2" Remarks:See elevations for location FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceProduct Photo OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - HARDWARE STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 H-525Staff Shower Manf.:Signature HardwareSignature Hardware Towel Ring Product:Roller Ball Curtain Rings Model #:160609 www.signaturehardware.com (A112)Finish:Brushed Nickel Remarks:See elevations for location H-526Men's & Women's Manf.:Koala www.babychangingstations.com Public Restrooms Product:Horizontal Recess Wall Mount Baby Changing Table Stainless Steel Flange Model #:KB 100- ST (A130 & A127)Finish:Plastic Grey w/ stainless steel surround Size:37" x 22.9" Remarks:See elevations for location ADA Compliant. Mount at 48" to top to meet ADA requirements Refer to sheet A10.03 for mounting heights FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample L-501 Staff Room Kitchen Material:Lamin-ArtLamin-Art & Staff Room Name:Orion Textured Restroom Item Number:5029-TP: 1.800.323.7624 Edge:SquaredF: 1.847.860.0246 Countertop www.laminart.com Remarks: A116 & A115 L-502 Staff Room Kitchen Material:Lamin-ArtLamin-Art & Staff Room Name:Orion Textured Restroom Item Number:5029-TP: 1.800.323.7624 F: 1.847.860.0246 Cabinetry Remarks:See elevations for cabinet sizes www.laminart.com Final sizes to be field varified. Cabinet A116 & A115shop drawings required prior to fabrication OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - LAMINATE STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample P-500Ceiling Color Manf.:Benjamin Moore Benjamin Moore Throughout Color:Linen White1.888.854.9889Level 1 Paint Finish:Flat (Excluding Wet Areas)Wall Texture:smooth Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for approval prior to production P-501 Wall Paint at Vestibule,Manf.:Benjamin Moore Benjamin Moore Lobby, Lounge,Color:Dove Wing OC-181.888.854.9889 Corridor,Office, Mgr Paint Finish:EggshellBusiness Center,Wall Texture:smooth Ski Lockers, Ski Remarks:Contractor to submit Locker Vestibule, brush out to OZ for Staff Room, Elevator approval prior to Lobbies production A102, A103, A124, A113, A117, A118, A108, A105, A104, A116, A122, B131 P-502 Wall Paint at Level 1 Manf.:Benjamin Moore Benjamin Moore Columns Color:Durango 2137-301.888.854.9889 Paint Finish:Eggshell A103 Wall Texture:Smooth Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for approval prior to production P-503 Men's & Women's Manf.:Benjamin Moore Benjamin Moore Public Restroom,Color:Dove Wing OC-181.888.854.9889 Staff Restroom,Paint Finish:Satin Ski Locker Restroom Wall Texture:Smooth& Fitness Room Remarks:Contractor to submit Wall Paintbrush out to OZ for approval prior to A130, A127, A115, production A109 & B107 OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - PAINT PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - PAINT PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE P-504 Lobby Fireplace:Manf.:Benjamin Moore Benjamin Moore Back of Recess Color:Dove Wing OC-181.888.854.9889 Paint Finish:Satin Wall Texture:Smooth Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for approval prior to production P-505 Men's & Women's Manf.:Benjamin Moore Benjamin Moore Public Restroom,Color:Dove Wing OC-181.888.854.9889 Staff Restroom,Paint Finish:SatinSki Locker Restroom Wall Texture:Smooth & Fitness Room Remarks:Contractor to submit Ceiling Paintbrush out to OZ for approval prior to A130, A127, A115, production A109 & B107 P-506Indoor Pool & Manf.:TNEMECTNEMEC Locker Entry Color:To match BM 1067 Wall & Ceiling Paint Paint Finish:Satin Wall Texture:Smooth B108 & B120Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for approval prior to production P-507 Men's & Women's Manf.:Benjamin MooreBenjamin Moore Public Restroom,Color:November Rain 2142-601.888.854.9889Toilet at Indoor Pool Paint Finish:Satin & Ceiling Paint Wall Texture:Smooth Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for B123, B126, B124 & B128approval prior to production FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - PAINT PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE P-508 Wall Paint Above Manf.:Benjamin MooreBenjamin Moore Chair Rail Color:Creamy White OC-71.888.854.9889 at Unit Corridors Paint Finish:Eggshell Wall Texture:Smooth Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for approval prior to production P-509 Ceiling Color Manf.:Benjamin MooreBenjamin Moore at Unit Corridors Color:Dove Wing OC-181.888.854.9889 Paint Finish:Flat Wall Texture:Smooth Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for approval prior to production P-510 Pool Entrance Manf.:TNEMECTNEMEC Color:To match BM OC-18 Paint Finish:Satin Wall Texture:Smooth Remarks:Contractor to submit brush out to OZ for approval prior to production FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample PL-500 Great Room Manf.:Kohler Kohler Lounge Product:Undertone undercounter sink Wet Bar Sink Style #:K-3339 Finish:CP Polished Chrome A125 Size:13 5/8" diameter x 5 1/2" deep Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. ADA compliant. PL-501 Great Room Manf.:Grohe Grohe Lounge Product:Atrio High Profile Pillar Faucet Wet Bar Sink Filler Style #:20 074 000 Finish:Satin A125 Holes:1-Hole Spout:6" Hi-arc swivel spout Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Code Compliance: ASME/ANSI A112.18. 1M PL-502 Men's & Women's Manf.:Grohe GroheRestroom at Product:Atrio High Spout Lav Centerset Indoor Pool & Style #:21 027 000 Men's and Women's Finish:Satin Restroom Spout:6" Hi-arc swivel spout Remarks:Contractor is responsible for B123, B126, A130 & A127 supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Code Compliance: ASME/ANSI A112.18. 1M PL-503 Men's & Women's Manf.:Grohe Grohe Shower at Fitness,Product:Atrio 3-port Diverter Trim Staff Restroom Shower Style #:19 166 000Diverter Trim Finish:Satin Handle:Lever B125, B127, A115Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Code Compliance: ASME/ANSI A112.18. 1M. ADA compliant OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PL-504 Men's & Women's Manf.:Grohe GroheShower at Indoor Pool & Product:Rainshower Hand held Staff Restroom Shower Style #:28 871 000 Hand Held Shower Head Finish:Satin Spray:3 spray patterns B125, B127, A115Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Code Compliance: ASME/ANSI A112.18. 1M PL-505 Men's & Women's Manf.:Grohe Grohe Shower at Indoor Pool &Product:Rainshower 12" Shower Arm Staff Restroom Shower Style #:28 577 000Shower Arm Finish:Satin B125, B127, A115Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Code Compliance: ASME/ANSI A112.18. 1M PL-506 Men's & Women's Manf.:Grohe Grohe Shower at Indoor Pool &Product:Rainshower Shower Head Staff Restroom Shower Style #:28 373 000 Rainshower Head Finish:Satin Size:8" dia B125, B127, A115Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Code Compliance: ASME/ANSI A112.18. 1M PL-507 Staff Restroom Shower Manf.:Grohe Grohe Wall Union Product:Accessories Wall Union w/holder Style #:28 629 000 A115 Finish:Satin Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Code Compliance: ASME/ANSI A112.18. 1M FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PL-508 Men's & Women's Manf.:Grohe GroheShower at Indoor Pool Product:Accessories Wall Union w/holder Wall Union Style #:28 627 000 Finish:Satin B125 & B127 Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Code Compliance: ASME/ANSI A112.18. 1M PL-509 Men's & Women's Manf.:Grohe Grohe Shower at Indoor Pool Product:24" Shower Bar Shower Bar Style #:28 797 000 Finish:Satin B125 & B127 Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. Code Compliance: ASME/ANSI A112.18. 1M PL-510 Men's & Women's Manf.:Toto Toto Restroom Product:Undercounter Lavatory Ski Locker Restroom,Series:Vernica Men's & Women's Style #:LT156 Shower at Indoor Pool Finish:#01 Cotton &Remarks:Contractor is responsible for Staff Room Restroom supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for A130, A127, A109,installation. B125, B127, A115Meets ADA requirements PL-511 Ski Locker Restroom,Manf.:Toto Toto & Staff Room Restroom Product:HET Flushometer ADA toilet Toilet Style #:CT705EL Finish:#01 Cotton Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary A109 & A115parts and pieces needed for installation. ADA compliant FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PL-512Men's & Women's Manf.:Toto Toto Restrooms Toilet Product:Two Piece Toilet & Series:Drake ADA Men's & Women's Style #:CST744SL Toilet at Indoor Pool Finish:#01 Cotton Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for A127, A130, B124 & B128installation. ADA compliant PL-513Men's Locker at Manf.:Toto Indoor Pool Product:Low Consumption Urinal Urinal Style #:UT447V B123 Finish:#01 Cotton Remarks:Upgrade with a TOTO flushometer valve Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. ADA compliant PL-514 Staff Room Manf.:Kohler Kohler Kitchenette Product:Kitchen Sink Faucet Faucet Series:Simplice Style #:K-647A116Finish:CP Polished Chrome Handle:Remote Lever Handle Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. ADA compliant PL-515 Staff Room Manf.:Kohler Kohler Kitchenette Product:Undercounter Sink Sink Series:Undertone Style #:K-3164 A116 Finish:Stainless Steel Size:13-3/4" x 17-7/8" Remarks:Contractor is responsible for supplying all necessary parts and pieces needed for installation. ADA compliant FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample RB-500Ski Locker Material:Rubber Base Roppe &Name:700 Series Fitness Room Size:4"1.800.537.9527 Color:191 Camel Rubber Base Base Type:Standard Toe Base - 5/8" Thickness:1/8" A105 & B107Remarks: OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - RUBBERBASE STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample T-500 Bldg A Lobby Material:Limestone Arizona Tile and Great Room Name:Jura Grey 12655 E. 42nd Ave. Size:18" x 18"Ste #50 A103 & A125 Thickness:5/8"Denver, CO 80239 Edge:N/A Grout:TBDDallas Drewry Grout Joint:1/16"303.917.2957 Pattern:Straight Finish:Honed Remarks:Stone to be Sealed per manuf. See floor plans for locations. T-500A Lobby Accent Material:Limestone Arizona Tile Name:Jura Grey 12655 E. 42nd Ave. Size:18" x 18"Ste #50 Thickness:5/8"Denver, CO 80239 Edge:N/A Grout:TBDDallas Drewry Grout Joint:1/16"303.917.2957 Pattern:Straight Finish:Antiqued, confirm with architect Remarks:Stone to be Sealed per manuf. See floor plans for locations. T-501 Reception Desk Material:Granite Slab DAL Tile at Lobby Name:Nordic Black Countertop Size:SlabSara Harper Thickness:3cm A103 Edge:6" thick, squared edge Finish:AntiquedRemarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. T-502 Reception Desk Material:Onyx Slab Arizona Tile Face & Lounge Name:White Onyx12655 E. 42nd Ave. Shelves Size:SlabSte #50 Thickness:3cm Denver, CO 80239 Edge:Square A103, A124 Dallas Drewry Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's 303.917.2957 recommendations. See elevation for slab location. OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE AND STONESTRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE AND STONESTRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 T-503 Stone Wall Tile Material:Limestone AZ Tile at Name:Jura Grey12655 E. 42nd Ave. Public Space Size:9"x18"Ste #50 & Thickness:3/8"Denver, CO 80239 Unit Entries Edge:N/A Grout:TBDDallas Drewry A122 Grout Joint:1/16"303.917.2957 Pattern:Ashlar Finish:Honed Remarks:Stone to be Sealed per manuf. See floor plans for locations. T-504 Men's & Women's Bldg A Material:Pental QuartzCaesar Stone Public Restroom Name:Frosty Carrina 5141 877-9QUARTZCountertopSize:Slab Thickness:3cm A130 & A 127 Finish:Polished Edge:Squared, Eased Edge Remarks:Install per manufacturer's recommendations T-506 Men's & Women's Bldg A Material:Limestone AZ Tile Public Restroom Name:Jura Grey 12655 E. 42nd Ave. Wainscot Size:12" x 12"Ste #50 Thickness:3/8"Denver, CO 80239 A130 & A 127 Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/16"Dallas Drewry Remarks:Use as wainscot on all walls to 72" AFF 303.917.2957 T-507 Ski Locker Restroom Material:Caesar Stone Quartz SurfacesCaesar Stone & Fitness Room Name:Haze 2030 877-9QUARTZ countertop Size:Slab Thickness:3cm A109 & B107 Finish:Polished Edge:Squared, Eased Edge Remarks:Install per manufacturer's recommendations FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE AND STONESTRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 T-510 Entertainment,Material:Granite Slab DAL Tile Great Room Name:Nordic Black & Indoor Pool Size:Slab Countertop Thickness:3cm Finish:Antiqued A126, A125, B108 Edge:6" thick, squared edgeRemarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. T-515 Men's & Women's Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials Public Restroom &Name:Infusion Toilet room Colorway:White Wenge IF60Bob Hobson At Indoor Pool Size:12" x 24" Tile Wainscot Thickness:3/8" Grout:TBD B123, B126, B124 & B126 Grout Joint:1/16" Pattern:Ashlar, 1/3 overlapRemarks:Use as wainscot on all walls to 48" AFFTo run horizontal T-519 Men's & Women's Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials Showers at Indoor Pool Name:Infusion & Steam Room Colorway:White Wenge IF60Bob Hobson Wall Tile Size:12" x 24" Thickness:3/8" B125, B127, B121 Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/16" Pattern:Ashlar, 1/3 overlap Remarks:See Floor Plan for location.To run horizontal T-521 Staff Restroom Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials and Ski Locker Name:Empire Restroom Color:General's Grey VS85Bob Hobson Wall tile Size:14x14 Thickness:3/8" A115 & A109 Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/16" Pattern:Straight (at Staff Restroom) Ashlar (at Ski Locker Restroom) Remarks:Wainscot to 48"H FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE AND STONESTRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 T-522 Staff Room Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials Base Tile Name:Empire &Color:General's Grey VS85Bob Hobson Staff Restroom & Size:6x14 Ski Locker Restroom Thickness:3/8" Single Bullnose Tile Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/16" A116 , A115 & A109 Pattern:Straight (at Staff Restroom) Ashlar (at Ski Locker Restroom) Remarks:Wainscot to 48"H T-523 Indoor Pool Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials & Elevator Lobby Name:Infusion Wall Tile Colorway:White Wenge IF60Bob Hobson Size:12" x 24" B108 & B131 Thickness:3/8" Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/16" Pattern:Straight Remarks:See Elevations for location. Tile to start 2" from ceiling and floor for floating affect. T-524 Lobby & Great Material:Granite Slab DAL Tile Room Name:Nordic Black Fireplace Slab Hearth Size:Slab Thickness:3cm A103 & A125 Edge:Squared eased edge Finish:Antiqued Remarks:Stone to be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. T-525 Staff Room Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials Restroom Name:Empire Shower Surround Color:General's Grey VS85Bob Hobson Size:14x14 A115 Thickness:3/8" Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/16" Pattern:Straight Remarks: FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE AND STONESTRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 T-527Indoor Pool & Locker Material:Glass Tile DAL Tile Entry Name:Reflections in Glass Full Height Accent Tile Color:Dry Spice Sara Harper Size:6"x12" B108 & B120 Pattern:Ashlar Grout:Custom Bldg Products #10 Antique White Grout Joint:Not to exceed 3/16" Remarks:See elevations for backsplash pattern.Image not shown in correct color. T-528Staff Restroom Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials Shower ceiling tile Name:Empire Color:General's Grey VS85Bob Hobson A115 Size:4x4 Thickness:3/8" Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/16" Pattern:Straight Remarks: T-529Steam Room &Material:Porcelain Tile Design Materials Shower at Name:Infusion Indoor Pool Colorway:White Fabric IF50Bob Hobson Ceiling tile Size:1" x 2" Mosaic Thickness:3/8" B121, B125 & B127 Grout:TBD Grout Joint:1/16" Pattern:Straight Remarks:See Floor Plan for location. T-530Steam Room Bench Material:Pental Quartz Caesar Stone Color:Pietra Grey 5003877-9QUARTZ B121 Size:Slab Thickness:3cm Finish:Polished Edge:Squared, Eased Edge Remarks:Install per manufacturer's recommendations FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - TILE AND STONESTRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE PROJECT #:17004 T-531Men's & Women's Material:CaesarStone Caesar Stone Restroom at Color:Pietra Grey 5003877-9QUARTZ Indoor Pool Size:Slab Countertop & Thickness:3cm Backsplash Finish:Polished Edge:Squared, Eased Edge B123 & B126Remarks:Install per manufacturer's recommendations T-532Men's & Women's Material:Schluter Systems Restroom, toilet room, Name:Schiene AE45 & shower room at Finish:Satin Annodized Aluminum indoor pool Finishing Strip A127, A130, B123, B128, Remarks:See manufacturer's recommendations B124, B128, B125 & B127for installation T-533Locker entry &Material:Schluter Systems Indoor Pool Name:Schiene AE45 Finishing Strip Finish:Satin Annodized Aluminum B108 & B120 Remarks:See manufacturer's recommendations for installation FIRST ISSUE DATE:12.20.2013 - 100% Construction Documents CodeLocationDescriptionSourceSample WC-501Wallcovering @ Manf.:Wolf Gordon Unit Corridors Description:Vescom Tessera Below Chair Rail Product ID:G5794149 Product #:9322-1 Width:52.00" Unit Measure: Linear Yards Remarks: STRATA VAIL PUBLIC SPACE OZ INTERIOR SPECIFICATION - WALLCOVERING PROJECT #:17004 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as entrance screens. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach ceiling-hung units to overhead structural system. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 3. Global Steel Products Corp. 4. Hadrian Inc. 5. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company. B. Stainless-Steel Units: Facing sheets and closures fabricated from ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, stainless-steel sheet, leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness. 1. Stainless-Steel Facing Sheet Thicknesses: Specified thicknesses as follows: a. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.050 inch. b. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.0312 inch . 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured finish on exposed faces. Exposed surfaces are protected from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. C. Panel and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets are pressure laminated to core material. Units have continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edge closures. Exposed surfaces are free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. Corners are sealed by welding or clips. Exposed welds are ground smooth. 1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin- impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters. 2. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. D. Pilaster Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not less than 0.0312 inch specified thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. E. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.3 FABRICATION A. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten. END OF SECTION 10155 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal. C. Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. B. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. D. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2. Show mullion profiles and locations. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. E. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. 1. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. F. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers. G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louver : 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Construction Specialties, Inc.; Model RS-7315, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). b. Nystrom Building Products. 2. Louver Depth: 7 inches. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.068 inch. 4. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 8.09 sq. ft. for 48-inch wide by 48-inch high louver. b. Air Performance: Not more than 0.32-inch wg static pressure drop at 900-fpm free-area intake velocity. c. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 95 percent effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate of 3 inches per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph at a core-area intake velocity of 300 fpm. 5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening. B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. 2. Finish: Mill finish unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. F. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. END OF SECTION 10200 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES 10310 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10310 – FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Prefabricated fireplace inserts. 2. Exterior fire pit log set. 3. Flue and mounting devices, flue power ventilators, and other accessories required for a complete, ready-to-use installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings and product data on fireplace specialties and all accessories as specified under Section 01300 Submittals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Fireplace specialties and accessories must be listed and approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and the International Conference of Building Officials. Units, flues and installation shall meet building code requirements referenced in Division 1. B. Reference Standards: Comply with NFPA Standard No. 211. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store in original crates and under cover until ready for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the Fireplace Specialties Schedule at the end of Part 3, or comparable products by manufacturers as listed below: 1. Fireplace Inserts: a. Montigo Del Ray Corp. b. Napoleon Fireplaces. c. Town & Country Fireplaces, division of Pacific Energy Fireplace Products. 2. Fire Pit Log Set: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES 10310 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Steelog Artistic Metals PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fireplace specialties, flues, and accessories according to approved shop drawings and product data manufacturer's installation instructions. Maintain all required clearances to combustible materials. B. Gas Service: By Mechanical Contractor. 3.2 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES SCHEDULE A. Prefabricated Fireplace Inserts: 1. Typical Interior Units: Model BGD42CF Clean Face Direct Vent Fireplace, Napoleon Fireplaces. Provide with manufacturer’s standard fixed glass front. Provide Model GD422R Round Wall Terminal Kit. 2. Lobby A103: Model TC54 Series C, Town & Country Fireplaces. Provide modular direct vent; “Tranquility” burner with black porcelain panels; high- capacity power vent system with 8-inch diameter inner and 11-inch diameter outer pipe. 3. Great Room A125: Model TC36 See- Through, Town & Country Fireplaces. Provide “Tranquility” burner with black porcelain panels; power vent system with 5-inch diameter inner and 8-inch diameter outer pipe. 4. Penthouse Exterior Unit: Model GSS42 Outdoor Fireplace (Ventless), Napoleon Fireplaces. Natural Gas fueled; provide manufacturer’s standard brushed stainless steel doors with tempered glass; standard gas log set. 5. Location: Penthouse Exterior Unit B702 only. B. Exterior Fire Pit Log Set: 1. Campfire Series, Pine, 36-inch diameter; Steelog Artistic Metals. Provide integral steel base ring, leveling bars, hardware, and accessories required for installation. END OF SECTION 10310 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIGNAGE 10431 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10431 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Code required panel signs and supplementary items necessary to complete their installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 14 Elevator Sections for code-required elevator signage. 2. Division 16 Sections for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. C. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIGNAGE 10431 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction and with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. for the following: 1. Tactile and Braille Characters. 2. Typestyles. 3. Character Height. 4. Pictograms (Symbols). 5. Finish and Contrast. 6. Mounting Location and Height. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL SIGNS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Best Sign Systems; “Word and Picture Signs” or a comparable manufacturer and product, acceptable to Architect: B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: 0.125 inch thick. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut or Beveled. 3. Corner Condition: Square or Rounded. 4. Mounting: Unframed. a. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 5. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Tactile and Braille Characters: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. a. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. 2.2 SIGN SCHEDULE STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIGNAGE 10431 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO A. Stairs: 1. Provide a sign at each door to each stairway on each floor. 2. Message: a. Required wording for exiting as required by the local code authorities. “STAIR WAY”. b. Braille message as required by ADA. B. Inside Stairs: 1. Provide a sign at each door in stairways. 2. Message: As required by local code authorities. a. Identify stair location. b. Identify floor level. c. Identify all floors served. d. Identify stairway’s upper terminus. 3. Braille message as required by ADA. C. Elevator Lobbies: 1. Provide a sign at each elevator on other than Level One. a. Message: 1) Required wording and diagram for exiting as required by the local code authorities. "IN CASE OF FIRE DO NOT USE ELEVATORS USE STAIRS" 2) Graphic symbols that are appropriate, including Fire Evacuation Map. 3) Braille message as required by ADA. b. Mount above elevator call button. D. Other Rooms: 1. Provide a sign at each door that leads into the following rooms or similar room types: a. TELEPHONE ROOM b. ELECTRICAL ROOM c. JANITOR CLOSET d. MECHANICAL ROOM e. MAIN TELEPHONE ROOM f. MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM g. FIRE PUMP ROOM h. FIRE CONTROL ROOM i. ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIGNAGE 10431 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Braille message as required by ADA. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 3. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. 4. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using methods specified above. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIGNAGE 10431 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10431 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIGNAGE 10431 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10440 - 1 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO SECTION 10440 – GARAGE SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Conditions of the Contract for Construction and the General Requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work of this Section shall include providing all materials, labor, equipment, hardware and supervision to furnish and install signage in the Parking Garage as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein, including, but not limited to painted, illuminated and non-illuminated signs. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. The following Work is related to this Section: 1. Submittal Procedures Section 01330 2. Metal Fabrications Section 05500 3. Electrical Division 16 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. The sign Contractor shall have fabricated and installed signs from five (5) projects of similar magnitude and design. If requested, prior to being awarded a contract, shall submit the names, locations, contacts, and the telephone numbers for the five most recently installed, completed projects. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review and approval qualifications of sign installation Contractor. B. Submit for review and approval shop drawings indicating the following: 1. Sign details a) Complete sign face layout for each sign mark or group of similar signs with dimensioned text size, font type, symbols, clearances, and Braille when applicable. b) Method of fabrication and materials used. c) Data Sheet for vinyl and paint material. d) Quantities of each sign. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10440 - 2 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 2. Sign mounting hardware a) Quantities required of each type. b) Sign mounting hardware details indicating method of fabrication and all dimensions. 1.6 SAMPLES A. Submit for review and approval sample of signs P1 and V1. If approved, the submitted signs may be used for the project. B. Submit for review and approval samples of each color to be used. C. Submit for review and approval samples of vinyl for backgrounds, text and symbols to be used. D. Submit for review and approval samples of mounting hardware, neoprene pad and support brackets to be used. 1.7 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Deliver signs and mounting hardware to the site packaged to prevent damage and marked for easy identification. B. Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from damage and stored horizontal and flat to prevent warpage. Replace damaged materials at no cost to the Owner. 1.8 WARRANTY AND QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a written three (3) year full replacement warranty to the Owner that all signage will be free of defects due to workmanship and materials including, but not limited to fading, peeling, delamination or installation. The sign contractor shall also extend in writing to the Owner all Manufacturers' warranties. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, repair or replace any defective signs or hardware which develop during the warranty period, repair any damage to other work due to such imperfections, and provide labor for reinstallation as required. C. Regulatory signs shall comply with provisions in the Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for Buildings and Facilities and/or Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines (ABAAG). STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10440 - 3 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM VEHICULAR SIGNS IN PARKING AREAS (TYPE A) A. Aluminum shall be 0.080-inch sheet aluminum 3003-H14 or 6061-T6 alloy. B. Signs shall have a painted background with reflective copy with Helvetica Medium letter style. C. Chemically etch aluminum prior to painting, using Alumu-prep #33 by Amchem, DuPont Aluminum Prefinishing System 225S/226S or approved equivalent. D. Primer to be zinc chromate, or approved equivalent. Acceptable products include Matthews Paint Company 74-734/74-735 Metal Pretreatment or approved equivalent Lacryl or Amchem products. E. Top coat to be acrylic polyurethane, dark green in color. Acceptable products include Matthews Matte paints, or approved equivalent. F. Copy shall be die cut or computer cut 3M Scotchlite, Engineering Grade 680-10, White, roller applied. G. Sign face exposed to ultraviolet rays shall receive a flat clear coat finish. 2.2 ALUMINUM PEDESTRIAN SIGNS IN PARKING AREAS (TYPE B) A. Aluminum shall be 0.080-inch sheet aluminum 3003-H14 or 6061-T6 alloy. B. Signs shall have a painted background with reflective copy with Helvetica Medium letter style. C. Chemically etch aluminum prior to painting, using Alumu-prep #33 by Amchem, DuPont Aluminum Prefinishing System 225S/226S or approved equivalent. D. Primer to be zinc chromate, or approved equivalent. Acceptable products include Matthews Paint Company 74-734/74-735 Metal Pretreatment or approved equivalent. Lacryl or Amchem products. E. Top coat to be acrylic polyurethane, blue in color or color to vary by level as selected by Architect. Acceptable products include Matthews Matte paints, or approved equivalent. F. Copy shall be die cut or computer cut 3M Scotchlite, Engineering Grade 680-10, White,roller applied. G. Sign face exposed to ultraviolet rays shall receive a flat clear coat finish. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10440 - 4 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 2.3 PVC PIPE CLEARANCE SIGNS (TYPE D) A. Eight-inch diameter, 1/2-inch thick wall, Sch-80, PVC pipe with flush end caps. B. Paint for PVC pipe sign shall be Spraylat Lacryl No. 482-BK high hiding black. C. Die cut or computer cut letters and symbols for PVC pipe sign shall be pressure applied Scotchlite Engineer Grade #680-10, White. D. Handcut letters and symbols are not accepted. 2.4 STANDARD REGULATORY SIGNS (TYPE N) A. Aluminum shall be 0.080-inch aluminum 3003-H14 or 6061-T6 alloy. B. Background shall be 3M Scotchlite Brand Reflective Sheeting, Engineer Grade, roller applied, color as indicated on Drawings and listed below: 1. #680-77 Green 2. #680-72 Red 3. #680-10 White 4. #680-75 Blue 5. #680-85 Black C. Copy shall be Helvetica Medium upper and lower case, die cut or computer cut 3M Scotchal Brand Non-Reflective Sheeting, Engineer Grade, roller applied, color as indicated on Drawings and below: 1. #7725-13 Red, Pantone 1795 C 2. #3650-10 White 3. #3650-12 Black, Pantone Process C 4. #7725-17 Blue 2.5 ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE SIGNS (TYPE P) A. Engraved signs shall be fabricated from high-pressure melamine plastic laminate. B. Background color as indicated on the Drawings with one-inch high white Helvetica medium characters. C. Text shall be accompanied by Braille. Braille shall be dots or round dome shaped. Square formed text character edges shall be free of burrs and rough edges. D. Raised copy thickness shall not be less than 1/32 inch. E. Plate size shall be a minimum two inches in height by length as required. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10440 - 5 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO F. Sign to comply ADAAG. G. Signs shall be as fabricated by The Supersine Co., E. Davison, Detroit, MI 48212 or Approved Equivalent. 2.6 SIGN MOUNTING HARDWARE A. Fasteners, hangers, cable, chains, steel tubes, steel angle, etc. as indicated on Drawings. B. Vandal proof nuts and bolts. 1. Bolts shall be aluminum with half slotted heads 2. Nuts shall be aluminum "break-a-way" C. Rubber coated conduit clamp sized to insure secure tight clamp to cables. D. Sign mounting hardware paint 1. Metal primer for galvanized surfaces a. Pittsburgh White-Galvanized Steel Primer b. Sherwin-Williams Galvite c. Glidden Glidguard All Purpose Metal Primer d. Or Approved Equivalent. 2. Metal primer for aluminum surfaces a. Pittsburgh Zinc Chromate Primer b. Sherwin-Williams Zinc Chromate Primer c. Glidden Glidguard All Purpose Metal Primer d. Or Approved Equivalent. 3. Finish Paint - Gray (Color to match 3M Scotchcal Medium Gray #7725-31, Pantone Cool Gray 7 C) a. Pittsburgh Fast-dry Alkyd Gloss Enamel b. Sherwin-Williams Metalmastic II Enamel c. Glidden Glidguard Industrial Alkyd Enamel d. Or Approved Equivalent. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10440 - 6 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to installation of signs, examine the site conditions and the Work of Others insofar as it affects this work and report immediately in writing to the Engineer as required by the General Conditions any conditions that interfere with the installation. B. Field-verify mounting height for each sign prior to fabrication and installation. C. Begin installing signs only after deficiencies have been corrected in acceptable manner. D. Commencement of installation implies acceptance of related work performed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to sign installation, Contractor shall arrange a meeting with the Engineer at the site to review the sign placement. B. Coordinate the placement of signs with the structural configuration and the lighting location. Additional compensation not allowed for relocating signs after installation if relocating is required by conflicts with lighting, structure, mechanical, electrical or architectural features. C. Before drilling into concrete structural surfaces such as ceiling, beams, slab and columns for sign anchors, verify that structural components such as tensioned tendons and structural rebar will not be damaged. 3.3 ALUMINUM VEHICULAR AND PEDESTRIAN SIGNS: (TYPES A & B) A. Aluminum shall be chemically etched, degreased and must be flat and free of ragged edges. Corner radii shall be made by stamping with dies or computer routed. B. All signs of the same size shall be totally uniform in size and shape. C. Aluminum shall have pre-punched holes for fasteners to prevent damage to signs in the field. Refer to sign mounting details for location and spacing of fasteners. D. Prime and paint aluminum face, back, and edges. E. Die or computer cut copy shall be roller applied. No air bubbles, chips, or cracks will be allowed. Edges shall be smooth and burnished to prevent peeling. F. Backs and edges of signs mounted directly to concrete construction shall have two (2) coats of baked epoxy enamel paint on backside to prevent cathodic reaction with the structure. Baked epoxy enamel shall be applied to pre-punched blank before fabricating sign. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10440 - 7 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO G. Sign face exposed to ultraviolet rays shall receive a flat clear coat finish. 3.4 PVC PIPE SIGN (TYPE D) A. Predrill holes in PVC pipe for fasteners and weeps. Refer to sign mounting details for size and locations of holes. Clean ends of pipe and glue flush mounted end caps in place with PVC cement. Finish ends to hide seams after glue for end caps is dry. Clean entire pipe with kectone PVC cleaner to remove all foreign substances. B. Paint pipe per Lacryl specifications for painting PVC. No runs or unevenness of paint will be allowed. C. Apply die cut 3M Scotchlite Engineer Grade letters and graphics. Letters and graphics shall be properly spaced and aligned. Burnish edges of all letters to prevent peeling. D. Install parallel to the finished surface for the required clearance referenced on the Drawings. 3.5 STANDARD REGULATORY SIGNS (TYPE N) A. Aluminum shall be chemically etched, degreased and must be flat and free of ragged edges. Corner radii shall be made by stamping with dies or computer routed, and all signs of the same size shall be totally uniform in size and shape. B. Aluminum shall have pre-punched holes for fasteners to prevent damage to signs in the field. Refer to sign mounting details for location and spacing of fasteners. C. Background sheeting shall be roller applied and cover the entire face surface. No air bubbles, chips, or cracks will be allowed. Edges shall be trimmed smooth. D. Die or computer cut copy shall be roller applied. No air bubbles, chips, or cracks will be allowed. Edges shall be smooth and burnished to prevent peeling. E. Sign face exposed to ultraviolet rays shall receive a flat clear coat finish. F. Backs and edges of signs mounted directly to concrete construction shall have two (2) coats of baked epoxy enamel paint on backside of sign to prevent cathodic reaction with the structure. Baked epoxy enamel shall be applied to pre-punched blank prior to fabricating sign. 3.6 ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE SIGNS (TYPE P) A. Melamine plastic plates shall be mechanically cut to produce a smooth finished edge. B. Characters shall be produced by a high-speed cutter, which is mechanically attached to a photograph system. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10440 - 8 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO C. Fasten to substrate using method recommended by Manufacturer. 3.7 SIGN AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Signs shall be mounted level and plumb. B. PVC pipe signs shall be mounted parallel to floor surfaces to allow consistent floor clearance from one end of the sign to the other. C. The use of power-propelled fasteners to install signs is prohibited unless approved in writing by the Engineer. D. Wire brush and solvent clean surfaces to be touch-up painted to remove rust and other contaminants. Touch-up paint with the same metal primer and finish paint used for shop painting. E. Remove paint spots and other soil from floors and adjacent non-painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 10440 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10506 - WOOD LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood lockers with wood-faced doors. 2. Locker benches. 3. Ski accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wood lockers. B. Shop Drawings: For wood lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in wood lockers, including locker accessories. 3. Show wood locker fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories. 4. Show wood locker numbering sequence. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Wood-faced panels with transparent finish, not less than 12 by 24 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. 2. Thermoset decorative-overlay-surfaced panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 3. Corner pieces of wood locker front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces, not less than 18 inches wide by 18 inches high by 6 inches deep. 4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing wood locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain wood lockers, locker benches, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Where wood lockers and benches are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical locker. Include door panel with specified door hardware. Include adjustable shelving and drip pan. Include boot dryer and air delivery hoses. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage wood lockers have been completed in installation areas. If wood lockers must be stored in other- than-installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are same as that in final installation location and comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood lockers until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and humidity conditions during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support wood lockers by field measurements before fabrication. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concealed wood support bases. 1. Requirements are specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood lockers can be supported and installed as indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wood lockers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of locks or hardware. c. Delamination of panel products. d. Deterioration of wood, wood finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Classic Woodworking, LLC. 3. Hollman, Inc. 5. Legacy Lockers. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150-MR50. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: “Medex”, SierraPine Composite Solutions. C. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, Type I, moisture- resistant adhesives. D. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1 for application over medium-density fiberboard. E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed. 1. Finish: 2B (bright, cold rolled). 2. Surface: Embossed. F. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO G. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide toothed-steel or lead-expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.3 WOOD LOCKER HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard wood locker hardware complying with the requirements in this Section. B. Frameless Hinges (European Type): Fully concealed, nickel-plated steel, self- closing, with not less than 125 degrees of opening. 1. Provide two hinges for doors 42 inches high and less. 2. Provide three hinges for doors more than 42 inches high. C. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. D. Knobs: Metal; back mounted; 1-1/2-inch- diameter, flat round shape. E. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Satin stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 DOOR LOCKS A. General: Fabricate wood lockers to receive locking devices. Provide one locking device for each wood locker door unless otherwise indicated. G. Digital Keypad Locks: Battery-powered electronic keypad with reprogrammable manager and owner codes that override access. Three consecutive incorrect code entries shall disable lock for three minutes. 1. Designed for permanently assigned access via entry of user's four-digit code. 2.5 WOOD-FACED WOOD LOCKERS A. General Configuration: 1. Individual Locker Overall Dimensions: 24-inches-wide by 36-inches-deep by 84- inches-high. 2. Provide one side of locker body with full- height vertical slot, 8-inches- wide (clear), with drip pan, for ski storage. 3. Provide opposite side of locker body with two fixed upper shelves (no drip pans) and two adjustable lower shelves (each with drip pan). B. Construction Style: Flush overlay . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Locker Body: Fabricated from 5/8 inch medium density- fiberboard-core panels covered on both sides with thermoset decorative overlay. 1. Exposed Panel Edges: 1/4-inch-thick solid wood to match doors. D. Flush, Wood-Faced Doors: Wood veneer applied over 3/4-inch- thick medium- density fiberboard core. 1. Wood Face Veneer Species: Walnut. 3. Wood Edges: 1-inch- thick solid wood of same wood species as face veneer. E. End Panels: Match style, material, construction, and finish of wood-faced wood doors. F. Shelves: Fabricated from medium- density fiberboard -core panels covered on both sides with thermoset decorative overlay; fixed . 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 2. Exposed Edges: 1/4-inch-thick solid wood to match doors . G. Corners and Filler Panels: 3/4-inch- thick panel. Match style, material, construction, and finish of wood-faced wood doors. F. Semiexposed Surfaces: Thermoset decorative overlay. 2.7 LOCKER ACCESSORIES H. Number Plates: 1-1/2-inch- diameter, etched, embossed, or stamped, plastic plates with black numbers and letters at least 1/2 inch high. Identify wood lockers in sequence indicated on Drawings. A. Boot Dryers: Williams Boot & Glove Dryers, Inc.; “V” Style ambient air dryers; steel construction with powder coat finish; designed for top-of-locker mounting; in- locker air delivery from flexible vinyl hose, one for each boot, total of four hoses per locker. 2.9 LOCKER BENCHES C. Pedestal-Leg Locker Benches: Bench supported by pedestal legs, minimum of two pedestals for each bench, with overall height of 18 inches measured from top of bench to floor, as follows: 2. Metal Pedestal Legs: 1-1/2-inch- diameter, stainless-steel round tube or pipe . 3. Bench Tops: 1-1/4 inches deep; fabricated as follows: a. Butcher Block Top: Solid laminated hardwood of species and finish to match doors. c. Width: Provide minimum 20-inch width for accessible benches. d. Length: As indicated on Drawings STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.10 FABRICATION A. Unit Principle: Fabricate each wood locker with shelves, an individual door and frame, an individual top, a bottom, and a back, and with common intermediate uprights separating compartments. 1. Fabricate wood lockers to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 2. Ease edges of corners of solid wood members to 1/16-inch radius. B. Fabricate components square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of scratches and chips. Accurately machine components for attachments in factory. Make joints tight and true. 1. Fabricate wood lockers using manufacturer's standard construction with joints made with dowels, dados, or rabbets. Dado side panels to receive shelving except where indicated to be adjustable. 3. Join drawer subfronts, backs, and sides with manufacturer's standard glued joints. C. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: 1. Locate bottom shelf, where provided, no lower than 15 inches above the floor. 2. Where additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48 inches above the floor. D. Venting: Fabricate wood lockers with space between doors and locker assembly of not less than 1/4 inch . F. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. G. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. H. Fabricate drip pans from 0.0625-inch stainless steel sheet. Solder all joints. Provide 2- inch- high hemmed lip continuous at perimeter. Adhere pans to shelf with adhesive mastic. 2.11 FACTORY FINISHES FOR WOOD-FACED WOOD LOCKERS A. General: Finish wood lockers at factory as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparations for Finishing: Sand, fill countersunk fasteners, seal concealed surfaces, and perform similar preparations for finishing wood lockers, as applicable to each unit of the Work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood lockers. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end- STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad wood lockers do not require backpriming when surfaced with thermoset decorative overlay or plastic laminate. C. Transparent Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, clear, catalyzed lacquer finish with sanding between coats. Seal with moisture-resistant topcoat. 1. Stain: Match Architect’s sample for color and sheen . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting wood locker installation. B. Verify that furring is attached to concrete and masonry walls that are to receive wood lockers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Condition wood lockers to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing wood lockers, examine factory-fabricated work for completeness and complete work as required, including removal of packing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install wood support base. C. Install wood lockers level, plumb, and true; use concealed shims. D. Connect groups of wood lockers together with manufacturer's standard fasteners, through predrilled holes, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. Fit wood lockers accurately together to form flush, tight, hairline joints. E. Install wood lockers without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings, providing unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of wood-faced wood lockers. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Fasten wood lockers through wood locker base, at ends, and not more than 36 inches o.c. with No. 8 flush-head wood screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood base. F. Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed where practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts. H. Install number plates after wood lockers are in place. 1. Attach number plate on each wood locker door, near top, centered, with at least two screws with finish matching number plate. I. Anchor locker benches to floors. 1. Uniformly space pedestals not more than 72 inches apart; securely fasten pedestals to bench top and anchor to floor. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and slides to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. B. Protect wood lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during construction. C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace wood lockers that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by wood locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10506 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10508 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10508 – PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Lockers with plastic-laminate-faced wood doors for staff use. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing plastic laminate lockers and concealed within other construction before plastic laminate locker installation. 2. Division 10 Section “Wood Lockers” for occupant ski lockers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for plastic laminate lockers. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic laminate lockers. 4. Show plastic laminate locker fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories. 5. Show plastic laminate locker numbering sequence. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 2. Thermoset decorative-overlay-surfaced panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 3. Corner pieces of plastic laminate locker front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces, not less than 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10508 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing plastic laminate locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic laminate lockers through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plastic laminate lockers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Regulatory Requirements: Where plastic laminate lockers are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."ICC A117.1. 1. Provide hardware that does not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist, and that operates with a force of not more than 5 lbf. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials are indicated, provide materials with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver plastic laminate lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage plastic laminate lockers have been completed in installation areas. If plastic laminate lockers must be stored in other-than-installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are same as that in final installation location and comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. B. Deliver master and control keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic laminate lockers until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic laminate lockers until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10508 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Verify concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support plastic laminate lockers by field measurements before being enclosed and before plastic laminate locker fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that plastic laminate lockers can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" to fabricator of plastic laminate lockers; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of plastic laminate lockers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures. 2. Faulty operation of locks or hardware. 3. Deterioration of wood, plastic laminate finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. B. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for plastic laminate lockers is based on Ideal Products, Inc. Model Ideal 2000. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Classic Woodworking, Inc. 2. Hollman, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue, minimum 45-lb/cu. ft. density. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as follows: 1. Vertical Surfaces: VGS. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10508 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Lamin-Art. c. Pioneer Plastics Corp. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. C. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical formulations indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to produce products with fire-test-response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that is warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material. B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: density, 45 lb/cu. ft; modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf and 225 lbf, respectively. 2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: density, 44 lb/cu. ft; modulus of rupture, 1300 psi; modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf and 175 lbf, respectively. 3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by Willamette Industries, Inc. 2.4 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKER HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard plastic laminate locker hardware and accessories complying with the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10508 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. General: Provide plastic laminate locker hardware and accessories, complying with the following, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." C. Semiconcealed Hinges: Single-pivot, spring-loaded, steel hinges; back mounted. 1. Provide 2 hinges for doors 42 inches tall and less. 2. Provide 3 hinges for doors more than 42 inches tall. D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 2.5 DOOR LOCKS A. General: Fabricate plastic laminate lockers to receive locking devices. Provide one locking device for each plastic laminate locker door, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cylinder Locks: Built-in, flush cam locks with five-pin tumbler keyway, keyed separately and master keyed. Furnish two change keys for each lock and five master keys. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD LOCKERS A. Construction Style: Flush overlay. B. Locker Body: Fabricated from fire-resistant-particleboard-core panels covered on both sides with high-pressure decorative laminate. 1. Side Panels: 3/4 inch thick. 2. Back Panel: 1/4 inch thick. 3. Top Panel: 3/4 inch thick. 4. Bottom Panel: 3/4 inch thick. 5. Exposed Panel Edges: 1-mm-thick PVC3-mm-thick PVC. C. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, over both sides of fire-retardant particleboard core. 1. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch thick. 2. Panel Edges: 1-mm-thick PVC. D. End Panels: Match style, material, construction, and finish of plastic-laminate-faced wood doors. E. Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. F. Corners and Filler Panels: Laminate-faced, 3/4-inch thick panel that matches door faces. G. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10508 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Match Architect's samples. 2.7 LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed, aluminum or steel; finished to match other plastic laminate locker hardware. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 1. Provide hooks as indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide one double-prong ceiling hook for each compartment of double-tier plastic laminate lockers. B. Number Plates: 1-1/2-inch diameter, etched, embossed, or stamped, plates with black numbers and letters at least 1/2 inch high. Identify plastic laminate lockers in sequence indicated on Drawings. Finish plates to match other plastic laminate locker hardware. 2.8 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKER FABRICATION A. Unit Principle: Fabricate each plastic laminate locker with an individual door and frame, individual top, bottom, back, and shelves, and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. 1. Fabricate plastic laminate lockers to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Fabricate components square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of scratches and chips. Accurately machine components for attachments in factory, with no chips. Make joints tight and true. 1. Fabricate plastic laminate lockers using manufacturer's standard construction with joints made with dowels, dados, or rabbets. Dado side panels to receive shelving, except where indicated to be adjustable. C. Venting: Fabricate plastic laminate lockers with space between doors and locker assembly of not less than 1/4 inch . D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. F. Attach PVC edging to panels by thermally fusing edging to panels after panel fabrication. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10508 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where wood lockers will be installed. B. Verify that furring is attached to concrete and masonry walls that are to receive plastic laminate lockers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Condition plastic laminate lockers to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing plastic laminate lockers, examine factory-fabricated work for completeness and complete work as required, including removal of packing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. B. Connect groups of plastic laminate lockers together with manufacturer's standard fasteners, through predrilled holes, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. Fit plastic laminate lockers accurately together to form flush, tight, hairline joints. C. Install plastic laminate lockers without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Fasten plastic laminate lockers through back, near top and bottom, at ends with No. 8 pan-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. D. Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed where practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Number Plates: Install plates after plastic laminate lockers are in place. 1. Attach number plate on each plastic laminate locker door, near top, centered, with at least two screws with finish matching number plate. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10508 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. B. Protect plastic laminate lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit plastic laminate locker use during construction. C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace plastic laminate lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by plastic laminate locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10508 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire protection cabinets. 2. Division 10 Section "Signs" for directional signage to out-of-sight fire extinguishers and cabinets. 3. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. D. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 SEQUENCING A. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is complete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 6mm thick. 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following : a. Fire End & Croker Corporation; 1600 – 1610 Series. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; Ambassador Series. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Architectural Series. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: Maximum 4-inch (102-mm) backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet . F. Door Material: Steel sheet G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame . H. Door Glazing: Clear float glass . I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch . 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. J. Accessories: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle . 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect . a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER ." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door . 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. K. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Steel: Factory primed for field painting . 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning". After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10522 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Fire End & Croker Corporation. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard . 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard . 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container : UL-rated 3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. 2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. b. Fire End & Croker Corporation. c. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 10523 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10605 - WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard-duty wire mesh partitions. 2. Wire mesh ceilings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. As defined in ASTM E 2016: 1. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires securely in place. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wire mesh items. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include clearances required for operation of doors. 2. Coordinate heights and partition locations with location of lighting, fire sprinklers, and other overhead objects. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing wire mesh items and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for wire mesh items, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh items from single source from single manufacturer. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver wire mesh items crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic. B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site. 1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner in person, by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh units by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Full-size units of the following door lock items equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type installed, but no fewer than ten units: a. Magnetic cards. b. Key blanks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acorn Wire & Iron Works, Inc. 2. American Woven Wire Corporation. 3. Jesco Industries, Inc. 4. Wirecrafters. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Wire: ASTM A 510. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and washers. E. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Carbon Steel: Zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 2. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the loads imposed. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.3 STANDARD-DUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS A. Mesh: 0.135-inch diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven into 1-1/2-inch diamond mesh. B. Vertical Panel Framing: 1-1/4-by-5/8-by-0.097-inch cold-rolled, C-shaped steel channels with 1/4-inch diameter bolt holes spaced not more than 18 inches o.c. along center of framing. C. Posts for 90-Degree Corners: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch steel angles with 1/4-inch diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing; with floor anchor clips. D. Line Posts: 3-inchby-4.1-lb or 3-1/2-by-1-1/4-by-0.127-inch steel channels; with 5-by-18-by-1/4-inch steel base plates punched for attachment to floor. E. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing fabricated from 1- 1/4-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch steel channels or C-channels, banded with 1-1/4-by-1/8-inch flat steel bar cover plates on 4sides, and with 1/8-inch thick angle strike bar and cover on strike jamb. 1. Hinges: Full-surface type, 3-by-3-inch steel, 1-1/2 pairs per door; bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing. 2. Self-Contained Electronic Locks: a. General: Battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought-steel case. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock; type indicated. 1) Type: Mortise. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2) Actuating Device: Magnetic-stripe card reader. a) Card: Manufacturer's standard. 3) Provide (2) cards and (2) keys for each door. F. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 WIRE MESH CEILINGS A. Mesh, Framing, and Stiffeners: Fabricated from same mesh and framing as wire mesh partition panels. B. Perimeter Partition Supports: 1-1/2-by-1-1/2-by-1/8-inch (38-by-38-by-3-mm) steel angle, with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter bolt holes aligned for bolting to top of wire mesh partitions and to sides of wire mesh ceiling panels. C. Wall Supports: 1-1/2-by-1-1/2-by-1/8-inch (38-by-38-by-3-mm) steel angle punched for attachment to wall and wire mesh ceiling panels. D. Intermediate Supports: Steel I-beam, as recommended by manufacturer. E. Intermediate Support Posts: 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch (50-by-50-by-3-mm) steel pipe or tubing. F. Finishes: Match adjacent wire mesh partitions. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than those indicated. Use larger-sized components as recommended by wire mesh item manufacturer. As required for complete installation, provide bolts, hardware, and accessories with manufacturer's standard finishes. 1. Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled. 2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and grind smooth, leaving no evidence of joint . B. Standard-Duty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. 1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing. 2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction. a. Provide horizontal stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by panel height and as recommended by wire mesh partition manufacturer. Weld horizontal stiffeners to vertical framing. b. Fabricate partition and door framing with slotted holes for connecting adjacent panels. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with bottom horizontal framing flush with finished floor. 4. Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels. a. For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom over door, fabricated from same mesh and framing as partition panels. 5. Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing as required to install hardware. C. Wire Mesh Ceilings: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. 1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing. 2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction. a. Provide stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by panel span and as recommended by wire mesh ceiling manufacturer. Weld stiffeners to framing. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed. C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches o.c. through floor shoes located at each post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches o.c. through back corner panel framing and as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. C. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch diameter "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches o.c. D. Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows: 1. For partitions that are 7 to 9 feet high, spaced at 15 to 20 feet o.c. 2. For partitions that are 10 to 12 feet high, located between every other panel. 3. For partitions that are more than 12 feet high, located between each panel. E. Install doors complete with door hardware. F. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing. 3.3 WIRE MESH CEILINGS ERECTION A. Anchor wall support angle to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. B. Attach wire mesh ceiling panels to wall support angles with bolts at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. C. Attach wire mesh ceiling panels to wire mesh partitions with slotted angles bolted to sides of ceiling panels and to top of partitions at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. D. Attach wire mesh ceiling panels to intermediate supports as recommended by manufacturer. E. Locate wire mesh ceiling panels 18 inches below bottom of lowest adjacent structure. Report mounting heights below 7’-0” to Architect for confirmation prior to installation. Conflicts with other building elements including ductwork, light fixtures, conduit, piping, and sprinkler heads shall be referred to the Architect for resolution prior to installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Remove and replace defective work including doors and framing that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 10605 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Private-use bathroom accessories. 4. Warm-air dryers. 5. Childcare accessories. 6. Custodial accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific manufacturers and models, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bradley Corporation. 3. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). B. Utility Shelf with Mop/ Broom Holders and Rag Hooks: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-224. 2. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch and supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside; with hooks and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Size: 36 inches long by 8 inches deep. 4. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch thick stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10801 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 11110 – LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Contract Documents applying to this Section include all Laundry Equipment and Rough-in Plans, these General Conditions and Specifications, all related Project Specifications and drawings, and all Addenda issued prior to execution of this Contract. The Laundry Equipment Contractor must not submit any Bids until they have carefully reviewed all Laundry Drawings, General Conditions, Specifications, Instructions to Bidders, or any other related documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.2.1 WORK INCLUDED (LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT CONTRACT): A. Laundry/valet/housekeeping work is indicated on the Laundry Drawings and Specifications includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Furnish all laundry equipment as per Itemized Equipment Schedule, labor, materials, and services necessary for the setting in place of laundry/valet/housekeeping service and related equipment in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, including that which is reasonably inferred. Provide and set in place laundry equipment including the following: a. Install and provide laundry equipment bolt down hardware, equipment leveling grout pads, equipment stands and supports as required. b. Remove any debris as a result of this installation. c. Clean and prepare laundry equipment for operation prior to final sign off and equipment approval by the Owner's representative. d. Coordinate locations for wall reinforcement/backing (by the G.C.) as required for laundry/valet/housekeeping equipment. e. Cut holes in laundry equipment for pipes, drains, electric outlets, etc. as required for installation, including welded sleeves, collars, ferrules, or escutcheons. f. Provide for rigging equipment and cost as required to install the specified laundry equipment in the specified locations. g. When specified, provide and install utility/electrical interconnections between related laundry equipment components to make ready for final single point connections by the G.C. (or other building trades). h. When specified, provide and install washer vacuum breakers, STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO mechanical support equipment, and lint collectors. i. For all laundry equipment provide and install all motor starters, and dryer back draft dampers. k. Provide all additional work indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.2.2 RELATED WORK (NOT INCLUDED IN LAUNDRY CONTRACT): A. Electric services, including wiring to and final connection to the laundry equipment. B. Water, waste, gas, steam/condensate, thermal fluid, compressed air, air vacuum, and cooling water services to the Laundry equipment, including all valves, hardware and fittings, and final connections to the laundry equipment. C. Vacuum breakers and shock absorbers except when supplied with the laundry equipment. D. All space heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems and direct connected supply/exhaust duct work to and from the connection position of the laundry equipment. E. Wall reinforcing or bracing required for wall mounted laundry equipment. F. Drain trough and trenches including trench frames, grating, and lint screens. G. Floor pad thickening, noise and vibration dampening construction, and structural reinforcing and thickening of floor slabs to accommodate heavy static and dynamic floor loading at the laundry equipment. H. Wall bumpers and guards in the laundry/valet/housekeeping area to prevent damage by laundry carts. I. All related laundry/valet/housekeeping building construction, lighting, fire protection, mechanical/electrical system, and communication systems. J. Free and clear passage way and access for delivery and installation of the specified laundry equipment. K. Laundry detergent and related remote chemical dispensing equipment and piping system. L. Custom fabricated millwork desks, counters, wall shelving, and cabinets. M. All plumbing fixtures, including soak sinks, water fountains, hand sinks, hose bibs, and mop basins. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: A. Addition to the requirements of these Specifications, comply with Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for all phases of work. 1.3.2 QUALIFICATIONS: A. Manufacturer producing the laundry equipment of the Section shall have a minimum of five years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified. B. Laundry Equipment Contractor installer for the Work of this Section shall have a minimum of five years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified and shall have the approval of the Owner's representative and the Laundry Equipment Consultant. 1.3.3 STANDARDS: A. All laundry equipment, work, and materials shall comply with the latest codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, and directions of any agency including national or local Building Inspection. B. All laundry equipment, work, and materials shall comply with the latest national or local fire safety regulations of any agency having jurisdiction including. E. Electrical equipment shall comply CSA listing and with the latest national or local electrical regulations of any agency having jurisdiction. F. Standard and high pressure steam heated equipment shall comply with the latest national or local regulations of any agency having jurisdiction. G. Gas heated equipment shall comply with CSA. and the latest national or local regulations of any agency having jurisdiction. H. All laundry equipment, work, and materials shall comply with the latest work national or local safety regulations of any agency having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1.4.1 BIDS: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO A. Bids shall be submitted on the equipment specified herein. In the event that the Bidder can not bid the specified item due to circumstances such as proprietary territories or limited sales agreements, the Bidder shall submit in writing no less than two weeks before the Bids are due, alternates which are no less "equal" in nature to the specified item including specified performance, sizes, capacities, features, options, voltages, etc. Acceptance of any alternate is subject to written approval and suitability for this project. Considerations will be based on quality and quantity differences compared to the original specification as well as available space and utility conditions. B. Any substitutions or alternates proposed must be submitted in writing a minimum of two weeks before the Bid deadline, including literature describing the substitution. Include in writing any differences from the original specification such as different space, features, options, utility, or building requirements as well as any differences in specified options and features. Include reasoning for offering any and all substituted items. C. No equipment alternates or substitutions from the original specifications shall be installed without prior approval based on analysis by the Architect, Owner's Representative, Laundry Design Consultant, Project Engineers, including: Structural, Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing, & HVAC. D. Refer to other sections for details describing acceptable substitutes/alternates. E. In the event of model changes, the latest model shall be acceptable, with the provisions that the latest model conforms in quality and other features to the intent and purpose for which it was specified. F. Acceptance of a substitutes/alternates for any reason shall not relieve the Laundry Equipment Contractor of liability for all additional costs incurred as a result of redesign and all other work required to install the substitute/alternate items. 1.4.2 SPECIFICATION OR PROJECT DRAWING DISCREPANCIES: A. Where discrepancies exist in the project specifications and drawings, regarding quality or quantity, the higher quality or the greater quantity shall be furnished. A corresponding credit will be issued if a lesser quality or quantity is approved. The Laundry Equipment Contractor must notify the Owner's representative, Architect, General Contractor, and Laundry Design Consultant if any discrepancies exist on the Laundry Drawings, Specifications, STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO or any other related documents prior to proceeding with this Contract. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: 1.5.1 GENERAL: A. The following data shall be submitted for approval in the quantity and at the time requested by the Architect or the Owner's representative. 1.5.2 EQUIPMENT BROCHURES: A. Submit, within ten working days after award of Contract, laundry equipment brochures, bound in sequence of the item numbers, clearly labeled in the upper right corner with the item and quantity to be furnished. Sheets for each item shall clearly highlight and indicate all appropriate information such as make, model no., accessories/options to be provided, electrical information, and special features or cautions. Where no printed data exists, submit the required information in the form described below for shop drawings. Included the Contractor's name and project name on the brochure cover. 1.5.3 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Submit shop drawings for all special manufactured or custom fabricated items. Prepare shop drawings at 3/4" or 1-1/2" scale. Show dimensions, materials, and details of construction installation and relation of adjoining work requiring cutting or close fitting. Indicate reinforcements, anchorage and related work required for the complete installation of laundry equipment. Submit shop drawings package within Project Schedule. 1.5.4 ROUGH-IN DRAWINGS: A. Submit utility rough-in drawings as related to laundry including plumbing, mechanical, electrical, architectural conditions, type rough-in drawings that shall be drawn at 1/4" scale and shall be informatively labeled and titled. Every plumbing, mechanical, and electrical point of connection or location shall be clearly identified showing the necessary load, size, and consumption data required and completely dimensioned for location. Caution Notations to all trades shall be clearly and completely identified for appropriate action by all trades at critical locations. All dimensions shall be related to finished surfaces, center-lines and heights above the finished floor. 1.5.5 OTHER MANUALS A. After installation is completed and required testing, start-up, and operation instructions are completed, the Laundry Equipment STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of bound maintenance service and parts manuals with operation instructions, replacement parts lists, maintenance schedules, and copies of laundry equipment warranty cards. It is the responsibility of the Laundry Equipment Contractor to fill out and forward all warranty and registration forms required by the various Manufacturers. 1.5.6 WARRANTY REPAIR SERVICE: A. The Laundry Equipment Contractor shall provide a trained and qualified Service Agency facility and personnel to be available within 24 hours after request by an authorized representative of the Owner to repair or replace defective laundry/valet/housekeeping equipment (as specified in Section 11110) for the Warranty period without cost to the Owner's representative, including all costs such as labor, materials, parts, travel, travel time, lodging, out of pocket expenses, and other expenses, unless such service is required because of misuse, negligence, willful damage, improper maintenance or accident by other parties. Refer to other sections for further information regarding Warranty requirements. B. If Laundry Equipment Contract Warranty requirements are not detailed in any other sections, then the Warranty period shall be one full year past the date the laundry is put into beneficial use of hotel operations. 1.5.7 SERVICE FACILITY: A. The Laundry Equipment Contractor shall submit the name, address and phone number of the qualified Service Agency for the Warranty period for approval. Prior to completion of the Laundry Equipment Contract, the Laundry Equipment Contractor shall post sign in the laundry area with the name, address and phone number of the approved Service Agency for repairs and service, during the Warranty period. A copy of this listing shall be sent to the General Contractor and to the Owner's representative. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING: 1.6.1 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in Manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with Manufacturer's name, trade name, make, model no., quantity, type, class, grade, size, and color of the product enclosed. B. Store materials, equipment, and fixtures in unopened containers. Store off STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO the ground and under cover, protected from damage. 1.6.2 HANDLING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Provide a Rigger for rigging all heavy or bulky laundry equipment to be moved and set in place at the job site (as required). Coordinate with General Contractor for use of building crane where possible, otherwise provide handling equipment as required. 1.6.3 PROTECTION: A. The Laundry Equipment Contractor is responsible, during the progress of the project, to protect his equipment against theft or damage until final acceptance by the Owner's representative. The Owner’s representative or General Contractor should sign for all items delivered to the job site prior to final acceptance. B. Verify conditions at the building, particularly door opening and passages, to assure access for all laundry equipment. Any pieces too bulky for existing facilities shall be hoisted or otherwise handled with apparatus as required. Coordinate with the General Contractor to provide openings for laundry/valet/housekeeping equipment too large to fit through doors or passages. If this is not done in a timely manner, in writing, and approved by the General Contractor, any extra cost involved will be paid by the Laundry Equipment Contractor. Use all means necessary to protect the laundry/valet/housekeeping equipment included in this Section before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. C. In the event of damage caused by the Laundry Equipment Contractor, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner's representative, General Contractor, and Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO A. See itemized Laundry Equipment Specifications at the end of this Section. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS: A. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, use new, first quality materials of their respective kinds, and subject to approval of the Owner's representative, General Contractor, and Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS: 3.1.1 INSPECTIONS: A. Prior to start of work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where the installation of laundry/valet/housekeeping equipment may properly commence. 3.1.2 DISCREPANCIES: A. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the General Contractor and Architect. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS: A. The Laundry Equipment Contractor shall verify delivery access, architectural, and utility dimensions before proceeding with the Laundry Contract work, obtain field measurements for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction, and shall be responsible for the accuracy of such measurements and precise fitting and assembly of finished work. 3.2 INSTALLATION: 3.2.1 JOINTING AND ANCHORING: A. Set each piece of non-mobile/non-portable laundry equipment securely in STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO place, leveled, and adjusted to correct height. Anchor to supporting substrate where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Coordinate bolt down and anchoring details with the General Contractor. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. Adjust and level counter tops and other work surfaces. 3.3 CLEANING, RESTORING FINISHES: A. Restore exposed and semi-exposed finishes to remove/repair any dents, cracks, abrasions, dust, dirt, residues, and other damages. Polish exposed metal surfaces and touch up painted surfaces. Replace work that can not be successfully restored. 3.4 TESTING, START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS: A. Delay the start-up of laundry/valet/housekeeping equipment until service lines have been tested, balanced, and adjusted for pressure, voltage and similar consideration, and until water and steam lines have been cleaned and treated for sanitation. Test each piece of laundry/valet/housekeeping equipment to demonstrate that it is operating properly, and that controls and safety devices are functional. Repair equipment that is found to be defective in its operation, including units which are performing below specified capacity and standards. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance procedures for each piece of laundry/valet/housekeeping equipment. PART 4 ITEMIZED LAUNDRY/VALET/HOUSEKEEPING EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS: A. Laundry Equipment shall be provided as specified as follows (see the following pages for detailed Laundry Equipment Specifications): STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS ITEM #1: WASHER/EXTRACTOR, 60 LB. Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Milnor or Pre-approved Equal Model No.: 30022 X8J (Soft Mount Washer) Pertinent Data: 60 Lb. capacity (9.0 cu. ft.) Furnish & set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Washer/Extractor shall be a heavy duty, end loading, open pocket machine with a dry weight capacity of 60 lbs. (30" diameter x 22" deep, 9.0 cu. ft. capacity) stainless steel cylinder. 2. 208 volt 60 hz 3 phase electrical operation. 3. E-P Plus Programmable microprocessor control. 4. Vacuum fluorescent display. 5. Single-motor inverter drive. 6. Electrically-operated valves. 7. Programmable overnight bath soak. 8. Suspension system. 9. Controls read in English + second language as directed by Operator. 10. Programmable water temperature for each bath. 11. Programmable six water levels. 12. Fresh-water-flushing chemical manifold. 13. Six liquid chemical injection ports. 14. Extraction pre-balance. 15. Compressed air hook-up not required. 16. Bolt down hardware and grouting by Laundry Equipment Contractor for soft mount type washers. 17. Door opening to be 15.00” 18. Overall width at 42.75” 19. Overall depth at 60.75” 20. Overall height at 66.50” 21. Door open height to floor at 27.75” 22. 1st wash speed at 38 RPM. 23. 2nd wash speed at 43 RPM 24. Distribution speed at 68 RPM 25. Low extract speed at 390 RPM 26. Intermediate extract speed at 580 RPM 27. Maximum extract speed at 840 RPM STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 28. Maximum centrifugal extraction at 300 G. 29. Single drive motor rated at 5 HP 30. Water valves sized at .75” 31. Drain valve size at 3” ITEM #2: DRYER, 80LBS. Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Milnor or Pre-approved Equal Model No.: M82, Gas Heat, Computer Controls, Reversing Basket Pertinent Data: 80 Lb. capacity (22.4 cu. ft.), with reverse basket Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Phase 7 advanced microprocessor 2. Lint monitor 3. Rotation sensor 4. Fire suppression system with .75” connection, to be connected to domestic water supply 5. Anti-wrinkle feature 6. Temperature senor monitoring. 7. Door opening to be 31.38” 8. 1 HP basket drive motor 9. 3 hp blower motor 10. 1,700 CFM exhaust air flow 11. 14.0” exhaust duct collar 12. Gas valve at 1” 13. 270,000 Btu/hr. heat input 14. Control voltage to be 24-volts 15. Gas fired. L.E.C. must adjust burner as suited to local gas supply conditions and altitude. Adjust burner orifice and assembly for local altitude and gas conditions. Verify exact gas type and conditions prior to ordering this dryer. 16. Electronic ignition system. 17. See-through, clear glass door. Door to have no gasket to become in contact with the laundry. 18. Computer controls including: reverse or non-reverse control, self diagnostic function, programmable temperature control, push to start control, programmable drying and permanent press cool-down timer control with L.E.D. readout, and computer reset. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 19. Microprocessor controlled with a minimum of six pre-programmed cycles, with manual overrides, automatic drying and cooldown cycles and an additional forty programmable cycles. 20. Automatic drying controls to allow drying to a preset level with adjustable settings: Finished, Dry, & Extra Dry. 21. Microprocessor to have anti-wrinkle capabilities that automatically activate at the end of each cycle to periodically tumble without heat to reduce wrinkling. 22. Unit to have a safety rotational sensor to stop the cycle in progress if the drum fails to turn when required to do so. 23. Microprocessor to have a clean lint feature which monitors the value of the “Lint Cleaning Frequency” timer. 24. Microprocessor to have the ability to display the drum RPM for troubleshooting. 25. Dryer to have Sail Switch Verification. 26. Microprocessor to be able to be programmed up to 200 degrees F and have a special cycle to process Visa® fabrics. 27. Microprocessor to have extra large scrolling display, multi-language capabilities, cycle pause, voltage monitoring, and the ability to add an external horn. 28. Dryer to have a delayed tumble start feature. 29. Computer memory battery back-up. 30. Reversing basket control. 31. Sealed bearing drive with separate fan and reversing basket motors, with electrical/thermal overload protection. 32. Dryer to have V-belt and pully drive system with a trunnion-supported drum. 33. 208 volt 60 hz 3 ph electrical operation. 34. Dry weight capacity of 80 lbs. with a 37" diameter x 36" deep (22.4 cu. ft.) no-snag galvanized steel basket with deburred perforations. 35. Dryer cabinet and panels to be power painted inside and out, electro- statically and baked for 25 minutes at 425 degrees F. 36. Safety controls including: flame failure protection, exhaust air failure switch, overheat protection temperature safety thermostat, gas valve (AGA approved) and pressure regulator. 37. Automatic back draft damper. 38. Built-in lint screen with front slide out feature for easy cleaning. 39. Dryer to be skidded and stretch-wrapped for shipping. 40. Adjustable leveling bolts. 41. Fire safety engineer shall locate fire protection at dryer area as required by code. 42. Mechanical Contractor shall provide lint ducting to building exterior as indicated on sheet L1.2. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 13 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO ITEM #3: HAND FOLDING TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Midwest Model No.: 3072F36 Pertinent Data: 72" L x 30" W x 36” H, 1. Verify color with operator prior to ordering ITEM #4: LAUNDRY CART Quantity: Four (4) Manufacturer: Meese or Pre-approved Equal Model No.: 32gm-12 harvytx Pertinent Data: 12 bushel, with Spring Lifts Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Four (4) swivel, non-marking resilient casters. 2. Verify caster configuration and basket color with Operator. ITEM #5: SOAK SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: EL Mustee or Pre-approved Equal Model No.: 17F Pertinent Data: Single tub, floor mounted, with standard faucet. Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. P.C. shall provide and install one (1) single sink faucets and drain for sinks. ITEM #6: EXTRA HAND SHEET FOLDER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: SS Products or Pre-approved equal. Model No.: King Model Pertinent Data: King STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 14 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #7: PORTABLE BASKET SCALE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Newhouse or Pre-approved Equal Model No.: S70PL Pertinent Data: Spring Dial Indicator in Pounds Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #8: MOBILE LINEN TRANSPORT Quantity: Ten (10) Manufacturer: Meese or Pre-approved Equal Model No.: 92P Pertinent Data: Converts from shelf to bin type cart, 27-1/2" W x 47-1/2" L x 61-1/2" D basket. Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Four non-marking swivel casters. 2. Verify color options, if any, with Operator ITEM #9: LINT COLLECTOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Energenics or Pre-approved Equal Model No.: AF7 Pertinent Data: Air Free Lint Filter @ 7,000 CFM Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Automatically cleaned, one stage dry lint filter. 2. Unit to be sized to clean exhausted air with a resistance of no more than .3” W.C. at any time during the drying cycle. 3. Body of filter to be Class A fire retardant fiberglass meeting U.S. Navy QPL 21607, Grades 1 & 2, Class A with an ultraviolet protective coating. 4. Filter media to be high temperature polyester monofilament fabric capable STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 15 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO of removing 98% of all particales larger than 160 mirocrons, collecting over 98% of the lint by weight. 5. Filter to have ability to automatically release lint from the screen by gravity and deposit it into a storage bag for easy disposal. 6. Filter to have not control interconnection to the dryers. 7. Filter to have no electrical utility connections. 8. Unit to have side discharge for horizontal exhaust. ITEM #10: STACK WASHER/DRYER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Speed Queen or Pre-approved Equal Model No.: LTSA7A Pertinent Data: Non-coin-op, Front Load Washer w/ Front Load Dryer Above Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Washer: 1. 120 volts 60 hz 1ph electrical operation with electrical/thermal overload motor protection. 2. Electrical power cord and plug. 3. Hot water, cold water, and drain line hoses. 4. Manually operated controls without coin meter. 5. Controls must be equipped with water level control, and settings for delicate fabric cycle, permanent press cycle, and cotton fabric cycle. 6. Stainless steel tub. Dryer: 1. 120/208 volts 60 hz 1ph electrical operation with electrical/thermal overload motor protection. 2. Electrical power cord and plug. 3. Manually operated controls without coin meter. 4. Controls must be equipped with drying timer and settings for fluff dry (no heat drying), permanent press drying, and cotton fabric drying. 5. 7 cu. ft. basket. 6. Exhaust dryers to lint filter by mechanical contractor. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 16 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO ITEM #11: DRAIN TROUGH, FRAME, COVERS, & LINT SCREEN Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Specified By Architect Provided By General Contractor 1. G.C. to provide and install drain trenches, frames, covers, and lint screens as specified by Architect per plans and details and the following: a. G.C. shall provide rust and corrosion proof covers (over exposed trenches) on Sheet LD1.2 and rust and corrosion proof framing at exposed washer drain trench, per trench cover detail. Trench covers shall be constructed to carry the weight of personnel without bending. b. Provide holes and sleeves in covers for indirect waste lines as required. c. G.C. shall provide removable lint screens as indicated per detail on Sheet L1.2. ITEM #12: DETERGENT DISPENSING SYSTEM Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Chemical Purveyor Chemical Purveyor shall provide as part of Chemical Purchase Agreement the following: 1. All required chemical tanks or reservoirs. 2. All required chemical dispensing pumps including installation of control wiring from washer formula controls to dispensing pumps. 3. All required chemical tubing, tubing connectors, and hardware. 4. All required chemical conduit or protective chase (per Owner specifications) from remote chemical dispensing area to each washer. 5. Confirm chemical dispensing requirements with Owner prior to installing any chemical dispensing equipment or systems. 6. Chemical Purchase Agreement with the Owner shall list anticipated yearly cost for washing laundry based on a cost per pound of laundry washed basis. Listed chemical prices shall remain valid as determined by written agreement with the Owner's purchasing department or purchasing agent. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Page 11110 - 17 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO ITEM #13: LINEN STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Lot of Three (3) Sections Manufacturer: Nextel or Pre-approved Equal Model No.: Poly-Z-Brite Pertinent Data: 24" wide shelves w/ 74" H Posts, Four (4) posts and four (4) shelves per section. Furnish & set in place per manufacturer's standard spec.s and the following: 1. Provide and assemble four shelves per shelving section. Provide exact shelf quantity as follows: a. Laundry Area: Eight (8) total shelves, 24" W x 60" L Four (4) total shelves, 24” W x 48” L END OF SECTION – 11110 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 1 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO SECTION 11150 - PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Conditions of the Contract for Construction and the General Requirements of Division I of these Specifications apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work of this Section shall include furnishing all material, equipment, labor, and supervision to install in place a fully operating Parking Control System, as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Included will be supply, delivery, unloading, setting, anchoring control wiring installation wiring termination, and start up of all parking, revenue control, and access control equipment. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. The following work provided by Others is directly related to the Parking Control System: 1. Submittal Procedures Section 01330 2. Garage Signage Section 10440 3. Mechanical Division 15 4. Electrical Division 16 B. The electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all conduit and power wiring in proper size and location to the parking control equipment and empty conduit for control wiring as required. C. Manufacturer of the Parking Control System shall provide those responsible for related work with: 1. Installation diagrams and details for setting indoor and outdoor mounted equipment. 2. Templates for setting indoor and outdoor mounted equipment. 3. Templates and cast-in inserts to anchor freestanding equipment to curbs and bases. 4. Electrical wiring diagrams and details. 5. Electrical installation requirements. 6. Electrical power requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 2 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General 1. This parking facility is to be used by several user groups including condominium owners, hotel guests, retail/restaurant patrons (visitors) and contract parkers. Condominium owners, hotel guests and contract parkers will activate the garage door inbound and parking barrier gate/garage door outbound utilizing on-line AVI (Automatic vehicle Identification) or key card/keypad readers. Visitor parkers will activate the garage door by taking a ticket from the ticket dispenser inbound and will activate the parking barrier gate/garage door outbound upon inserting a validated ticket into an exit verifier or by paying by credit card. There will be a nested parking area on the two lower levels of the garage that can only be accessed by condominium owners and hotel guests. The garage door at this location will be activated utilizing AVI or key card readers. 2. The parking equipment will be on-line with a parking control computer. 3. The parking control equipment shall be supported by an intercom system tied back to the Parking/Security office. B. Vehicle Entrance and Exit Locations 1. One dedicated entrance lane and one dedicated exit lane are provided at two locations (the garage entry/exit and at the top of the ramp on the P1 level). C. Dedicated Entrance Lanes Garage Entry/Exit 1. During regular operating hours, the presence of the vehicle over the detector loop adjacent to the ticket dispenser shall activate the push button on the ticket dispenser. Upon depressing the push button the ticket dispenser will issue a date and time stamped ticket. A buzzer shall sound until the visitor parking patron removes the ticket from the chute. The garage door shall open automatically with removal of the ticket from the ticket dispenser. 2. The garage door will automatically open for condominium owners and contract parkers when the AVI reader scans a valid tag. 3. Hotel guests will be issued a combination room/parking key card. The presence of a vehicle over a vehicle detector loop adjacent to the card reader shall send a signal to activate the reader. The barrier gate shall automatically open by insertion of a valid key card into the reader. Hotel guests will have unlimited in- out privileges. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 3 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 4. Parking patrons will also be able to enter the facility by utilizing a key pad reader. Upon entering a valid pass code, the garage door shall open and allow access. 5. The garage door shall close automatically after the vehicle has passed over the closing detector loop. The circuitry shall be such that the entrance cycle of a vehicle shall be completed before the system will accept the entry of another vehicle through the same lane. 6. The access control readers shall only accept properly coded cards and tags meeting anti-passback criteria as specified. If the card/tag passes all validity and anti-passback checks the garage door shall open. If the card/tag fails validity or anti-passback checks an alarm signal shall be triggered in the manager's office, the central controller shall print an "invalid attempt" statement indicating reader location, user I.D. number, and type of invalid access (English text), and the garage door shall open (soft anti-passback) or remain closed (hard anti- passback) at the Owner's option. Communication with the invalid card user may take place using the intercom system specified in this section. Level P1 1. The garage door will automatically open for condominium owners and contract parkers when the AVI reader scans a valid tag. 2. Hotel guests shall activate the garage door utilizing a card reader. The presence of a vehicle over a vehicle detector loop adjacent to the card reader shall send a signal to activate the reader. The barrier gate shall automatically open by insertion of a valid key card into the reader. D. Dedicated Exit Lanes Garage Entry/Exit 1. The presence of a vehicle over a vehicle detector loop adjacent to the exit verifier shall send a signal to activate the exit verifier. The visitor parker inserts their parking ticket into the exit verifier. If the parking ticket has been validated for free parking, the exit verifier shall decode the validation and signal the barrier gate and garage door to open. If the ticket has not been validated, the exit verifier shall prompt the patron to insert a credit card for payment for parking. 2. Condominium owners and contract parkers shall bypass the exit verifier and proceed to the exit lane gate. The parking barrier gate and garage door will automatically open when the AVI reader scans a valid tag. 3. Hotel guests shall bypass the exit verifier and proceed to the card reader. The presence of a vehicle over a vehicle detector loop adjacent to the card reader shall send a signal to activate the reader. The barrier gate and garage door shall automatically open by insertion of a valid key card into the reader. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 4 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 4. Parking patrons will also be able to exit the facility by utilizing a key pad reader. Upon entering a valid pass code, the exit lane gate and garage door shall automatically open. 5. The exit lane gate and garage door shall close automatically after the vehicle has passed over the closing detector loops. The circuitry shall be such that the exit cycle of a vehicle shall be completed before the system will accept the exit of another vehicle through the same lane. Level P1 1. The garage door shall automatically open when a vehicle passes over the opening detector loop. 2. The garage door shall automatically close after the vehicle has passed over the closing detector loop. E. Count/Control System 1. The count system shall maintain both differential and total counts (by lane) of condominium owners, hotel guests, visitors and contract parkers, and facility totals. Differential and total counts of illegal entries shall also be maintained. The entrance and exit lane parking equipment shall be monitored to identify the status of the equipment such as gates and ticket dispensers. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer of Parking Control System shall provide an experienced field repre- sentative to meet with Electrical Subcontractor, before any rough-in work begins, to review building plans as they relate to Parking Control Equipment, to explain details or precautions necessary to assure that all parking and revenue control equipment, and in particular, detector loops will work properly and to determine that all required conduits and wiring are properly laid out. B. Installer shall have previously worked successfully with the equipment Manufacturer, and prior to being awarded a contract shall submit with bid to the Architect/Engineer the names, locations, contacts, and telephone numbers for the five most recently installed, similar, completed projects. The list shall include any difference between material furnished then and materials to be furnished for this project. C. Installers shall be approved in writing by the Parking Control System Manufacturer. D. Installer shall service and maintain the parking control system and have an Engineer approved equipment service center located to provide service within 24 hours. E. Provide equipment service and maintenance as follows: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 5 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 1. Use experienced, Manufacturer trained personnel. 2. Assume total responsibility for proper installation and operation of all components within the system. F. Parking control equipment and software shall recognize and process information that includes four digit dates in the year field. The system will correctly process all years prior, including and subsequent to year 2000. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings for review and approval. Included are equipment wiring diagrams, equipment cut sheets and specifications, booth shop drawings, and equipment color charts. B. Upon request submit for review and approval the names, locations, contacts, and telephone numbers for the five most recently installed completed projects. C. Submit for record 30 days prior to installing the Parking Control Equipment, procedures for testing electrical, mechanical, and program functions of the system. D. Provide the Owner with two final copies of each of the following: 1. Maintenance Manual 2. Operating Manual 3. Equipment electrical circuitry diagram 4. As built equipment wiring diagram E. Provide Owner with two sets of keys for each piece of equipment with locks and two sets of master keys. Each equipment type shall be master keyed including but not limited to: 1. Cabinets for gates 2. AVI/Card readers 3. Ticket dispenser 4. Exit Verifier 5. Keypad reader NOTE: Keys shall be unique to this parking equipment; they shall not fit any other equipment in the same city. 1.7 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Deliver equipment to the site packaged to prevent damage and marked for easy identification. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 6 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO B. Store equipment in a clean, dry location protected from damage. Replace damaged materials at no cost to the Owner. C. Deliver items required to be built into the concrete promptly to the site so they may be built in as the work progresses. 1.8 OPERATING CONDITIONS A. Equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and installed to operate effectively under the climate and exposure conditions to which the equipment will be exposed. All equipment is for exterior, exposed to weather use. B. If parking and revenue control systems self-contained heating and cooling devices do not operate to the Owners satisfaction within the Warranty period, they shall be repaired and/or replaced by the Manufacturer. C. It is recognized that certain solid state and computer type parking and revenue control equipment may require special electrical power and grounding considerations. If required by the parking and revenue control equipment, the Manufacturer of the Parking Control System should: 1. Include in the bid amount, the cost to provide and install voltage stabilization modules or devices to protect each component from normal voltage variations. 2. Advise the Engineer in writing at the time of the award of contract of any special electrical power and grounding requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturers Warranty 1. Warranty shall be for one year covering all labor and materials. 2. Warranty shall commence when equipment is 100 percent operational and acceptable to the Owner, as approved in writing by the Owner and Engineer. 3. Maintain equipment operational during the warranty period such that, if defective, equipment will be serviced within eight business hours, following notification by the Owner. Business hours are 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. 4. Warranty shall include preventative maintenance cleaning, testing, and minor repair no less than twice per year. 5. Warranty shall cover all equipment furnished under this specification section – both manufacture and installation, excluding misuse or vandalism. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 7 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment colors shall be standard Manufacturer colors except where specifically noted. B. All parking control equipment must be compatible with the electrical system as specified in Division 16 and shown on the Drawings. 2.2 EQUIPMENT LIST A. The following equipment list consists of basic system components. Provide auxiliary items required for the proper functioning of the system, whether mentioned or not, including but not limited to, heaters, coolers, wiring, transformers, relays, pedestals, etc. It is the SOLE RESPONSIBILITY of the Parking Control Equipment (Sub)Contractor to provide every component necessary for a complete functioning system. B. Locate equipment as indicated on the Drawings. C. Equipment List 1. Provide Parking Control Equipment for each lane as indicated: 2. Lane Types: a. Lane A – Garage Entry Lane (1 lane) b. Lane B – Garage Exit Lane (1 lane) c. Lane C - Level P1 Entry Lane (1 lane) d. Lane D – Level P1 Exit Lane (1 lane) 3. Equipment List: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 8 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO Quantity per lane Total Item A B C D Other Required A.Gate with automatic safety reverse and 10' folding arm 1 1 B.Digital self-tuning vehicle detector 3 4 3 2 12 C.Detector loop - sawcut*3 4 3 2 12 D.AVI reader 1 1 1 3 E.Post mounted card reader and keypad reader 1 1 1 3 F.Ticket dispenser with intercom 1 1 G.Exit verifier with intercom 1 1 H."Full" sign 1 1 I.Dual master intercom station 1 1 J.Merchant Validator 5 5 * Quantity and detector loop sizes to be determined by the system Manufacturer. 4. Office Equipment a. Installer shall provide computer and software meeting the requirements for properly running the installed Parking Access and Revenue Control System. b. Dual Master Intercom Station. c. Provide three (3) mobile merchant validators to validate mag-stripe tickets. Validations for free or discounted parking may be offered by merchants, organizations, departments, etc. to their customers and visitors using the parking garage. 2.3 ON-LINE CARD READER AND KEYPAD READER SYSTEM A. The on-line access control card/keypad reader shall be located at the entrance and exit lanes where indicated on the Drawings. B. System shall utilize insertion or swipe type cards that can be used as both unit keys and to enter the parking garage. C. System Capabilities 1. The access control system shall be an on-line system. If the central controller is not functional, the card reader stations shall function off-line. Card validity checks shall be made, but not anti-passback checks when the control computer is down. 2. System shall be able to add cards to memory with the ability to define where and when the card holder may use the card. On a gate-by-gate basis, valid access times shall be definable. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 9 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 3. System shall be able to delete cards from memory as well as modify access control privileges of individual cards. Two hundred (200) cards shall be provided in base bid. 4. System shall be able to select card controlled areas that are to operate in an antipassback (APB) mode and select whether contact closure (e.g. gate up) is required to change antipassback status. APB shall include forgive command which resets the sequence control to a neutral state. The antipassback status shall be restored within the card system when the card is next used in either entrance or exit reader. SOFT APB (printer lists the illegal use but autogate still opens) and HARD APB (printer lists the illegal use and autogate does not open) shall be selectively programmable. 5. All system activity messages to the operator shall be printed in plain language English text including card holder name. 6. The card system shall be capable of automatically scanning the card and sending the card number to the card controller to verify current status. Reading rejects shall not exceed one half of one percent of card presentations. 7. For use in a combined contract/visitor entrance lane, actuation of the card/keypad reader shall lock out the transient ticket dispenser until after the vehicle has passed through the gate. 8. The keypad reader shall provide a vend signal when a valid code is entered via the keypad. The vend signal shall allow the barrier gates and overhead garage doors to allow access. 9. The keypad reader shall have up to 1,100 programmable access codes. All programming shall be accomplished through the use of a hand held computer. 10. The keypad entry system shall provide the capacity to store and accept six different facility codes. 11. Card/keypad reader height and location shall be such that the card reader shall be within easy reach of seated driver. 12. Both housing and stand shall be treated for corrosion resistance and finished externally with two coats of acrylic enamel in same color as other equipment as selected by the Owner. D. Acceptable products are: 1. 3M Card Reader System, Austin, TX 2. Card Readers, AMG, Cincinnati, OH. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 10 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 2.4 ON-LINE AVI READER SYSTEM A. The on-line access control AVI readers shall be located at the entrance and exit lanes where indicated on the Drawings. B. System Capabilities 1. The access control system shall be an on-line system. If the central controller is not functional, the AVI reader stations shall function off-line. Validity checks shall be made, but not anti-passback checks when the control computer is down. 2. System shall be able to add AVI tags to memory with the ability to define where and when the tag holder may use the facility. On a gate-by-gate basis, valid access times shall be definable. 3. System shall be able to delete tags from memory as well as modify access control privileges of individual tags. Two hundred (200) tags shall be provided in base bid. 4. System shall be able to select AVI controlled areas that are to operate in an antipassback (APB) mode and select whether contact closure (e.g. gate up) is required to change antipassback status. APB shall include forgive command which resets the sequence control to a neutral state. The antipassback status shall be restored within the AVI system when the tag is next used in either entrance or exit reader. SOFT APB (printer lists the illegal use but autogate still opens) and HARD APB (printer lists the illegal use and autogate does not open) shall be selectively programmable. 5. All system activity messages to the operator shall be printed in plain language English text including tag holder name. 6. The AVI system shall be capable of automatically scanning the tag and sending the tag number to the controller to verify current status. Reading rejects shall not exceed one half of one percent of AVI presentations. 7. For use in a combined contract/transient entrance lane, actuation of the AVI reader shall lock out the transient ticket dispenser until after the vehicle has passed through the gate. 8. AVI reader height and location shall be such that the AVI reader shall be able to detect tags without interference from other signals. 9. Both housing and stand shall be treated for corrosion resistance and finished externally with two coats of acrylic enamel in same color as other equipment as selected by the Owner. 10. Contractor shall install AVI readers per Manufacturer’s recommendation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 11 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO C. Acceptable manufacturers are: 1. Transcore Corp., Dallas, TX 2. TagMaster, North America, Tacoma, WA 3. 3M Corp, Austin, TX 2.5 BARRIER GATE A. The parking gate shall provide an effective barrier to one-way vehicles in the exit lane. The barrier arm shall retract quickly in a vertical plane on a command signal form the ticket dispenser, fee computer, card reader, or detector loop depending on location, and return to the lower position upon a signal from a detector beyond the gate location. The parking gate shall be installed as located on Drawings and shall incorporate in one housing all necessary components for the functioning of this unit. The assembly shall operate satisfactorily in the environmental conditions stated elsewhere in this specification. B. The unit shall have a 10 foot folding arm of wood construction. The barrier arm shall be a break-away design that can be easily and inexpensively replaced when broken. The height of the gate arm or the extended portion of folding arms shall be approximately 36 inches from drive level in DOWN position. C. When the barrier gate arm is in the open “Up” position, minimum vertical clearance below the gate arm shall be 8’-2” AFF for ADA compliance. D. The gate arm shall have a down strike safety feature. This feature provides that should any object be struck by the gate arm during its descent, the arm shall immediately reverse and return to the UP position without damage, and remain up from 2 to 60 seconds, until automatically reset by variable control. The sensory function shall be initiated by sensing the internal mechanical action. The external mounting of tubes, wiring, and electrical devices on the gate arm shall not be acceptable. E. External key switches shall be provided at each gate to lock the gate into the UP position for special event conditions in addition to the ability using the central computer to raise and lock the gates in the up position. F. Gate shall be on-line with the control computer. G. All gates shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). H. Gate shall provide minimum 8’-2” clearance for accessible vans. I. Acceptable products are: 1. 3M Barrier Gate, Austin, TX 2. AMG 1750 Series Barrier Gate, Amano McGann, Cincinnati, OH. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 12 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 2.6 TICKET DISPENSER A. The ticket dispensers shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Intercoms, where indicated on Drawings, to be provided by the Parking Control Equipment Contractor. The unit shall have a minimum capacity of 4,000 tickets. The dispenser shall be capable of operating independent of the remainder of the system with a supply of power only. The vend of a ticket shall be controlled by push button. It shall dispense only one ticket per vehicle and shall not dispense without a vehicle over the detector loop. B. The unit shall be provided with heating, cooling, thermostats, etc., as required and of adequate size and tested by the Manufacturer, to ensure satisfactory operation in the environmental conditions specified in this section. C. The ticket dispensers shall have the ability to issue test tickets. D. The ticket dispensers shall be equipped with a bi-directional transport mechanism with ticket retractor. E. The ticket dispensers shall be equipped with a low ticket indicator and ticket vault full alarm. F. The ticket dispensers shall be equipped with a backlit LCD display. G. The ticket dispensers shall be equipped with an automatic daylight savings time adjustment. H. The ticket dispensers shall have the optional ability to allow field programming with a hand-held wireless remote unit. I. The ticket dispenser shall automatically encode entry date, entry time, entry lane, and serial number on each ticket in a machine readable format. Further, the above information shall be printed on each ticket in English text. J. If a patron backs out of an entrance lane, with or without a ticket, the ticket dispenser shall void or retract the ticket. Further, if the patron backs out with the ticket, the ticket dispenser shall send a signal to the barrier gate to close the gate arm. K. The ticket dispenser shall function both as a connected “on-line” or independent “off- line” unit in the event the control computer or communications are down and data shall be stored in a minimum 1,000 transaction buffer. L. Ticket dispensers shall be equipped with a two-way intercom for communication with the parking office. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 13 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO M. Approved products are: 1. 3M Ticket Dispenser, Austin, TX 2. AMG 2000 Series Ticket Dispenser, Amano McGann, Cincinnati, OH. 2.7 EXIT LANE VERIFIER A. The exit lane verifier shall be an automatic ticket reading and verification device. After the ticket is inserted in the exit verifier, it shall decode the ticket to determine if the ticket has been validated. If the ticket has been validated, the exit verifier shall signal the gate to open, code the ticket as processed and unusable for additional transactions, and deposit the ticket in a locked vault. B. If the proper fee has not been paid, the exit verifier shall prompt the patron to insert a credit card for payment of the parking fee. The exit verifier shall be capable of computing parking fees upon insertion of electronically codes magnetic stripe ticket. Following payment via the credit card, the card shall be returned to the patron and the exiting sequence shall be as above. C. The fee structure shall be initially set up by the parking control equipment supplier to the Owners requirements. The fee structure shall be locally programmable to facilitate change. D. The exit lane verifier shall communicate with the FMS for remote programming and monitoring of activities. E. Exit lane verifiers shall be equipped with a two-way intercom for communication with the parking office. F. Approved products are: 1. 3M Parking Exit Verifier, Austin, TX 2. AMG 4000 Series, Amano McGann, Cincinnati, OH 2.8 FULL SIGN AND COUNT/CONTROL SYSTEM A. Provide a pedestal- or gate-mounted exterior exposure "FULL" indicator sign at entrance lane as indicated on the Drawings. The "FULL" sign shall be controlled by the control computer. The letters shall be minimum four inches in height and shall be visible in bright sunlight. B. The count/control system monitors alarm conditions and lane activity. The count/control system also maintains both differential and total counts (by lane), of transient parkers, contract parkers, and facility totals, as well as differential and total counts of special event parkers, illegal entries and gate overrides (vehicles passing through the lane with the gate locked in the open position). STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 14 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO C. Provide a mode key switch in the office for control of the “FULL” sign. D. Input Device Monitoring: The Count/Control System shall monitor the following input signals: 1. Entrance Lanes a. Visitor Gate Vend (Ticket Pull) b. Tag and Card Access Gate Vend (Tag/Card Vend) c. Gate Up Cam (Auxiliary Switch) d. Gate Loop N.O. (Detector Output) e. Low Ticket Switch (Auxiliary Switch) f. Ticket Out Alert g. Gate Manual Switch (Double Pole Switch) h. Arming Loop Fail Alert i. Ticket Issue Loop Fail Alert j. Gate Reset Loop Fail Alert 2. Exit Lanes a. Card Access Gate Vend (Card Vend) b. Fee Computer Vend (Transaction Processed) c. Gate Up Cam (Auxiliary Switch) d. Gate Loop N.O. (Detector Output) e. Gate Manual Switch (Double Pole Switch) f. Arming Loop Fail Alert g. Gate Reset Loop Fail Alert E. Output Control Signals: The Count/Control System shall provide the following output signals: 1. Entrance Lanes a. Full Sign On/Off b. Gate Vend (Manual Open) c. Gate Override (Continuous Up) d. Gate Reset (Gate Down) e. Lane Closed (Dispenser On/Off/"Closed" Signs from Section 10440) 2. Exit Lanes a. Gate Vend (Manual Open) b. Gate Override (Continuous Up) c. Gate Reset (Gate Down) d. Lane Closed ("Closed" Signs from Section 10440) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 15 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO F. The Count/Control System shall provide the following counts 1. Visitor Differential Count (with holdback) Note: Turns on Facility Full Signs 2. Facility Total Differential Count 3. Contract Differential Count (Card Access) 4. Visitor Entrance and Exit Count Non-resettable (by lane) 5. Contract Entrance and Exit Count Non-resettable (by lane) 6. Total Vehicle Entrance and Exit Count Non-resettable (by lane) 7. Number of Vehicle through Entrance or Exit with Gate Locked in the Up Position, Non-resettable (by lane) 8. Event Mode Entrance Total Count by Lane G. The Count/Control System shall provide the following displays and miscellaneous functions on CRT screen 1. Current Time 2. Count System Status 3. Entrance and Exit Lane Status H. Hard Copy Functions 1. The Count/Control System shall output the following information to a system event log printer: a. Alarm Conditions b. Lane Control Functions c. Hourly Count Status of all Counters d. Interim Report of All Counters 2. If the event log printer is disconnected, the count control system shall buffer the above information for a minimum of 24 hours. Beyond 24 hours, stored informa- tion shall be deleted on a first-in-first-out basis. With or without the printer connected, all functions of the count control system shall continue to operate. 3. Cashier Tour of Duty Report shall be printed each time a cashier signs off the fee computer. 4. Special Event Reports shall print out a detailed accounting of all lane activity, as well as exceptional activity that occurs during a special event. I. Lane Status and Count System 1. The computer shall monitor each entry and exit lane for proper operation of equipment. The computer shall provide an audio alarm and display such failures as: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 16 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO a. Ticket Jam in Ticket Dispenser b. Entry Gate Stuck c. Detector Fail d. Exit Gate Stuck e. Low Ticket f. Lane Open/Closed g. Facility Full 2. The computer shall continually display total counts for transient, monthly, and total lane from each entry and exit lane. 3. The computer shall continually display differential counts of transient, contract and total facility and control the lock-out of the Ticket Dispensers by lane and lighting of Full signs. J. The count/control system shall interface between the on-line devices and the control computer, to provide a complete operating system. 2.9 EMBEDDED LOOPS AND VEHICLE DETECTORS A. The parking equipment detector loops shall be sawcut (maximum 3/4" depth) into the slab-on-grade. B. Directional logic detection shall be provided by a count system. Provide loops as required for directional detection and counting. C. Detectors shall be installed with the barrier gates. 2.10 INTERCOM SYSTEM A. Intercom shall be mounted on or included with ticket dispenser and exit verifier at entrance and exit lanes, and shall include "Press for Assistance" engraved signs and push button operation. Intercoms shall be capable of two-way communication with the dual master intercom stations. B. Master intercoms shall be located in the office and shall include call alert audio and light signal feature. Master intercoms shall be capable of handling up to 12 stations. C. Installation of intercoms shall be ADA compliant. D. Intercoms shall be programmable for two-way communication. E. Intercoms shall have Ethernet/VOIP capability. F. Intercom system shall have an automatic redial feature and roaming feature to connect to the next available telephone number from a host of telephone numbers programmed for assistance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 17 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO G. All wiring, routers, switches, and server components shall be included in the intercom system to allow for communication as indicated above. H. Acceptable manufacturers are: 1. Commmend Mahwah, NJ 2. Viking, Hudson, WI 3. Aiphone, Bellevue, WA. 2.11 MERCHANT VALIDATOR A. The merchant validator shall be an off-line, non-powered, and manually operated device that will provide free or discounted parking to transient patrons. B. To validate a ticket, the merchant shall insert the parking ticket into the device and manually depress the handle, which encode the merchant information onto the ticket for free or discounted parking. Each merchant validator will have a distinct hole pattern. C. The merchant validator shall also have an ink stamper that will print a number on the ticket corresponding to the hole pattern. I. Approved products are: 1. 3M Merchant Validator, Austin, TX 2. HR-200 Hand Encoder, Amano Cincinnati, Cincinnati, OH. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect setting surfaces, power wiring and conduit installation for booths and equipment and report immediately in writing to the Engineer, as required in the General Conditions, any conditions of Related Work which are unsuitable for proper execution of this Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install parking control system in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and the approved shop drawings. Also see Quality Assurance Requirements. B. Installation shall be by factory trained mechanics experienced in installation of equipment of this type. C. Provide and pull control wiring and make final connections of all wiring. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150 - 18 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND SYSTEM START-UP A. Adjust and tune the system as required to assure proper operation. After installation, test all functions of the Parking and Revenue Control Systems. B. Demonstrate the satisfactory electrical and functional performance of the entire parking control system by the following operations: 1. Ticket issuance and fee calculation by the exit verifier. 2. The successful use of a tag and card to enter and exit the facility with all information recorded. 3. The successful transfer of tag and card access data from the on-line equipment to the controller. 4. The generation of proper end of shift and daily audit and utilization reports. 5. The proper operation of the exit verifier for validated and non-validated tickets. 6. The proper operation of the count control system, including directional counting feature. 7. The proper operation of parking control equipment and "FULL" signs during simulated facility "FULL" conditions. 8. The proper operation of the intercoms. 9. Proper operation of the gate opening switches. C. Provide 16 hours of on-site instructions to Owner's personnel. Instructions shall include but not be limited to, programming of readers, use and operations of count system and differential counter, use and operation of ticket dispenser and gates, and the use and operation of the merchant validator and exit verifier. Coordinate schedule with Owner. D. The parking and revenue control systems will be considered acceptable after being 100 percent operational and after having performed satisfactorily for fourteen (14) continuous business days with no down time. END OF SECTION 11150 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 1 ©OZ Atchitecture Denver, CO SECTION 11160 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Dock bumpers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, accessories, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for loading dock equipment. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM 36/A 36M. 2.3 DOCK BUMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 2 ©OZ Atchitecture Denver, CO 1. Chalfant Dock Equipment. 2. Flexon, Inc. 3. Hugger Dock Equipment Company. 4. Kelley Company, Inc.; a United Dominion Company. 5. Pioneer Loading Dock Equipment. 6. Superior Bumper Products Inc. 7. Tennessee Mat Company, Inc. B. Laminated-Tread Bumpers: Fabricated from multiple, uniformly thick plies cut from fabric- reinforced rubber tires. Laminate plies under pressure on not less than two 3/4-inch diameter, steel supporting rods that are welded at one end to 1/4-inch thick, structural-steel end angle and secured with a nut and angle at the other end. Fabricate angles with predrilled anchor holes and sized to provide not less than 1 inch of tread plies extending beyond the face of closure angles. C. Anchorage Devices: Hot-dip galvanized steel anchor bolts, nuts, washers, bolts, sleeves, cast-in-place plates, and other anchorage devices as required to fasten bumpers securely in place and to suit installation type indicated. 2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish loading dock equipment after assembly and testing. C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M for iron and steel loading dock equipment. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M for iron and steel hardware for loading dock equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of loading dock equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate size and location of loading dock equipment indicated to be attached to or recessed into concrete or masonry, and furnish anchoring devices with templates, diagrams, and instructions for their installation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 3 ©OZ Atchitecture Denver, CO 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install loading dock equipment, including accessories as required for a complete installation. B. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock bumpers to face of loading dock in a manner that complies with requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, and position relative to top of platform and anchorage. 1. Bolted Attachment: Attach dock bumpers to preset anchor bolts embedded in concrete or to cast-in-place inserts or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel plates or angles. If preset anchor bolts, cast-in-place inserts, or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel plates or angles are not provided, attach dock bumpers by drilling and anchoring with expansion anchors and bolts. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust loading dock equipment for proper, safe, efficient operation. B. Restore marred, abraded surfaces to their original condition. 3.5 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE A. Laminated-Tread Dock Bumper : 1. Thickness: 6 inches. 2. Horizontal Style: 12 inches high by continuous across width of loading dock. END OF SECTION 11160 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 4 ©OZ Atchitecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cooking equipment including: a. Electric convection wall/ built- in ovens. b. Microwave wall/ built- in ovens. c. Gas cooktops. d. Electric cooktops. e. Exhaust hoods. f. Exterior gas BBQ grilles. 2. Refrigeration equipment including: a. Refrigerator/freezers. b. Wine reserves. c. Beverage Refrigerators. d. Icemakers. 3. Cleaning appliances including: a. Dishwashers. b. Dishdrawers. c. Unitized clothes washer and dryer. 4. Waste Disposers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for custom cabinets and countertops that receive residential appliances. 2. Division 15 Sections for water distribution piping connections to residential appliances; drainage and vent piping connections to residential appliances; gas pipe connections to residential appliances; and for kitchen sinks and waste disposers. 3. Division 16 Sections for services and connections to residential appliances. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics, dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance. B. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Data Sheets in the Project Manual. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comply with requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified by reference to product selections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: To greatest extent possible, obtain residential appliances through one source. 1. Provide products from same manufacturer for each type of appliance required, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific manufacturers and models unless otherwise indicated. B. Cooking Equipment 1. Exterior Gas BBQ Grille: a. WOLF Appliance Company, LLC, Model BBQ36BI. Heavy duty, 18 gauge stainless steel with classic stainless steel exterior finish. Push button battery powered grates. Cast iron, porcelain-coated grill grates. 115-volt rotisserie motor and infrared rear rotisserie burner. Two-piece stainless steel hood and handle. 2. Locations: Exterior Gas BBQ Grille at Unit B702, B602, and B701. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. END OF SECTION 11451 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12364 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 12364 - STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes stone countertops. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each variety of stone. 2. Stone accessories and other manufactured products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate locations of joints where occurring. Indicate splash locations and heights where occurring. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches square. Include three or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in completed Work. D. Qualification Data: For Fabricator (and Installer, if different entity). E. Sealant Compatibility Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. F. Maintenance Data: For stone countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate stone countertops similar to that indicated for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Approved by, or Fabricator of products. C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. D. Mockup: Build mockup to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12364 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Approved mockup may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports. B. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining separators and nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where stone countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating stone countertops without field measurements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific stone countertop selections. 2.2 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated. B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bonsal, W. R. Company. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12364 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. W. R. Bonsal Company. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. D. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone it is applied to. 1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, non- staining. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Stone Cleaner: Cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives. F. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Miracle Sealants Company; 511 Porous Plus Penetrating Sealer, or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.3 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function. B. Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an overall uniform appearance. C. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite." 2. For marble, comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone--Design Manual." 3. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 4. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments. 6. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12364 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 7. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each type of stone required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide matching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts. D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 2.4 STONE COUNTERTOPS A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual." B. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated . Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness. C. Edge Detail: As indicated. D. Splashes: Provide 3/4-inch- thick backsplashes and end splashes where indicated. 1. Height: 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. 2. Top-Edge Detail: As indicated. E. Joints: To the greatest extent possible, fabricate countertops without joints. Where joints are required, provide the following widths: 1. Grouted Joints: 1/16 inch in width. F. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Fixtures: Where undercounter fixtures are indicated, make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening. 2. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Where counter- mounted fixtures are indicated, prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items where indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12364 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates indicated to receive stone countertops and conditions under which stone countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar items to be used by stone countertop Installer for anchoring stone countertops. Furnish installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items. B. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. Allow stone to dry before installing. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16 inch in 48 inches. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/4 of nominal joint width. D. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units. E. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Where countertops are indicated to be spot- or rail- supported, install countertops by adhering to supports with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. B. Do not cut stone in field, unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12364 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Shim and adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. Install anchors and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone countertops in place. D. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints, where occurring, are of specified width. E. Install backsplashes and end splashes, where occurring, by adhering to wall with water- cleanable epoxy adhesive. Leave 1/16-inch gap between countertop and splash for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing. F. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective countertops. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Interior stone countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. D. Clean stone countertops not less than six days after completion of sealant installation and cure, using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone. END OF SECTION 12364 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12375 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 12375 – ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards: 1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). d. NSF International. B. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: 1. Firm that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations: Obtain materials and products from single source. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver components to project site in a timely manner, when areas are ready for installation. 1. Store components indoors prior to installation. 2. Deliver fabrications appropriately wrapped in protective materials. B. Protect stored material and fabrications from damage. C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 1. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Provide 10-year manufacturer’s warranty including colorfastness and material defects. 1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12375 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices and other components. 2. Show full-size details, edge details, thermoforming requirements, attachments, etc. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, waste receptacle and other items installed in surface. 5. Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions and coordination requirements with adjacent work. B. Samples: 1. For each color selected: a. Minimum 6-inch square sample in specified gloss. b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam. c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. 2. Sealant colors for selection. 3. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Maintenance data. 2. Warranty. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Site-verify dimensions. B. Coordinate installation with work of all trades. C. Environmental Conditions: 1. Maintain relative humidity planned for building occupants for 48 hours prior to and during installation. 2. Maintain ambient temperature between 65 Deg F and 75 Deg F for 48 hours prior to and during installation. 3. After installation, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. D. Jobsite Tooling: 1. Protect adjacent materials from damage caused by water-cooled tools. 2. Protect adjacent materials from dust contamination caused by tooling operations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12375 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific engineered quartz selections. 2.2 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS A. Material Description: 1. Homogeneous, uncoated, engineered stone matrix. a. Composition: 93% quartz and 7% resin binders and pigments. b. Free of fissures and cracks, and impervious to water, moisture, or bacteria. 2. Physical characteristics: a. Static coefficient of friction: 1.02 dry, 0.51 wet, tested to ASTM C1028. b. Water absorption: Maximum 0.03 percent, tested to ASTM C97. c. Compressive strength: Minimum 29,000 psi, tested to ASTM C170. d. Bond strength: Minimum 210 psi, tested to ASTM C482. e. Modulus of rupture: Minimum 6300 psi, tested to ASTM C99. f. Flexural strength: Minimum 5800 psi, tested to ASTM C880. g. Breaking strength: Minimum 480 lbf, tested to ASTM C648. h. Stain resistance: Not affected by 10 percent hydrochloric acid or 10 percent KOH, tested to ASTM C650. i. Thermal shock resistance: Pass 5 cycles, tested to ASTM C484. j. Abrasive index: 65-Ha = 25, tested to ASTM C241. k. Thermal expansion: 1.670 x 10-5 in/in/deg F, tested to ASTM C531. l. Deicing resistance: Rating of 0, tested to ASTM C672/C672M. m. Freeze/thaw resistance: 0 tiles at 15 cycles, tested to ASTM C1026. n. Flame spread rating: Class 1, tested to ASTM E84. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint Adhesive: 1. Manufacturer’s standard polyester or epoxy adhesive as required for inconspicuous, non-porous joints. B. Sealant (elastomeric): 1. Description: a. Mildew-resistant, FDA-compliant, NSF 51-compliant (food zone - any type), UL- listed silicone sealant in colors matching components. b. Polymers suspended in 100% Silicone. c. Specifically formulated for applications indicated, including wet areas. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12375 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO d. Elastomeric. e. Shore A Hardness: 30. f. Compatible with Gypsum wallboard, Painting, Quartz Surfacing Material, and other materials being sealed. 2. Colors: a. Match engineered quartz colors. 3. Basis-Of-Design Product: Latasil Tile and Stone Sealant, Laticrete International, Inc. C. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by engineered quartz manufacturer for application indicated. 2.4 SHOP FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Shop assembly 1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Fabricated per manufacturer’s instructions, the Dimension Stone Manual (by MIA) and using techniques consistent with fabrication of natural stone. 3. Fabricate with water-cooled tools with hardened tips. 4. Form joints between components using color-matched Joint Adhesive in an inconspicuous manner. a. Reinforce joint as recommended by manufacturer. b. Locate seams directly over supports; do not locate seams in the midspan region. 5. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated. a. Radius all inside corners of cutouts as large as but not less than 3/8-inch. b. Reinforce as required to avoid stress cracking. c. Tool edges and corners smooth and free of chips or nicks. 6. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. b. Smooth edges. c. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work. 7. Fabricate coved splashes where indicated. 8. Reinforce inside corners, narrow pieces, cantilevered overhangs, and stress points against breakage by laminating an additional thickness of engineered quartz on concealed face. 9. Laminate additional thicknesses of engineered quartz and tool edge profiles indicated. 10. Finishing: Ensure that completed pieces are uniformly finished according to engineered quartz schedule. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12375 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.5 FABRICATIONS A. Countertops: 1. Configurations: as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Thickness: Minimum 3/4-inch (unless otherwise indicated). 3. Provide plywood backing material as required for added strength. 4. Front overhang of Tops: 1-1/2-inch unless otherwise indicated. 5. Edge Treatments: As indicated on the drawings. 6. Polish exposed faces. 7. Color / Pattern / Finish: As indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify measurements, dimensions and drawing details before proceeding. 2. Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports for attached work. 3. Examine conditions under which work is to be installed. 4. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data. 2. Provide product in the largest pieces available. 3. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. a. Exposed joints/seams will not be allowed. 4. Reinforce field joints with engineered quartz strips extending a minimum of 1- to 2-inches on either side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top. 5. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 6. Rout radii and contours to template. 7. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports. 8. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. 9. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12375 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 10. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch sag, bow or other variation from a straight line. B. Countertops: 1. Install plumb, level, true and straight. a. Shim as necessary using concealed shims. 2. Adhere tops to base cabinets with dabs of a clear silicone sealant at 10- to 12-inches apart. 3. Attach top securely to base unit or support brackets in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. a. Supply additional wood supports, spaced no more than 12-inches apart or as otherwise required for adequate strength. b. Restrict unsupported overhangs to 12-inches. 4. Where tops are abutted by walls at both ends: All 1/8-inch expansion gaps at both ends for every of 10 foot countertop. a. Seal gaps with elastomeric sealant. C. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep components clean during installation. B. Protect finished surfaces from damage. C. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. 3.4 REPAIR A. Repair damaged work. B. Replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to Architect’s satisfaction. END OF SECTION 12375 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 12484 - FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roll-up mats in recessed frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slab depression grouting for recessed mats and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including the following: a. Door control devices. 2. Divisions between mat sections. 3. Perimeter floor moldings. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated. 1. Floor Mat: 12-inch square, assembled sections of floor mat. 2. Frame Members: 12-inch long Sample of each type and color. D. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Sections 302 and 303 in ICC A117.1. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to receive floor mats and frames. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific manufacturers and models. 2.2 CONCRETE FILL AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Provide concrete grout and fill equivalent in strength to cast-in-place concrete slabs for recessed mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than one-third fill thickness. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices. 1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins. C. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating. 2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Finish and Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standards unless otherwise indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat. 1. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure attachment of frames. 2. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level. 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12484 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO SECTION 13150 - SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 of Specification of Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide and install pool(s) and related equipment as shown on the drawings, and as required for an operational system. 2. Architectural requirements: Building and deck construction coordination, including finishes, sealants, etc. 3. Pool Piping and Pool Fittings: Re-circulation loop to and from pool(s) and related equipment room. 4. Plumbing connections: Fresh water connection to pool(s) (see drawings) and wastewater connection from filter as specified and shown on drawings. Re: plumbing drawings. 5. Electrical connections: All electrical equipment, hook-ups, wiring and conduit. Re: electrical drawings. 6. Mechanical connections: All air handling and related equipment and fixtures. Re: mechanical drawings. 7. Structural requirements: All block outs, pads, building and site structural improvements required for pool(s) construction. Re: structural and civil drawings. 8. Landscaping: Re: landscape drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Earthwork and Excavation: Division 2 Sections. 2. Concrete Work: Division 3 Sections. 3. Tile Installation: Division 9 Sections. 4. Mechanical and Plumbing: Division 15 Sections. 5. Electrical: Division 16 Sections. C. Related Electrical Work for Pool (Re: Division 16): 1. All electrical connections shall be by the Electrical Contractor. The Pool Contractor shall provide the filter pumps, motors, solenoids, and pre-wired control assemblies as called for on plan and as required by pool systems equipment manufacturer. The Electrical Contractor shall install and wire all electrical equipment furnished by the Pool Contractor and shall provide all disconnect switches, emergency-off switches, panels, bonding, grounding, conduit and starters or relays if required, as indicated or required by Codes. The STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO Electrical Contractor shall provide pool shell grounding and bonding per NEC Article 680. 2. Provide and install all power and control wiring as indicated by schematic details of Pool Electrical Drawings and Electrical Coordination Table. 3. All Electrical Disconnects, Switches, Magnetic Starters, Stop-Start Stations, Receptacles and relays shall be furnished by Division 16 work and coordinated with the Pool Contractors work. Furnish and install all conduit, wiring for disconnects, magnetic starters, stop-start stations, relays, controls, as required, and including the following pump motors, etc.: 4. Furnish and install all outlets and service needed for the chemical feed area exhaust fans, chlorine and chemical feed pumps, automatic water level controls & solenoid valve, water chemical analyzer equipment (including telephone terminals by code - main desk and two telephone lines to the mechanical room) and related controlled pumps, flow switches, as well as adequate lighting in the equipment room and related spaces in accordance with the specifications and as shown on the drawings. Interlock all chemical feed equipment as shown on the electrical control schematic. 5. Bond and ground all pool equipment, anchors, reinforcing, etc. as required by Article 680 of the National Electrical Code, as described in Division 16. 6. Pool contractor to provide lights and electrical contractor to provide conduit and pull light to power connections. 7. Assist Pool Contractor at time of start-up. D. Related Mechanical Work for Pools (Re: Division 15): 1. All domestic fresh water piping connections from backflow preventer to the pool mechanical room. 2. Furnish and install RPZ backflow preventer and isolation valves for domestic fresh water supply. 3. All gas piping. 4. Furnish and install hose bibs and floor drains in mechanical rooms and in deck areas as shown in drawings. 5. Furnish and install the filter backwash standpipes and line beyond air-gap to waste. 6. Furnish and install fresh water and waste water plumbing to mechanical room. 7. Heat exchangers provided by Mechanical Contractor. Pool Contractor shall stub out 3ft of pool piping with maintenance valves. Mechanical Contractor shall install gas, fan, ducting and venting piping, or other items to complete the heat exchanger system. 8. Mechanical Contractor shall provide and install all combustion air, ventilation and flues as required for air handling related to equipment room environment. 9. Furnish and install required drinking fountain(s) as required by code. 10. Assist Pool Contractor at time of heat exchanger start-up. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish and Install: 1. Materials and labor necessary for construction of pool(s) complete with all equipment as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. Drawings and specifications are to be considered as meeting minimum requirements, which may change because of local code and health STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO department compliances. Pool Contractor is responsible to ensure bid includes all requirements necessary to meet all local codes, conditions and obtain permits required. 2. Provide systems of fully compatible components, construction techniques and code compliant assemblies required for complete and operable systems for pool(s). 3. Contractor shall submit a written list of all variations and deviations found that differ between drawings and specification from local code requirements or incomplete assemblies before bid date. All variations must be approved by Aquatic Designer and the local and state health departments prior to commencing any work. 4. Alternates to be listed as “Add Alternates” for the project and listed in an itemized list. a. Salt to chlorine generation for each pool shown. List shall be in lieu of liquid chlorine system for each pool. b. Ultra violet to be listed as an “Add Alternate” to the indoor pool only. c. Provide price for cover for indoor pool. B. Work Included (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Layout of pool(s): Benchmark and exact location supplied by General Contractor. It is the intent of this Section to place the responsibility for the construction of the pool(s) under one vested Contractor. The Contractor shall actually do at least the work noted below and shall coordinate and approve all work relating to the pool(s), pool equipment, controls and systems. Under this Section the Contractor shall provide but is not necessarily limited to: 2. Site preparation and excavation required for new pools and whirlpools. 3. The pool(s) shall be as shown on the drawings, either pneumatically-applied concrete, or cast in place concrete as specified by the Architect and Aquatic Designer with the indicated interior finish and ceramic tile trim. a. Shop drawings for steel reinforcement, wall and floor construction shall be submitted. The design of the structure shall not be less than 8" wall or floor thickness in areas with a water depth of 5 feet or less. Where freestanding walls in the pool are dimensioned, they shall be that minimum dimension. The design shall be reviewed and accepted by the Architect and Aquatic Designer. b. The Contractor shall be experienced in concrete pool construction in commercial grade projects meeting the qualifications listed in Section 1.4. c. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all costs related to special soil preparation, stabilization, flash coats (if required), forming, backfill and drainage around the pool for the special requirements of the pneumatically- applied construction method so that the structural design and construction results in a complete system without any additional costs to the Owner. Any over-excavation and placement of stone or compacted engineered fill required elsewhere by the documents for building structures shall also apply to the pool(s) and buried piping. WISHA/OSHA regulations should be adhered to. 4. General contractor to prepare the basins for the pool contractor to come in and form pool to be shot. All site prep shall be by the general contractor but it shall be coordinated with the pool contractor to run piping and layout equipment. See STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO Section 02200. Contractor shall review the site conditions to verify basin required under this contract. 5. General Contractor shall install an under drain and waterproof system in basin before beginning pool structure and piping work. 6. Construct pool structure(s) and install same, including jets, basins, reinforcement steel, inserts, and fittings and piping as shown on the drawings. Furnish and install all tile and interior finishes as shown on the drawings and approved by the Aquatic Designer. 7. Provide any pool structure drainage around the pool(s) shown on the structural drawings. Backfill and compact fill around pool structure(s), piping trenches and excavations required by this work. See Section 02200. 8. Provide all housekeeping pads, hangers, pipe seals through sleeves, anchorage and supports for pool piping and equipment. Provide pipe sleeves and install sleeves in forms of other contractors at the proper locations. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required. 9. Furnish and install filtration system for each pool and whirlpool, including re- circulation pumps and water treatment equipment, flow meters, including all gauges and valves. Install all piping and valves as shown on drawings and gauges necessary to provide a complete and working system. 10. Furnish and install tap off of pool main line with maintenance valves for heat exchanger contractor. Heat exchanger contractor to supply locations of sensor wells and pool contractor to install well on pool main line as needed. 11. Furnish, layout and install all anchors, sockets, inserts, and rail goods included in this Section. Install and adjust all equipment. 12. Furnish and install pool finish(es) as shown on drawings and listed in schedules including all ceramic tile trims and edging as required. Protect all tile surfaces from concrete splash or damage until accepted by Owner. 13. Furnish and install ceramic tile depth markings on pool(s). Install tile "No Diving” and other warning signage as shown on the plans. 14. Furnish and install all swimming equipment including: anchors, and other deck equipment described herein or as listed in the equipment schedule on the drawings. 15. Furnish and install anchors for the handicap chair lift on pool(s) deck. Aquatic Designer must approve chair lift manufacturer. Coordinate MEP Contractors as required to facilitate a complete and working system. 16. Furnish and install all sanitization chlorine systems or alternate with salt to chlorine system with cal-hypo PPG backup, and any supplemental treatment systems as shown on the drawings and listed in the schedules, including all necessary piping to the re-circulation systems. 17. Furnish and install all pool equipment control systems and instrumentation required for an operational system, including sensors, remote switches, relays, control and coaxial wiring and appurtenances. 18. Perform all work in accordance with requirements of Division 16. Coordinate electrical connections as required relating to the automatic water level control systems, chemical controllers, features control, remote control of equipment and lighting and system control interlocking with Electrical Contractor. 19. Furnish and install pool(s) stairs, steps, railings, and all access equipment. 20. Furnish all maintenance and safety equipment as listed on documents and/or required by code. 21. Furnish and install automatic fill systems and fill piping for the pool(s), from water STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO service entrance as provided by Division 15 Contractor. Fresh water piping, including backflow preventer, to be installed under Division 15 Contractor section of the specification. 22. Furnish and install wet niche and underwater light(s) for pool(s) as shown on the drawings and listed in the schedules. 23. Start, test, calibrate and adjust all equipment, chemical feed equipment, vacuum cleaning equipment and instruct Owner's representative in the operation and maintenance of the system. Furnish Owner with complete O & M Manuals. 24. Furnish and install all chlorine/bromine-resistant sealant joints inside all pools or within areas of pools or deck that are the Pool Contractor's responsibility, including backer rods, primers and accessories required. 25. After the water test filling and initial water filling upon completion by the Owner, should any repairs, continuing work, etc. require drainage or partial drainage of the pool(s) systems, for any reason related to his work, the Contractor shall be responsible for any subsequent refilling, without cost to the Owner, and shall complete the project with the pool system full of water, complete in every way, and in full operation. 26. The Contractor shall make available on call the services of a competent and experienced field engineer to inspect the completed installation, adjust the automatic controls for the proper set point, place the system in operation and give operation instructions to its care and use. 27. Obtain final acceptance by jurisdictional health department. 28. State and Local Department of Public Health construction permit - by Pool Contractor. 29. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain all necessary barricades, signs, lights and flares for pool construction to protect workmen and the public. 30. The Contractor shall provide for the storage of equipment and materials in excess of those allowed on site by the General Contractor. 31. The Contractor shall provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing utilities, sewers and building foundations. 33. Provide all pool and chemical signage on deck and in mechanical room as mentioned on pool application submittal and as required by code. 34. Provide pool covers for each pool sizes shown and list them as an add alternate for each pool and for the whirlpools. The covers are base bid. 35. Provide swim-jet system to pool with finishes as shown. All systems must be supplied by pool contractor and must complete the working system to the elements of the pools. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Criteria: Certain sections of the Specifications contain performance criteria rather than product descriptions. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to insure that all criteria are satisfied and the burden of proof of conformance shall rest with the Contractor. The Aquatic Designer shall require complete calculations, past performance records and, if required, inspection trips of similar facilities to substantiate conformance and the Contractor is cautioned that he will be required to provide a finished product meeting all stated criteria and meeting or exceeding Department of Public Health requirements. B. Pool Contractor Qualifications: Must have had at least (5) years experience in the construction of the type of swimming pool herein specified and must have successfully completed a minimum of 6 pools of this type, each with a water surface area not less STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO than is to be constructed in this project. If necessary, investigator will determine if pools have been successfully completed and operational for a minimum of two years. Pool Contractor shall furnish complete evidence that they have facilities, equipment, personnel and schedule abilities to complete all phases of this Section. C. Pre-Qualified Pool Contractors: Firm Name Contact Telephone Monarch Pools John Grimes 303-757-5481 Front Range Pools Duane Harpe 719-226-5014 High Country Pools Tyler Westerman 970-226-2657 Associated Pools, Inc. David Volk 701-258-6012 Larry Benz 303-941-0046 The Pool Company, Inc Matt Ruzicka 406-396-3392 Aquality Construction Joe Dempsey 303-469-2229 D. Reference Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. National Spa and Pool Institute (NSPI): a. Minimum Standard for Public Swimming Pools. b. Minimum Standard for Public Whirlpools. 2. All local building and health codes. 3. National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 680. 4. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): Seal of approval program. 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Specifications referenced herein. 6. Department of Public Health. 7. City and County Building Codes. 8. Gunite Contractors Association (CGA): Technical Publication. 9. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 1.5 TESTING/FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: The Pool Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the following tests are taken: B. Concrete: Tests to measure slump entrained air content and compressive strength shall be conducted by independent testing laboratory. Refer to Section 01400. 1. Compressive Strength Tests: Provide minimum of 3 test cylinders per 50 cubic yards, not from same sample or fraction thereof for each class of concrete poured each day. Comply with ACI-318, Sub-section 4.3 (samples secured - ASTM C172, cylinders prepared and cured - ASTM C31, and tested - ASTM C39). Identify samples, moist cure at 70º F for five days and ship samples to laboratory. 2. Slump and Air Content Tests: Perform on concrete from same batch as sampled for strength tests and whenever there is consistency of concrete. Slump tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C143. Air content tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C231. If measured slump or air content falls outside specified limits, check shall be made immediately on another portion of same sample. In event second failure, concrete shall not be used in work. 3. Average of any three consecutive strength tests for each class of concrete, shall STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO be equal to or greater than specified strength, and no individual test shall fall more than 500 psi below specified strength. 4. When test results are below specified requirements or when tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, Aquatic Designer may require additional tests in accordance with ACI-318, Subsection 4.3. C. Pool Plumbing: Contractor shall be responsible for discovering leaks and making necessary repairs. 1. Pressure piping: After the piece is laid, the joints completed, and the trench partially backfilled leaving joints exposed for examination, subject new line to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 15 pounds per square inch. Joints shall remain watertight under this pressure for a period of 24 hours. All air must be expelled from pipes prior to testing. 2. Gravity lines: A water test shall be applied to all gravity drain piping system, either in there entirety or in sections. All openings shall be tightly plugged and each system filled with water and tested with at least a 10-foot head of water. Water shall be kept in the testing portion for at least 15 minutes before the inspection starts. System shall be watertight at all joints. 3. Leaks shall be repaired and tested repeatedly until leakage or infiltration is eliminated. D. Water Treatment: Furnish a sufficient supply of needed chemicals to meet the following guidelines for all aquatic components. 1. Correctly balance water at initial fill and maintain balance until acceptance by Owner. 2. Operational sanitation and pH chemicals from initial fill until acceptance by Owner. 3. Provide a minimum of one month of total operational chemicals for use after acceptance by Owner. E. Obtain a chemical analysis of the source/pool make-up water supply and submit to Aquatic Designer. Including the following: 1. Total alkalinity/PPM. 2. Calcium hardness/PPM. 3. Chlorine/PPM. 4. pH. 5. Iron. 6. Copper. 7. Other Metal. 8. Phosphates. F. Treat and balance pool water prior to turnover of pool to the Owner (using chemicals provided by Pool Contractor). G. Pool Water: Balance to establish a total alkalinity level of 80-100 PPM and calcium hardness level of 150-300 PPM. H. Consult with Aquatic Designer for special waters to establish balance levels. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 1.6 BONDING AND GROUNDING A. General: Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 of Specification of Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Specification Sections: 1. Concrete Work: Division 3 Sections. 2. Electrical: Division 15 Sections. C. Summary of Work 1. Pool Contractor must coordinate the bonding and grounding of all aquatic components composed of metals. All connections must be made by the electrical contractor with the help of the Pool Contractor. Work is including but not limited to: a. Aquatic structure(s), including, but not limited to, concrete, reinforcement steel, rail inserts, hardware, metal pipe, heaters or exchangers, equipment, and other bondable metals in the pool structure and pool system. b. Provide water bonds or sacrificial anodes as required by manufacturer and for metal play features or other components that are metal in the pool and pool system. c. Provide conductivity testing for bonding of the pool. An independent company shall provide a review and report of the bonding and grounding connections showing the pool is completely bonded. D. Description of Work 1. Work Includes (but is not necessarily limited to): a. Pool contractor is responsible for coordinating the bonding or grounding of the pool system, shell, and equipment. They must instruct the Electrical Contractor which items need to be bonded or grounded. The Electrical Contractor will be responsible for connecting those items as required and follow NEC 680. Verify that all bonding and grounding work has been properly completed and tested. b. Pool Contractor to coordinate with General and Electrical Contractor for all the work that needs to be coordinated and connected. c. Verify that any prior bonding of the shell or surrounding metals are tested for conductivity before backfilling or placing any deck or concrete. The General contractor must give care so that the wires will not be cut while the deck is being constructed or poured. 2. Provide conductivity testing for the bonded items to ensure that all the wires are still complete and connected. If there a bonding wire that has been cut, the responsible party must repair the connection that was damaged and then retest for conductivity. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 3. It is recommended to run multiple bonding wires back to the equipment room, connected to the shell per NEC 680, from the shell area to ensure that the bonding loops are still complete. 4. It is also recommended to provide a separate bonding rod in the ground specifically for the pool to ensure the pool is bonded and it can be seen. DO NOT cover the bonding rod with concrete all connections must be visible at the rod. 5. Acquire all necessary approvals from building departments and Engineers prior to applying concrete, coordinate with General and Electrical Contractor. 6. Furnish and install all necessary embedment’s, connection accessories, etc. as per building officials or code. 7. After filling the pools, should any repairs, continuing work, etc. require drainage or partial drainage of the pool(s) systems, for any reason related to his work, the Contractor shall be responsible for any subsequent refilling without cost to the Owner, and shall complete the project with the pool system full of water, complete in every way, and in full operation. E. Quality Assurance 1. Refer to section 1.4 of this specification. F. Submittals & Shop Drawings 1. Refer to section 1.6 of this specification. . G. Conductivity Field Testing 1. The Pool Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the following tests are taken by an independent contractor and provide a report on the findings of the test: a. Test for conductivity of pool shell reinforcing: b. After bonding is complete to all metal parts of the shell prior to deck being constructed. c. Prior to deck concrete being poured d. After deck concrete is poured. e. Prior to installing the pool equipment. f. After installing the pool equipment. g. After pool is filled and balanced. H. Delivery, Storage and Handling 1. Refer to section 1.8 of this specification. I. Water Bonds and Sacrificial Anodes 1. Water bonds may be used inline of the water feature or equipment and installed per the instructions of the manufacturer. The anodes must provide a method of viewing the sacrificial metal in the anode tee to determine whether the metal has to be replaced. The copper wire coming from the tee must be connected to the bonding loop of the pool. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO J. Bonding Lugs 1. Shall conform to NEC 680 and must be connected per the instructions of the NEC or the manufacturer of the lug. K. Bonding Wire 1. Shall conform to NEC 680 and must be a minimum of a new #8 copper wire or as noted in the NEC. L. Protection 1. Pool Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all wire, structures, etc. from being cut. 2. Any damaged wire caused by application of concrete shall be repaired at the Pool Contractor’s or responsible party’s expense. 3. Remove and discard of all forms and protection material once all bonding is complete. M. Testing at Shotcrete or Gunite Concrete Work 1. Bonding must be complete prior to concrete being placed and it must be conductivity tested to ensure bonding. 2. Refer to Section 1.6, G for times for when to test. N. Warranty 1. The Pool Contractor shall guarantee that all bonding is complete and if not and the result affects the shell, equipment, or any other item of the pool, it will be replaced at the expense of the Pool Contractor or the responsible party that did not complete this work outlined in the specification. O. Clean up and Protection 1. After work of this section has been completed, clean up work area and remove all equipment, excess materials, and debris. Protect pool bonding from damage until time of final completion. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data: 1. Provide Manufacturer's/Installer's written installation instruction. The Contractor shall submit for approval to the Aquatic Designer complete lists, including descriptions, catalog cuts, etc., and where applicable dimensioned shop drawings of all material. Fixtures and equipment to be furnished and installed under this specification. Submittals shall adequately and completely describe the equipment, including where necessary or requested complete construction and installation dimensions, complete capacity and performance data, all accessories STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO and auxiliary equipment, and all pertinent details of manufacture. Shop drawings for equipment shall be obtained before proceeding with fabrication. Shop drawings shall not be "doctored" reproducibles of Aquatic Designer’s Drawings. 2. Hydraulic analysis calculations and total dynamic head (TDH) for each pool and whirlpool circulation system for equipment other than specified. 3. Pumps: Pump performance curves indicating GPM vs. TDH maximum efficiency point, and maximum and draw, together with current characteristics and service factor of motor. C. Certificates: 1. Provide from local authorities a copy of the construction permit indicating pool construction and performance comply with requirements of respective authorities. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as required by Parts A and B of this Section. E. Samples: Submit paint, grating, tile samples and other samples of materials with color options, finishes, and trim as may be requested by the Aquatic Designer. F. Valve Charts: Submit two (2) copies of valve charts for each piping system, consisting of Schematic Drawings, piping layouts showing and identifying each valve and describing its function model, location, type, size, and type of service. G. Concrete Design Mix: Furnish design mix for gunite or shotcrete with certified laboratory test results indicating compliance with specified compressive strength requirements. H. Pool Finishes: 1. Interior Finish: Submit product shop drawings for approval before ordering finish. Include the following: a. Plan, elevations, and section of pool shell(s) and deck. b. Plans of all finishes. I. Design Data: Prior to pool fabrication submit (6) complete sets of thoroughly checked shop drawings and product data required to fabricate and assemble all pool systems in three ring binders, tabbed with reference to sections outlined as follows. Submit all completed copies at one time. Complete product data indexed, tabbed and referenced to specification coverings. 1. Filtration systems and controls; pumps, filters, filter manifold, media and controls. Individualize for each section. 2. Chemical feed systems and controls including; monitor/controller, sanitizer feeder, sample stream piping and pH system, shall be provided by Chemical Control Contractor. 3. Re-circulation system including; piping, valves, fittings, gauges and flow meters. 4. Shell equipment including; skimmers, main drain with grate sizes, inlets, equalizers, light fixtures, water stops and inserts. 5. Deck equipment including; railings, grab rails, steps, accessories and anchors. 6. Cleaning, maintenance and safety equipment. 7. Specialty equipment including water wall feature, swim gym, and handicap lifts STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO with anchors and water level controller. 8. Interior finish materials. 9. Concrete design mix and engineering data. 10. Shop drawings at appropriate scale illustrating the fabrication and installation. 11. Reinforcing steel. 12. Mechanical equipment room layout and piping penetrations. 13. Plumbing layout and depths, pipe penetrations through building wall. J. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Owner (4) copies. See instruction of Owner's personal Section 3. K. Product Record Documents: Comply with Division 1. Furnish as built drawings for changes from shop drawings and buried plumbing. L. Note: Any change or deviation from what is shown on documents will be required to be submitted for acceptance from the Pool Contractor. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATIONS OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Inspection: 1. Examine areas for conditions under which work is to be performed. 2. Report in writing to Owners representative all conditions contrary to those shown on drawings or specified herein and all other conditions that will affect satisfactory execution of work, such as improperly constructed substrates or adjoining work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Field Measurements: The drawings accompanying this specification are essentially diagrammatic in nature and show the general arrangement of all equipment, piping, ductwork, services, etc. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to show all offsets, fittings and accessories, which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions of all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing all fittings, pipe and accessories that may be required to meet such conditions. Where conditions necessitate a rearrangement, the Contractor shall obtain the Aquatic Designer’s approval. C. Starting Work: Constitutes acceptance of the conditions under which work is to be performed. After such acceptance this Contractor shall at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work resulting from such unsatisfactory conditions. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials and equipment to the job site in original packages fully identified, with manufacturer's label. Store off ground and protect from weather with a suitable covering. B. Deliver cementitious material to site in manufacturer's standard packages. Immediately upon delivery to work site, store in waterproof sheds, and the Contractor shall provide STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 13 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO sheds required. No cementitious or other material that has become caked or hardened will be permitted in the work. C. Protect plastic pipe from exposure to chemicals (aromatic hydrocarbons, halogenated hydrocarbons and other esters and ketones) that might attack the material. Protect all pipes from mechanical damage and long exposure to sunlight during storage. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide one (1) year warranty covering all pool workmanship, materials, and equipment. Refer to division 1 of the Specifications for additional requirements. B. Special Project Warranty on Concrete Structure: The Pool Contractor shall guarantee for five (5) years repair of the concrete shell structure(s) covering any defects, cracks, and/or leaking in the shell(s) caused by defective workmanship or material. C. All standard manufacturer's warranties shall apply to all equipment and products provided by the Contractor. D. Ceramic tile and interior pool finish shall be warranted for defects in material and installation for a period of 2 years from acceptance by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. Portland cement: ASTM C-150, Type I or II. B. Sand: Clean, hard, sharp particles, well graded within the following limits, and containing no more than 5% moisture: SIEVE SIZE PERCENT BY WEIGHT PASSING THROUGH 3/8" screen 100% No. 4 mesh 98 - 100% No. 8 mesh 70 - 95% No. 16 mesh 60 - 85% No. 30 mesh 45 - 65% No. 50 mesh 15 - 35% No. 100 mesh 0 - 5% C. Gunite and Shotcrete: 1. Shall conform to GCA publications G-84 for materials and mixes. 2. Gunite and shotcrete shall have minimum 4,000 psi compressive strength in 28 days minimum. 3. Submit copies of concrete testing results to Aquatic Designer two weeks prior to pour. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete materials and placement. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 14 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO E. References: 1. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 1999. 2. CI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 1988. 3. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; 1992 (Re-approved 1997). 4. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1999. 5. TM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 1998a. 6. ASTM C 666 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing; 1997. 7. ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1998a. 8. COE CRD-C 48 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992. 9. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2000a. F. Submittals: 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data sheet, for specified products. 3. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. a. Testing Agency: Independent laboratory meeting the requirements of ASTM E329 and certified by the United States Bureau of Standards, Army Corp of Engineers, and American Concrete Institute. 4. Certificates: Product certificates notarized by manufacturer certifying that: a. Materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical requirements. b. Installer is qualified and approved by manufacturer. 5. Manufacturer's installation instructions. G. Quality Assurance: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 10 years experience manufacturing crystalline waterproofing of the type when specified. 2. Concrete Batch Operator Qualifications: Certified by Manufacturer for mixing and use of Crystalline Waterproofing Admixture Products when specified. 3. Pre-Construction Meeting: Prior to installation, conduct a meeting with the concrete installer, installers of adjacent work and work penetrating concrete, and admixture waterproofing manufacturer's representative to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements; notify the Owner and Architect/Engineer at least one week in advance of meeting. H. Delivery, Storage, and Handling: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Store materials in a dry area on pallets to protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 15 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO J. Concrete Mixing and Placing: 1. Comply with requirements of Section 03300. 2. Hot weather comply with ACI 305R; Cold weather comply with ACI 306R. 3. Consult Manufacturer for mixing instructions, set times and retardation applications. K. Construction Joints: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions, including product data, technical bulletins, catalog installation instructions, and product packaging labels. 2. Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, 3. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Wet cold joint surface and saturate with clean water to enhance the crystalline formation process within concrete; remove excess surface water before application of slurry coat. 5. Apply slurry coat if needed uniformly with semi-stiff bristle brush or spray under conditions and application rate recommended by manufacturer. 6. Place subsequent pour while slurry coat is still green, but after reaching initial set. L. Field Quality Control: 1. Do not cover admixture treated concrete with other construction until it has been observed by Manufacturer's field representative and Architect/Engineer. 2. After removal of forms, repair honeycombing, rock pockets, tie holes, faulty construction joints, cold joints, and cracks using waterproofing admixture Manufacturer's products and recommended procedures. 3. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide Manufacturer's field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of concrete batching and product installation in accordance with Manufacturer's and Engineer’s instructions. M. Cleaning and Protection: 1. Protect installed concrete from damage during construction. 2. Do not apply paint or other coatings for at least 21 days; before applying coatings neutralize waterproofed surface as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL A. Steel Reinforcing: Use deformed bars of sizes shown on the drawings conforming ASTM A 615 Grade 60. B. Steel Reinforcing Placement: 1. Placing reinforcing steel in conformance with the information on the Contract Drawings and CRSI Recommended Minimum length of splices shall be as shown STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 16 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO in table on Contract Drawings. Tie splices with 18-gauge annealed wire as specified in the referenced CRSI standard. 2. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual Standard Practice for Detailed Reinforced Concrete Structures." Show bar schedules, stirrup whirlpool, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements and assemblies, as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement. 2.3 PLASTIC WATERSTOP A. Center bulb type as shown on Drawings, extruded from an elastomeric plastic compound. The size shall be as shown. B. Manufacturers and suppliers who have provided samples meeting the specified geometry and who have the specified water stop readily available are listed below. Other products shall not be used without prior review and acceptance by the Aquatic Designer: C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Vulcan Products, Inc., Construction Materials Division, No. 1 Irondale Park, P.O. Box 101269, Birmingham, Alabama 35210, Phone: (205) 956-2000 or (800) 368- 8522; Type 8069 for 6-inch by 3/8 inch, and Type 8070 for 9-inch by 3/8-inch. 2. Vinylex Corporation, 2636 Byington-Solway Road, Knoxville, Tennessee 37921- 0887, Phone: (615) 690-2211 or Fax (615) 691-6273; Catalog No. RB6-38H for the 6-inch by 3/8-inch and Catalog No. RB9-38H for the 9-inch by 3/8-inch. 3. Greenstreak Plastic Products, Box 7139, St. Louis, Missouri 63177, Phone: (314) 225-9440 or Fax (314) 225-9854. These products are also distributed by the Burke Company, San Mateo, California. Style 732 for the 6-inch by 3/8-inch and Style 735 for the 9-inch by 3/8-inch. 2.4 GASKET WATERSTOP A. As shown on drawings, is a soft, pliable yet durable bar that when exposed to water seals, locks out water, and prevents migration. Use as a water stop in cold and control joints and where concrete abuts another surface such as pipe penetrations and other shell penetrations. B. Manufacturers and Suppliers who have provided samples meeting the specifications and are readily available are listed below: 1. American Colloid Company, Buildings Materials Group, 1500 West Shire Drive, Arlington Heights, IL 60004. Phone: (708) 392-4600. Type water stop - RX and Volclay WB-adhesive. 2. Absolute Waterproofing Systems, Inc. (AWS), 200 Railroad Avenue, Greenwich, CT 06830. Phone: (203) 622-7333. Type Duroseal gasket water stop, Duroseal paste. 3. Henry Company, Synko Flex Products, 1277 Boyles, Houston, TX 77020. Phone: (713) 963-9403. Type Synko-flex preformed plastic adhesive water stop. 2.5 CONSTRUCTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 17 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO A. Locate as shown on the drawings or as approved in writing by the Architect and Aquatic Designer. All joints require two-part polysulfide caulk. B. Pre-molded expansion joint filler shall be of sufficient width to completely fill the joint. Filler shall be accurately cut to butt tightly against the water stop and the side forms. Joint filler must comply with ASTM D 1752. C. Concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated along the joint form to produce a dense, smooth surface. Surface irregularities along the joint sealant cavity, due to improper concrete consolidation or faulty form removal, shall be repaired with an approved compound compatible with the joint sealant in a manner that is satisfactory to the sealant manufacturer. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. W.R. Grace Company, Cambridge, Massachusetts 2. W.R. Meadow, Inc. Elgin, Illinois. 2.6 GUN GRADE SEALANTS A. Prior to installation of the joint sealant, the joint cavity shall be cleaned by sandblasting or power wire brushing. Install bond breaker tape per manufacturer's instructions. B. After the joints have been prepared as described above, the joint sealant shall be applied. The primer, if required, and joint sealant shall be applied only with the equipment and methods recommended by the joint sealant manufacturer. C. Submerged Sealants: Two-part Water Immersion Polysulfide Sealant. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Sika Products and Vulkem Industries. 2.7 FILTRATION SYSTEM A. General: 1. The filter system to be furnished under this Section shall the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the fabrication of filters for at least ten years. The filters shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal of approval, Standard #50 for sand type filters. 2. As assurance that each item of apparatus is properly sized to perform in conjunction with each other, main items of equipment are described in general in these specifications. Additional information can be found on the engineering drawings accompanying these specifications. B. Guarantee: The Equipment Supplier shall guarantee that the equipment to be furnished provides the surface area and flow capacities called for on the plans, and that the various parts are designed to operate correctly and in conjunction with each other, and that if the installation is made in accordance with his drawings and operated in accordance with his instructions, the system will perform the prescribed functions correctly, the water entering the pool will be clear, bright, free from suspended matter STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 18 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO visible to the unaided eye, will not produce any toxic effect or impart undesirable taste, odors or colors, and will be sanitary to the satisfaction of all authorities having jurisdiction. C. Drawings and Instructions: 1. Provide detailed shop drawings of the items of equipment being provided, indicating the dimensions, materials and characteristics of the filter shells, interior and exterior filter manifolds, nozzle system and filter media. Aquatic Designer approval is required prior to ordering. 2. Provide a typed sheet of "Operating Instructions", embracing the operation functions and recurring maintenance processes involved in connection with the complete filtration system. D. Supervision: An authorized representative of the Equipment Supplier shall provide the supervisory services of an Installation Engineer for at least one (1) day to fully instruct designated personnel in the operation, care and maintenance of the filter system. E. Filter System: 1. The filter system specified under this section shall be of a pressurized design and shall consist of Noncorrosive Hi-Rate Permanent Media Filter. 2. The filter system shall require filter media and shall have a maximum flow of 15 U.S. gallons/minute (10.2 liters/second) per square foot (square meter) of filter area. 3. The filter system shall consist of filter tank(s), internal overhead distribution system, internal lower collection system, gauge panel with 2-60 PSIG (400 kPa ) gauges, internal automatic air relief, external air relief with a manually adjusted shut off valve, integrally molded media / manhole access, integrally molded drain/dump port, FRP support, all of which shall be fabricated in a fully assembled state by the original equipment manufacturer, then disassembled for shipping to prevent damage to internal parts or face piping. 4. Filter backwash system shall be semi-automatic for individual tank backwash as base bid. F. Filter Tank: 1. Filter tanks shall pass a hydrostatic pressure test of 75 PSIG (777kPa), and shall comply with all governing Pressure Vessel Code requirements, in addition to NSF standards. 2. An integrally molded combination media dump port and drain complete with an ABS media retainer shall be located in the filter tank(s) body. 3. Influent and effluent connections shall be integrally molded. 4. Filter tanks shall be tested in compliance to ANSI/NSF Sanitation Standard 50- 1992 by a government certified and recognized testing agency. 5. Tanks shall be sized and located as shown on drawings. G. Internal Distribution/Collection System: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 19 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 1. Internal filter tank equipment shall include an upper distribution system and lower collection system, hydraulically balanced to prevent turbulence and/or displacement of the filter media during service operation or backwash. Standard pipe arrangements or an internal valving system will not be acceptable. H. Filter Area: Refer to documents for size and capacity of filter tank. I. Filter Media: Filter media shall consist of manufacturers graded media recommendations and have a bed depth specified by the manufacturer. Media to be free of limestone or clay. J. Pressure Gauge Panel: The pressure gauge panel shall consist of 2-4"(103mm) diameter gauges scaled from 0-60 P.S.I.G. (0-400kPa). The pressure gauges shall be connected to influent and effluent pressure points with air relief cocks, compression fittings and semi rigid PVC tubing. K. Operating Manual: 1. A manual shall be provided with each filter and include, according to ANSI/NSF Standard 50-1992; drawings, illustrations, operating instructions, charts, installation instructions, design head loss curve, and parts list to permit proper installation, operation and maintenance. 2. Filters lacking such manuals will not be considered equal and shall not be accepted. L. Data Plates: Data plates shall be permanent, easy to read and securely attached to the filter tank at a readily accessible location. Data plates shall contain the following: 1. Manufacturers name and address. 2. Filter model number. 3. Filter serial number. 4. Effective filter area in sq. ft. (sq. m.). 5. Required clearance (h x w x l) for service and maintenance. 6. Filtration and backwash design flow rate in USGPM (lps). 7. Maximum working pressure. 8. Suitability for buried installation. 9. Steps of operation. 10. Filtration rate in USGPM/sq. ft. (lpm/sq.m.) 11. Media specification if different from media specified in ANSI/NSF Standard 50-1992. 12. Suitability for swimming pool and/or whirlpool application. M. Filters lacking such data plates will not be considered equal and shall not be accepted. N. Hi-rate sand filters of diameters 36" and less will not be considered, 2" Flanged Dial Valve Kit, as fabricated by the filter manufacturer. O. Hi-rate sand filters of diameters larger than 36" shall be provided with schedule 80 face piping assemblies and PVC butterfly valves as shown on the drawings, or be furnished with factory pre-assembled valve assembly and operators. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 20 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO P. A sight glass designed for 50 PSI (345kPa) shall be fitted on the backwash line. The sight glass shall be 1-½" (38mm) diameter I.P.S. bronze casting with 3" (75mm) diameter glass lens and an integral cast flow diverter blade. Q. Supervision: An authorized representative of the equipment supplier shall provide the supervisory services of an installation engineer for at least one (1) day to fully inspect installation to ensure manufacturer required operational efficiencies are installed, fully instruct owners personnel in the operation, care and maintenance of the filter system. R. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pentair 2.8 WATER TREATMENT A. Provide and install water treatment system and chemical containment tanks as shown and scheduled on Contract Documents or equal as approved by the Aquatic Designer. All systems shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Systems to include: chemical analyzer, feed pumps and supplemental components in order to provide a complete and working system. B. Furnish Owner with written water treatment program complete with written basic water chemical analysis together with verbal instruction to operation of system, and chemical safety. C. Accessory Materials: 1. Provide a test kit equal to Taylor K 2005 complete with reagents and Taylor K 1515 FAS DPD for Chlorine and Bromine. 2. Pool Contractor shall furnish a sufficient supply of needed chemicals to meet the following guidelines for all aquatic components. a. Correctly, balance water at initial fill and maintain balance until acceptance by Owner. b. Operational sanitation and pH chemicals from initial fill until acceptance by Owner. c. Provide a minimum of one month of total operational chemicals for use after acceptance by Owner. D. Controller: An integrated electronic system shall be furnished to continuously monitor and control the pH level, disinfection level (HRR) and chlorine concentration of swimming pool and whirlpool water. Flow cell, Flow switch, pH, HRR, Temperature Sensors and Windows based Software shall also be included. Controllers must be connected to the furnished phone cables for remote monitoring. 1. pH, Temperature and HRR (ORP) Sensors: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 21 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO a. The HRR sensing electrode shall incorporate at least 1 square centimeter of 99.9995% pure platinum over other non-Siemens probes that are 99.9% pure platinum and operate in temperatures between 0F and 120F. b. Each electrode shall contain not less than 50 milliliters of electrolyte gel to lengthen electrode life. The gel used in each electrode shall be inorganic to prevent degradation by chlorine or bromine. Each electrode shall use a porous Teflon liquid junction to minimize the chance of liquid junction clogging and prolong electrode life. c. Cables used shall be extremely low noise and connectors that meet or exceed Military specifications. d. pH and HRR sensors shall be manufactured in accordance to ISO 9002 Certification Standards and all wetted materials used shall be on FDA white list. e. Temperature will be a two wire, Zener diode temperature probe. f. Verify if probes are able to be used with a saline chlorination system. Use PPM probes if probes need to be changed from standard probes. g. Provide probes for saline chlorinator as needed for alternate. 2. Flow Cell and Assembly: a. Flowcell assembly shall be included. The flow cell shall incorporate a valve for water test sample; clear face to view probes, and constructed entirely of non-corrosive material, PVC schedule 80. 3. Flow Switch: a. The System control system shall include a remote mounted flow switch and sensor assembly enclosed in a non-corrosive enclosure and incorporating visual indication of flow condition and operate on low voltage of 12Vdc. 4. Controller Enclosure: a. The System enclosure shall be NEMA 4x (IP66) rated to eliminate the possibility of corrosion, and damage to inside of controller. 5. Controller Hardware: a. In case of power loss, the controller shall retain all programmed values. b. Internal feed override momentary contacts for all relays shall be provided to allow manual turn on override of chemical feeder pumps and other installed devices. c. Controller shall have fused and replaceable Solid State Relays to allow Normal Open connection in the event of malfunction. d. Controller shall have a switch to change operation between 110 VAC or 220 VAC, single phase according to customer needs. Main power supply of controller shall be fused. 6. Power: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 22 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO a. System shall consume less than 1 amp at any given time. b. System relay outputs shall be capable of handling standard line voltage of 5 amps with one time delay fuse, each for pH, and chlorine/bromine for control of chemical feed. Controller shall be capable of operating 24 hours per day. 7. Display: a. Display shall have a LED display for pH, and HRR. 1. System will provide a continuous display of derived chlorine level in ppm. 2. System will provide the date, time and alarm status displayed on the bottom line of the display. 3. The location and phone number of the controller can be programmed to display on the face. 4. In the event of an alarm the System shall also display a descriptive alarm message. 5. Langelier index (LSI) & Ryznar index (RSI) shall always be displayed with date stamp. 8. LED Display: a. System shall be provided with visual pH and chlorine feed pump indicator, up and down, lights, which are activated as chemicals, are being fed. Controller shall also display paused mode of proportional chemical feed. b. System shall be provided with a visible alarm indicator to warn operator of high or low pH, HRR, temperature, chlorine levels, a low or no flow and failsafe conditions exist. 9. Control Parameters: a. The System shall provide a qualitative measure of chlorine/bromine sanitation level utilizing High Resolution Redox (HRR). b. Minimum feeder 'on time' in proportional feed shall be not less than five seconds to ensure proper pump performance. 10. Programmable Parameters: a. Controller shall have six different programmable operator level access codes, two different programmable manager level access codes and a master representative access code. b. pH, HRR and chlorine ppm set level controls shall be programmable to limit operator selection of set points within local health code limitations. c. There shall be an alternate HRR set point for nighttime chlorine saving. d. Dechlorination set point (HRR feed-down set point by time or by conclusion of superchlor). e. Super chlorination set point (adjustable to use HRR set point). f. pH feed-up or feed-down shall be programmable through menu tree for either simultaneous or independent feed. The System shall be capable of STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 23 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO being programmed for either standard on/off control or timed base proportional control. g. All controller relays shall be fully programmable and assignable. h. Programming of all controller functions shall be possible through face panel LCD screen and switches, computer link locally (direct connect) and computer link via modem at 9600 baud. i. Remote Data Access System. The System shall be capable of communicating with a computer via a telephone line in order to download the System pH, HRR, Cl2 ppm and temperature data logs, event logs and status report into the computer. j. Controller shall allow manual input for TDS, Ca Hardness and Alkalinity for Calculation of LSI and Ryznar Stability Index. k. Controller shall allow for gallonage reading of pool water for automatic determination for dosage of Carbonate, Muriatic Acid and Calcium Chloride to balance water chemistry. l. Controller shall be used to control the heater to a specified temperature. 11. Alarms: a. The System shall be equipped with an internal microprocessor based "feed duration alarm" circuit that shall disable the appropriate chemical feeder(s) and energize an alarm circuit in the event of a) sensor failures, b) chemical feeder malfunctions or c) depletion of chemical supply. b. The fail-safe alarm mode shall be programmable from 0 through 18 hours with 1-minute resolution. In addition, the fail-safe alarm can also be disabled. c. Programmable warning bands for pH and Chlorine/Bromine/Ozone feed shall be available. d. Any alarm condition shall activate a master alarm signal provided as a dry contact relay enabling the use of 0-240 VAC alarms. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. BecSys 2. Siemens 3. Chemtrol 4. Accutrol F. Sanitation Metering System: Supplier shall provide system for feeding and regulating liquid chlorine for sanitation. System shall consist of a 150-gallon bulk mixing tank, valve, chemical feed pump with rate of flow adjustment of 45 gal/day maximum, and all necessary interconnection tubing. 1. Storage Tank: a. See data on plans. 2. Chemical Feed Pump: a. Stenner 45m. Mount feed pumps on chemical control panel. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 24 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO G. pH Metering System: Supplier shall provide system for feeding and regulating non-fuming muriatic acid for pH reduction. System shall consist of a 50-gallon bulk mixing tank, valve, chemical feed pump with rate of flow adjustment of 45 gal/day maximum, and all necessary interconnection tubing. 1. Storage Tank: a. See data on plans. 2. Chemical Feed Pump: a. Stenner 45m. Mount feed pumps on chemical control panel. H. Saline Chlorination Feed System (Alternate): 1. The Sanitization System shall be salt to chlorine for pool and shall operate in a pressurized manner and meet the required 3# per 10,000 gal / day per code. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1.) TMI Salt Pure ® b. Description: An in-line Chlorine Generation System that uses electrolysis to generate free available chlorine (F.A.C.) from sodium chloride, which is added to, and dissolved in the pool water. The unit should consist of a power supply, electrolytic cell, and an independent flow sensor. c. General: The “system” shall be properly sized, designed, and built by manufacturer with a minimum of 10 years continuous experience building commercial electrolytic salt generation systems. d. The chemistry of the “system” must be capable of generating sufficient chloride to maintain a free residual level of 1.5 ppm, or a minimum O.R.P. of 700 millivolts. e. The chemistry of the “system” must essentially be the same as other chlorinating methods and should not require any unique knowledge or testing. f. Pool water shall not have to be maintained any higher than 3,000 ppm of salt for “system” function, in order to minimize threshold taste. Measurement of salinity level in pool water must be independently monitored by using a reliable digital conductivity meter equivalent to the TMI EC-400. Conductivity meter, to be supplied by Contractor. g. Salt must be an evaporated sodium chloride fine, granulated, non-iodized type. It must not contain Y.P.S. (yellow prussiate of soda). No rock salt. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 25 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO h. Product: “System” shall carry approvals from Underwriters Laboratories UL, and National Sanitary Foundation - NSF-50 Standard, and Canadian Standards Association, CSA. The system shall be specifically designed for commercial use. i. “System” shall be modular in design, allowing for simple “on-site” removal and replacement of singular components. In addition, the “system” will be plumbed so as to allow a manual by-pass valve arrangement for serving for each cell, allowing the “system” to continue to function during repair. In- line full flow systems, for more than one unit, will not be considered. j. Each electrolytic cell must yield a minimum of 94 grams of equivalent chlorine per 24 hours of use. k. Power Supply: Power supply must be capable of converting either 120, 208, or 240 VAC current to low voltage direct current (30 VDC, 24 Amps maximum). Unit to consist of a transformer, printed circuit board, & 12 Amp circuit breaker, mounted on an aluminum back plate and protected by a weather resistant aluminum enclosure. Indicator lights include “Power on”, “Water Flow”, “Clean,” and “Service”. “Service” indicator will be followed by 3 digit codes identifying the potential failure. Power supply must have one touch water salinity display in G.P.L. (Grams Per Liter). Power supply must be permanently connected to the pool circulation pump electrical supply and be energized only during pump operation. l. Flow Sensor: Flow sensor must be mounted before the electrolytic cell and be housed in a 3" x 3" x 1½" tee. Flow sensor will use temperature differential to sense flow and conductivity to sense salinity level in pool water. m. Electrolytic Cell: Cell must be self-cleaning, with 3" flanges, and be capable of a maximum flow rate of 250-300 gallons per minute. Cell body must be corrosion resistant PVC. n. “System” must provide a low voltage interface in each control panel to allow the Chemistry Controller to control generation of DC current. o. “System” must provide a manual adjustment time-based override feature on each control panel to permit continued chlorine production in the event of chemistry controller failure. p. “System” shall have written warranty on equipment for a period of one-year from the date of substantial completion, and an additional 1-year pro-rated warranty on cells. q. Equipment Supplier must provide written in-depth Trouble Shooting Guide to allow all repairs to be performed on site. r. Concurrent with providing Trouble Shooting Guide, equipment supplier must provide a Maintenance Kit for potential repairs. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 26 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO s. Installation: Equipment supplier must provide installation instructions and Installation Layout Options - “schematics” for the installer to assist in “designing” system layout. 2. A post filter re-circulation loop will be added to the main re-circulation system as part of the chlorination system. The re-circulation loop will provide the inlet water supply to the chlorinator as well as the lower pressure zone to evacuate the chlorinated solution. 3. The Sanitization System must be NSF listed. 4. The System will operate with an inlet water pressure of 27-60 psig. 5. The Sanitization System shall be capable of functioning in temperature between 40F and 130F. 6. The Sanitization System shall operate with tablets having 80% minimum available chlorine. 7. The Sanitization System shall be capable of satisfactory performance if installed as per the Manufacturer’s recommendations. An Authorized Representative of the Manufacturer shall be available to install and service the system as required. 8. Manufacturer warrants parts of the Sanitization System to be free of defects in workmanship and material for 2 years from date of installation. I. Ozone Generator: 1. Description: a. The Ozone generator system shall be Corona Discharge. No generators utilizing ultra violet methods of generation will be allowed. b. The entire system shall be supplied as one integrated package from a single source. The entire system includes the ozone generator, air preparation system, contact column, booster pump(s) and ventrui(s). The components shall be modular in design to facilitate sizing and ease of installation. c. Piping and valving shall be sized and located as shown on the drawings. 2. Ozone Injection: a. Introduction of the ozone to the water will be via the side stream method utilizing a booster pump and venturi combination with bypass assembly allowing for field adjustment of the vacuum created at the point of injection. The venturi will require greater than a 15% differential to initiate a vacuum and will require a minimum of 60gpm to produce a minimum air suction capacity of 15 SCFH. 3. Ozone Mixing and Contacting: a. After injection of ozone into the side streamline, the water and ozone mix shall flow into one Contact Column. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 27 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO b. The contact column shall be assembled incorporating a venting system as dimensioned and shown on the drawings. 4. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Clearwater Tech, CD-10 with Oxygen Concentrator (OXS-80), APEX-IV, (800) 262-0203. J. Ultraviolet (Alternate): 1. If saline chlorinator is chosen, all components must be protected using correct metal and anode or water bond connections. Verify that the saline PPM is not exceeded for the use of UV in the system. The unit must withstand the salt content and not corrode the steel chamber or its components. 2. Ultraviolet Disinfection Equipment shall operate within the UVC electromagnetic spectrum emitting wavelengths in the range of 200 nm to 400 nm. This required wavelength will provide constant disinfection / inactivation of bacteria, algae, molds, viruses and destruction of Monochloramines, Trichloramines and Dichloramines. Ultraviolet Lamp / Chamber and Spectra Control Panel by Engineered Treatment Systems / atg-Willand (Telephone 920-885-4628, Fax 920-885-4386) or engineer approved equal. The UV system shall have an MET or equivalent (ETL, CSA or UL) listing, and be NSF 50 certified. a. Equipment General Description: The Ultraviolet System shall be provided in a complete package to include: 316L Stainless Steel Chamber, Spectra Control System located in a NEMA 12 rated panel, Medium Pressure Bulb(s) designed to emit wavelengths within the UVC electromagnetic spectrum, strainer basket, automatic wiper system and Project Commissioning by a Certified Ultraviolet Technician. The Ultraviolet System shall be sized to emit a minimum dose of 60 mJ/cm², with flow rates of 781 gpm, within an 8” schedule 80 PVC pipe. Refer to the documents for the total volume of the spray pad and turnover time. b. Ultraviolet Chamber: Ultraviolet chamber shall be pressure rated for 100 psi (tested to 150 psi), and pressure drop across the unit will be minimal. The unit shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel to prevent corrosion within the harsh pool environment. The Ultraviolet chamber shall come complete with the following equipment: 1.). Ultraviolet Intensity monitor with built-in alarm system to notify operator when output level drops below required level of 60 mJ/cm² The Ultraviolet monitor output shall be transmitted via a 4-20ma signal to the control system. The Ultraviolet probe shall be rated to IP67 and be capable of being removed from the unit without having to drain the system. The lamp output shall be displayed on the control system as an intensity and % output. Ultraviolet temperature control system shall be provided to maintain system integrity in the event of flow interruptions to the chamber. ETS Manual Updated 10/24/05 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 28 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 2.). Ultraviolet chamber shall come complete with annealed quartz sleeve with “O” ring seals for water tightness. 3.) Chambers shall be complete with ANSI flanges and all ports or vents shall be threaded NPT. The Ultraviolet chamber must be capable of installation in the system so that it remains full under all conditions. 4.) The Ultraviolet unit must be complete with appropriate brackets or feet for ease of installation. 3. Ultraviolet Lamp: a. Ultraviolet lamp shall be medium pressure high intensity. Lamp shall be designed to emit continuous Ultraviolet wavelengths in the range of 200nm to 400nm. This will provide optimal disinfection benefits and destruction of the Monochloramine, Dichloramine and Trichloramine compounds. Lamp must remain unaffected by temperature variance of 0 degrees to 200degrees Fahrenheit. b. The lamp unit must provide a dose not less than 60 mJ/cm2 at the end of the lamp life and this must be based on the full re-circulating flow rate, not on a side stream treatment. 4. Automatic Wiper System: a. An automatic cleaning system shall be provided for cleaning of quartz sleeve and Ultraviolet monitor probe. The system shall travel the entire length of the quartz sleeve twice per desired cleaning cycle. Precision molded wiper rings shall beprovided to ensure thorough quartz tube cleaning and quartz tube protection. Wiper cycle shall be user selectable and adjustable within a range of 15 minutes to 24 hours depending on anticipated application and deposit build-up. At a minimum the Automatic Wiper System shall have the following characteristics: b. System shall utilize direct Belt Drive with square machined pulleys and shafts to prevent slippage and pin shearing. Systems utilizing shear pins or complicated gear boxes will be unacceptable. c. Wiper power supply shall be 24 volt DC for improved safety. d. System shall incorporate Direct Shaft Encoding for positional location. Systems relying on external proxy switches or internally located magnets will be unacceptable. e. Wiper interval shall be operator selectable with optional override switch. f. Wiper faults are to be indicated on the control system display. g. Wiper System to utilize “Intelligent Operation” for automatic start up commissioning h. Records wiper position @ chamber ends. Position must be fixed and not dependent on a timed interval or component striking end of chamber. i. Establish a travel run without setting limit adjustments to ensure system integrity and longevity. 5. Ultraviolet Control System: a. Control cabinet shall be Engineered Treatment System/ atg.Willand SPECTRA microprocessor control unit. System shall be epoxy coated STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 29 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO NEMA 12 rated cabinet. Three levels of operation shall be provided to meet the needs of the operator and pool environment: Simple Control – (Start, Stop & Reset), Full Parameter Display, and Customized Operator Configuration. Modes of operation shall be password protected to secure system critical setup functions. Control system shall have clearly identifiable Start, Stop and Reset control buttons (suitable for gloved operation) with Running and Fault LCD indicators. b. Two-line LCD screen shall display a minimum of the following: Ultraviolet dose (derived from flow and intensity inputs), Ultraviolet intensity (as a % and mw/cm²), Lamp Current, Flow rate (accepts signal from optional flow meter – displayed as gallons per minute), Chamber temperature (displayed as deg. F), Operation hour meter, System spares listing, Lamp fault, low Ultraviolet & temperature alarm, Ground fault trip, Wiper fault. All alarm functions shall have simple text message display to assist in fault finding. c. Control system shall have a minimum of the following system interface control: Remote operation, Process interrupt features (from valves, flow meters), Low UV dose (configurable to shutdown or alarm only, Flow meter input, Auto-restrike, Half to full power Ultraviolet setting with 24hr/7day settable timer. d. Control system shall have built in data-logging capabilities to record the following information: Ultraviolet intensity required, Ultraviolet intensity measured, Lamp current, Chamber temperature, Flow rate (if flow meter connected), Time and date stamp, All alarms generated. 6. Project Commissioning: a. Ultraviolet Chamber and Control Panel shall be commissioned by a qualified factory trained technician. During this time period, final electrical and control cabling will be connected from the Spectra control cabinet to the Ultraviolet disinfection chamber. Daily operation and simple maintenance instructions shall be provided during this commissioning process. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall perform all warranty work. Manufacture to warranty Ultraviolet Chamber and Spectra Control panel for a period of 12 months. Medium pressure Ultraviolet bulbs shall be warranted for a period of 4000 hours. Intermittently operated bulbs (≥ 1 on/off cycles per day) will be replaced free of charge should failure occur prior to 3000 hours and replacement will be prorated between 3000 and 4000 hours. A detailed warranty sheet shall accompany this document upon request. 7. SP or Ecoflo UNIT Specification: a. Ultraviolet manufacturer to offer unit capability of Horizontal installations utilizing a traditional influent and effluent flow pattern with ANSI flange range of 2” - 14” and flow pattern of 100 – 3400gpm. Unit shall operate as a single or multiple lamp system with bulb range of 1.3kW to (2) 7.3kW power range. Chamber shall be the equivalent of Engineered Treatment Systems / atg.Willand SP-50-10 and Spectra Control Cabinet SP-B or equal (Control Specification to follow). Electrical Requirements to include 480 Volt 3- Phase (XX) amp internal breaker. Electrical contractor to take into account plus/minus 3% for external breaker. All required electrical work to be performed by licensed electrician. Bulbs shall be warranted for a period of STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 30 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 4000 hours. Intermittently operated bulbs (≥ 1 on/off cycles per day) will be replaced free of charge should failure occur prior to 3000 hours and replacement will be prorated between 3000 and 4000 hours. A detailed warranty sheet shall accompany this document upon request. 8. Equipment Warranty: a. Product Warranty – Terms and Conditions b. The UV disinfection units supplied by ETS/ATG-WILLAND have an associated warranty. The terms and conditions of this warranty are as detailed below. c. Product 1.). Duration a.) The product (excluding consumables) is guaranteed from the earliest of either: 12 months after commencement of operation. 15 months after dispatch of the equipment d. Replacement of components under warranty: 1.). The manufacturer will supply replacement components to the same specification of the original component, delivered by carrier free of charge to the equipment site. The manufacturer reserves the right to request that items claimed as faulty under warranty are returned freight paid to the factory for inspection. Should the user unreasonably fail to return the defective item then the manufacturer reserves the right to charge for any items claimed under warranty. e. Manufacturer repair under warranty: 1.). The manufacturer will carry out repairs under warranty under the following provisions: a.) The manufacturer will carry out a full repair and re-test of the equipment if required in the factory. In such circumstances all components and labor would be free of charge, as would any return freight. The user would be expected to return the unit for repair to the factory in good order. b.) The manufacturer can carry out repairs to the unit on site. Under such circumstances all site labor will be free of charge but the manufacturer reserves the right to charge for all travel time and travel expenses. f. Consumables: 1.) Definition a.) Consumables are normally defined as all components having a limited life e.g. UV Lamps, Quartz sleeves, Seals, Wiper blades, Wiper bushings. g. Replacement of components under warranty: h. The warranty period for consumables is dependent on the use and type and users should consult on the consumables warranty for each installed system. The General Warranty is: 1.) UV Lamps 4000 hours use (assuming no more than 1 switch cycle per 24 hour operation) 2.) Quartz sleeve 2 years use, excluding accidental damage Seals replaced after use on each occasion Wiper seals 3.) 6 months operation (on normal operation) 4.) Wiper blades 6 months operation (on normal operation) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 31 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 5.) Wiper bushings 12 months operation (on normal operation) i. Replacement of consumables under warranty 1.) The manufacturer will supply replacement consumables to the same specification of the original component. The manufacturer reserves the right to request that items claimed as faulty under warranty are returned to the factory for inspection. Should the user unreasonably fail to return the defective item then the manufacturer reserves the right to charge for any items claimed under warranty. Where consumables have run to more than 50% of their rated life then a pro- rata credit is normally issued j. Manufacturer repair under warranty 1.) The user normally carries out consumable replacement. Should the manufacturer be requested to replace on site then all charges will be to the users account. K. Water Level Controller: The pool water level shall be maintained automatically by a probe type (pressure sensitive) water level controller, Aqua Control Technology, Automatic Level Control, Model ELC-800R. Provide deck level well for sensing for each pool. Provide conduit to well from basement level where equipment is located. L. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Engineered Treatment Systems (ETS) 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. The following list of equipment is furnished to assist the bidder. Drawings should also be checked, as the successful subcontractor shall be responsible for furnishing a complete swimming pool system as described by both the specifications and drawings. The catalog numbers shown are listed only to establish a standard of quality, "or equal" shall be implied for each item. Bidders who wish to offer equipment of other manufacturers are encouraged to do so. The burden of proof of equality or service shall be on the supplying Contractor. Proof of equality not implied by the specifications is not a burden of the Owner or Representative. The Aquatic Designer shall be the judge as to whether or not an item submitted as an equal is acceptable. If the Pool Contractor submits a substitution on an "equal" basis, he shall assume all costs for changes in drawings and specifications affected by the substitution and the costs increase, if any, on adjoining work. All carbon steel deck equipment shall be sandblasted and flame sprayed with .003" of pure zinc before finish coating with enamel. 1. Deck Equipment: All specified deck equipment and anchors, where required, shall be furnished by the Pool Contractor. Installation within the pool structure shall be by the Pool Contractor. Installation in or on the pool deck or elsewhere shall be by others unless the decks are a part of the Pool Contractor's work. Installation shall be in accordance with drawings and instructions furnished by the Pool Contractor. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 32 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO a. Stainless Steel Rails: Rails shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings. Rails shall be 1.50" O.D. x .120, type 316L stainless steel tubular rails. Rails shall be commercial type as manufactured by Spectrum or SR Smith. Submit colors to Aquatic Designer for approval. b. Wedge Type Deck Anchors: The body shall be constructed of cast bronze and shall have tapered chamber to receive the wedge by means of which a ladder or other rail may be held securely. The wedge shall be of cast bronze and shall be drawn against the rail being anchored by means of a ½" bolt. Anchor bodies shall be made to accommodate 1½" IPS standard pipe rails. The wedge deck anchor shall be provided with a ground connection at its base and shall have an anchoring protrusion at its center. There shall also be supplied a stainless steel escutcheon plate for each deck anchor. These shall be stainless steel. c. Handicap Lift: The Spectrum Aspen Lift, electric battery operated lift with deck anchors as required on plans. Provide three lifts (1) lift per pool with cover, anchor, and an extra battery. Extra battery to be shared between the three lifts. B. Equipment Incorporated in Pool Structure: 1. Main Drain Grates: Install per heath code and Virginia Graeme Baker Act guidelines. C. Cleaning and Safety Equipment: 1. Vacuum Cleaner: Provide a 24" flexible vacuum cleaner head with 2" hose connection. Flow shall range from 75 to 100 GPM. It shall include 50 feet of 2" floating hose, 1 ½" x 36' jointed handle, hose sleeve and nut. 2. Portable Vacuum Pump: There shall be supplied one electric powered portable centrifugal pump and strainer. A 2" suction connection shall be provided and 1 ½" discharge connection with 10 feet of discharge hose. The motor shall be a 2 HP, 1 phase, 115/230 volt, 60-cycle, 3450 RPM, drip-proof, continuous duty type plug end switch. 3. Telescopic Handles: Cleaning tool handle shall be of the telescopic design consisting of two 12' lengths of anodized aluminum tubing, a 1" tube fitted inside a 1 ¼" tube. Handle STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 33 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO shall be adjustable from 12' to approximately 24'. Telescopic handle shall be Lion Catalog No. 5012 or equal, two (2) required. 4. Pool Brush: The pool brush and holder shall be permanently attached. The pool brush shall be 18" long with nylon bristles and rigid back. 5. Leaf Skimmer: The leaf skimmer and holder shall be permanently attached. The skimmers shall have a nylon net. Skimlite #558, one (1) required. 6. Life Hook: Provide two (2) life hooks of 5/8" diameter anodized aluminum with 16-foot handle. Life hook shall be Lion Catalog No. 5000 or equal. 7. Life Ring: Provide two (2) ring buoys with 60 feet of ¼" polyethylene rope. Buoys shall be 24" diameter unicellular plastic foam and must bear United States Coast Guard approval label, Cal-June GW-X-24. 8. First Aid Kit: Provide two 16 unit first aid kit as manufactured by Pac-Kit, Catalog No. 235258. Kit type and quantity must meet code. 9. Backboard: Provide one 72" x 16" backboard as manufactured by Marine Rescue Products No. 2001 with head immobilizer and 3 straps or equal. 10. Pool Rules Sign: Provide two (2) ND2000 Pool Rules Signs, one per pool area, as manufactured by Aquatic Technology, Inc. or equal. Verify pool application submittal and by code. 11. Patron Load: Provide one (1) bather load sign per pool for installation adjacent to each pool. Refer to plans for bather load. D. Water Level Controller: The pool water level shall be maintained automatically by Aqua Control Technologies, Automatic Level Control, model no.ELC-800R. Refer to plans for locations and quantities. E. Sump Pump: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 34 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO Provide two (2) heavy-duty fully submersible pump for inspection parts. Pump shall have 20’ power cord for GFCI hookup. Pump shall be Sta-Rite Trident #D175120T; ¾ HP 115 volt. 2.10 PUMPS A. General: Pump motors shall be high efficiency for motors .5HP and greater. Insulation NEMA Class F or better for 3 phase motors. B. Circulation Pumps: Furnish and install as scheduled on the Contract Drawings or equal as approved by the Aquatic Designer. Furnish pump installation shop drawings, including housekeeping pads and pipe connections for all pumps to Aquatic Designer for approval. C. Jet Pumps: Furnish and install as scheduled on the Contract Drawings or Equal as approved by the Aquatic Designer. Furnish Shop Drawings for all pumps to Aquatic Designer for approval. D. Pump Strainers: Furnish and install where called for on the Contract Drawings equal to those manufactured by US Filter, or Mer-Made Fiberglass Basket Strainers. Pump strainers shall be of non-corrosive material. Pump straining baskets shall be stainless steel. Provide one (1) additional strainer basket for each model of pump. E. Pressure and Compound Gauges: Furnish and install where called for on the Contract Drawings and as required by Code. Pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft 1009 liquid filled, 0-60 PSI. Compound gauges shall be Ashcroft 1009 liquid filled 15-0-60. Furnish with pulsation damper. F. Flow Meters: Furnish and install where called for on the Contract Drawings and as required by Code equal to those manufactured by Blue White Digital or Signet as shown in documents. G. Drain Pump: Refer to Section 2.9, E of these specifications. H. Provide and install Badu Classic Jet System per manufacturer recommendations. BADU JET 8125 Bayberry RD. Jacksonville, FL 82256 (904) 739-2626 phone (904)737-5261 FAX 2.11 VALVES AND PIPING MATERIALS A. Valve Connections: Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joint. Use line size valves. B. Use of Valves: (NO IRON BODIES OR SHAFTS SHALL BE ACCEPTED!) 1. Pipe sizes 3" - 12" - Butterfly. 2. Miscellaneous valves ½" - 2 ½" - PVC True Union Ball Valves. 3. All chemical lines and equipment - PVC True Union Ball Valves. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 35 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO C. Butterfly Valves: Butterfly valves 3" - 12" shall be wafer design flangeless or lug bodies shall be suitable for use between ANSI 125 or 150 lb. flanges. All valves 3" through 6" shall be lever handle style unless otherwise called out on the plans. All valves 8” and larger shall be gear drive, Spears or equal. D. Butterfly valves 14" - 24" shall be lug body design. 1. Bodies of the flangeless design shall be provided with at least four (4) bolt guides to center the valve in the pipeline. 2. All butterfly valves shall have a PVC body, aluminum bronze with nickel coated disc, one piece stainless steel shaft with Buna-N or EPDM seat minimum 150 PSI rating. 3. All butterfly valves 3" - 6" shall have 10 position locking in handle, butterfly valves 8" - 24" shall have gear operators and chain operators as required. 4. All valves shall be as manufactured by Spears or equal as approved by the Aquatic Designer. E. Ball Valves: PVC Type True Union Ball Valves, Eslon, Assahi, Spear or equal. F. Check Valves: Furnish and install as shown on the drawings. Shall be PVC water or spring style with Spacer. Must be one full pipe size larger than installed pipe size to eliminate flow restrictions. Models as manufactured by Techno Check or Praher. G. Expansion Joint/Flexible Connector: Provide Metrosphere Model as manufactured by Metraflex, Chicago, Illinois, as indicated on the drawings. H. Solenoid Valves: Use slow closing, two-way valves to eliminate water hammer of characteristic voltage, material, and pipe size for correct flow rate as manufactured by ASCO, Dayton or equal. I. Submerged Service Operators: Use only approved service operators for the valve requiring underwater operation. J. Valve Operator Extension: Provide extensions as necessary to operate submerged or below surface valves and the appropriate valve box access cover. K. Four Way Valves: Provide Four Way Valve equal to Dezurik 1000, Fig. 204, T, 6, RS46, EGG 12H12, B as required. L. PVC Three Way Valves: (where required) Provide PVC 3 way valves of 2" or 2 ½" pipe size equal to Jandy or Compool. M. Automatic Water Level Controller: 1. Furnish and install as shown and of the quality as listed on the Contract Drawings. All electrical, if any, components shall be in the filter area. Piping shall be according to the manufacturers shop drawings. 2. The automatic type waterfill will be furnished by the Pool Contractor. The bypass valve and all fresh water piping from backflow preventer stub out to be by Pool STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 36 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO Contractor. Plumbing Contractor to provide valves and supplies shown in schematics. 2.12 POOL HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Pool Contractor is responsible for providing wells for sensing of the exchanger and connect to exchanger with valves as shown in schematics. Exchangers to be Cupro nickel or better for saline installation, coordinate with mechanical contractor. B. Furnish and install thermometers in inlet and outlet piping to heat exchanger and downstream in the blended water stream. Thermometers shall be Trerice, adjustable angle, 9" scale, A40 Series, insertion length to accommodate pipe size, separable socket. C. Furnish and install CPVC or copper piping for 6'-0" on heater influent and 6'-0" on effluent. D. Furnish and install temperature well sensor for each exchanger per mechanical engineer’s specifications and per exchanger sensor contractor. E. Must meet all State Health and Boiler Codes where applicable. F. If saline system installed, provide sacrificial anodes or water bonds in line at the inlet of the heat exchanger. 2.13 POOL FITTINGS, DECK MAINTENANCE, COMPETITIVE, AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT A. Provide and install the equipment scheduled on the drawings of manufacturer and model number or approved equal. It is the installing contractor’s responsibility to verify actual quantities required. B. All equipment shall be provided completely assembled, and ready to use. C. Color selections shall be provided at time of submittal. D. Custom fabrications require approved shop drawings and/or submittals before ordering. E. All equipment shall be provided with storage anchors, hangers and appropriate ancillary hardware to provide for proper storage. Such hardware is to be noted in submittals. F. If not specifically called out on the drawings, all materials shall be corrosion resistant and of commercial grade quality, engineered, and constructed or manufactured for the intended use. 2.14 INTERIOR FINISH A. Furnish and install swimming pool interior as show on the documents and as listed in the finish schedules. Pool interior shall be approved by the local health department. The diamond brite or tiled finish, colors to be as shown in drawings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 37 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO B. Surface Preparation: Interior finish must be applied to a clean, sound concrete, shortcrete or gunite substrate. Pool shell must be free of dirt, oil, grease or other foreign materials and cured a minimum of 24 hours. Any cleaning should be done by sandblasting or acid etching. C. Mixing: Apply each bag of pool interior with potable water. Mix until material is uniform and consistent. Discard any dry, unmixed lumps. D. Application: Apply interior finish with steel trowels to a lightly dampened substrate. Build to uniform thickness of 3/8". Mix only as much material as can be applied in one continuous application. For a large multi-day project, use tile breaks or other natural breaks for joints. E. Curing: Wet cure interior finish by filling pool as soon as possible after installation. Avoid over drying by misting with potable water while filling. 2.15 TILE AND TILE SETTING MATERIALS A. Furnish and install swimming pool work tiles as shown on the drawings and as listed in the schedules. Determine order/delivery dates at contract buy-out. Provide secure storage on-site. No extension of time will be granted because of unavailable materials or material delivery schedule delays. Coordinate tile ordering with Installer of Section 09300. B. Environmental Conditions: Maintain temperature at 50º F minimum during tile work and for 7 days after completion or furnish protection as approved by the Architect and Aquatic Designer. C. Extra Stock: Supply extra 2% of each color of flat and trim in clean marked cartons for Owner's use. D. Ceramic Tile: 1. Furnish all ceramic tile required as follows (all shall be frost proof). Colors shall be as selected by Architect and Aquatic Designer from standard price range tiles. 2. Furnish all tile required for special markings and lettering in conformance with the Contract Documents and applicable Codes, including depth markings and no diving markers. 3. Use two (2) 1"x 1" tiles on pool stair tread edges and benches where required for proper trim and as directed on the drawings. E. Setting Materials: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 2. Hydrated lime: ASTM C206, 7 Type S. 3. Sand: ASTM C144. 4. Water: Clean and potable. F. Acceptable Manufacturer's of Pre-Mix: Multi-cure as manufactured by the C-Cure Chemical Company, used with latex additive or Kerabond with Kerolastic additive or Flex PCI System. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 38 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO G. Grout: Commercial Two-Part Epoxy Grout. H. Acceptability of Surfaces: Before tiling, check area to be tiled for acceptability as follows: (Installation of tile finish on a subsurface constitutes acceptance of the subsurface by the applier of finish materials.) 1. Surface medium-rough texture. 2. All surfaces to be tile shall be free of dust, rust, paint, from oil or other release coatings. 3. Provision for rope anchors and ladders and other embedments at proper locations. 4. Concrete true to line, level, plumb and curvature. 5. Width, depth and length will permit finished accuracy of markings and dimensions. I. Layout: 1. Align all joints to give straight uniform grout lines. 2. Observe exact minimum length per dimensions shown on drawings. J. Workmanship: 1. Observe maximum width tolerance of 1" over dimensions shown in drawings. 2. Observe ±1/16" maximum finish elevation tolerance on all gutter edges. 3. Supply first-class workmanship in all tile work. 4. Use all products in strict accordance with recommendations and directions of manufacturer. 5. Proportion all mixes in accordance with latest ANSI Standard Specifications. 6. Smooth all exposed cut edges or any edges that will cause injury to swimmers. K. Setting Methods: 1. Portland Cement Mortar Bed (1 ½" minimum) on concrete or as noted. 2. Follow ANSI A108.8 (Referenced TCA P431), using dry-set mortar bond coat on cured bed. 3. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin-Set) on concrete using a minimum leveling bed. 4. Follow ANSI 108.5 (Reference TAC F113 & W213). L. Cleaning: 1. Clean tile surface as thoroughly as possible on completion of grouting. M. Protection of Tile Work: Protect all newly tiled areas. 2.16 POOL COVERS (WHIRLPOOLS – BASE, POOL - ALTERNATE) 1. All pool covers shall be bid for energy conservation. 2. Cover shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Acceptable manufactures: a. Cover Pools STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 39 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO b. Anchor Industries c. Spectrum PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SHOTCRETE OR GUNITE CONCRETE WORK A. Compressive Strength Test: Minimum 4,000 psi in 28 days for both gunite and shotcrete work. B. Submittals: Copy of test results to Architect and Aquatic Designer after all test have been completed. C. Placing of Concrete: Placing of gunite or shotcrete: Conforming to the requirements of GCA Publication G-84, ACI 509, and as specified herein. D. Gunite: 1. Mixing: Mix dry in batch mixing machine for a period of not less than 1 minute. 2. Mix and Strengthen: As specified in Part 2. 3. Additive: Xypex for waterproofing E. Shotcrete: 1. Mixing time for materials delivered by ready mix trucks to the job site shall not exceed 1 ½ hours or 250 revolutions of the drum whichever comes first. Additional water may be added at job site only if requested by pool contractor. When additional water is added, drum shall be rotated a minimum of 30 additional revolutions. 2. A delivery ticket shall be furnished to Architect and Aquatic Designer with the following information: a. Name of concrete firm. b. Serial number of ticket. c. Date. d. Truck number. e. Specific class of concrete. f. Amount of concrete. g. Time loaded. h. Water added. i. Time unloaded. F. Concrete Placement: 1. Place concrete against original structure, thoroughly compacted earth, or existing concrete that will not yield during placing operation. 2. Remove all loose, fine aggregate or rebound from surfaces receiving concrete before placing succeeding layers. Whenever possible, first layer shall entirely cover reinforcing steel to secure it in proper position. 3. Where new concrete is applied against concrete, thoroughly clean the existing STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 40 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO surface and drench with water at least twice on the day before placing new concrete. Surfaces upon which concrete will be applied shall be sufficiently damp to prevent excessive absorption of water content in new concrete mix, but not so wet as to overcome suction. 4. Concrete deposited on vertical surfaces shall be shot at right angle to surface starting at the bottom and continuing upward. Build up in layers of a thickness that will not slump, allowing sufficient time between placing of layers for initial set to take place. G. Finishing: 1. When thickness and planes outlined by forms and gauging wires have been reached, rod surfaces to true lines. After rodding, remove gauging wires. Finish all exposed surfaces to straight and true lines. 2. Gun finish as left by nozzle, or cut finish. 3. Continuously moisture cure for no less than 7 days. 3.2 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Work Included: Pipe, fittings, connections, wall penetrations, hangers and supports, equipment bases and supports, excavation and backfill. B. References: 1. ANSI/ASTM D1784 - Rigid poly (PVC) compounds and chlorinated poly (CPVC) compounds. Must be NSF listed for potable water. 2. ANSI/ASTM D2564 - Solvent cements for poly vinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe and fittings. 3. ANSI/ASTM D2729 - Poly vinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings. 4. ASTM B88 - Seamless copper water tube. 5. ASTM D2855 - Practice for making solvent cemented joints with PVC pipe and fittings. 6. Epslon Engineering Manual for plastic piping systems. C. Placement and Use: 1. Use the prescribed pipe type in the following areas. All plastic pipe flanges shall be schedule 40 PVC with neoprene gaskets where required. 2. All pool gutter lines shall be schedule 40 solvent weld, conforming to ASTM D1785/76. 3. All buried filter return lines, main drain lines, pool drain, surge tank drain, PVC schedule 40, solvent weld under pool slabs. 4. All above grade piping inside the pump mechanical room, non-corrosive piping meeting building code. 5. All chemical piping and tube chases, schedule 80 PVC, solvent weld. 6. Heater connections shall be Type "L" copper piping, with wrought copper or cast brass fittings, 95/5 solder, on heater influent and effluent lines from the bypass to the heater. 7. Pool under drain, under pool, perforated rigid PVC. Outside pools schedule 40 PVC. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 41 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO D. Hangers and Support: 1. All mechanical room piping must be properly supported to eliminate any movement during operation or at restart of pumps using the schedule indicated on the drawings as a guideline. 2. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to properly support piping at all valves, pumps, equipment, overhead areas, etc. 3. Use of the proper hanger for the conditions is essential. All piping must be supported laterally as well as vertically hung. 4. All support hardware used under water or in surge tanks shall be fiberglass or stainless steel, Strut-Tech or Aickinstruct. E. Pool Pipe Excavation and Backfill: 1. Excavation for all swimming pool systems supply related piping. 2. Special backfill and bedding materials. a. Existing subsoil materials shall not be used for pipe bedding. b. All piping shall be bedded with a minimum of 6" clean sand material and a minimum of 2' - 0" clean stone material top cover. The balance may be existing site material, provided no organic material, clay or topsoil is used. F. Piping: 1. Piping must be laid on a grade so it will drain completely by gravity to prevent damage. In all instances where gravity drainage is not provided, the contractor shall install drain valves and French drains so that all lines can be drained completely. Shop drawings will be required on any such installation. 2. Cut all pipe with mechanical cutter without damage to the pipe. 3. Locate all valves for maximum operation accessibility. G. Placing and Laying: Inspect pipe for defects before installation. Clean the interior of pipe thoroughly of foreign matter and keep clean during laying operation. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are unstable. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that no trench water, earth or other substance will enter the pipes or fittings. H. Threaded Joints: After cutting and before threading, the pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. Screw joints shall be made with graphite or inert filler and oil or with an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Threads shall be full-cut and not more than 3 threads on the pipe remained exposed. Use Teflon II tape on the male threads of all threaded pipe joints. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. Unions shall be provided where required for disconnection of exposed piping. Unions will be permitted where access is provided. I. Solvent welded joints: Shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. J. Cross Connections: 1. Installation shall be made that will prevent any cross connection or inter- STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 42 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO connection between distribution supply for drinking purposes and the swimming pool that will permit a backflow of water into the potable water supply. K. Valve Identification: Label all valves to describe their function. Provide wall mounted laminated piping and valve legend. L. Mechanical Piping Identification: All piping in Mechanical Room to be labeled with description of line and arrows indicating direction of flow, with directional flow arrows or equal at 10' intervals. All labels shall be in conformance with the scheme for identification of piping systems (ANSI A13.1, 1981) sponsored by the National Safety Council, the American Society of Mechanical Engineers and OSHA. Provide color codes for the following, as per local requirements. Raw Water Heated Water Filtered Water Chlorine/Bromine Wastewater CO2 or Acid M. Testing and Flushing of Piping: 1. Pressure Piping: After pipe has been laid, joints completed the trench should be partially backfilled-leaving joints exposed for examination. Subject lines to hydrostatic pressure of not less than 50 psi, joints shall remain watertight under this pressure for a period of 2 hours. All buried pipe and pressure testing shall be check by the Architect/Owners and Aquatic Designers representative to verify that the support, workmanship, fittings, materials and mechanical soundness meet specifications before pool contractor completes backfilling. Notification of the Aquatic Designer through the General Contractor is required a minimum of 72 hours prior to planned backfilling. 2. Gravity Lines: A water test shall be applied to all gravity drain piping systems, either in their entirety or in sections. All openings shall be tightly plugged and each system filled with water and tested with the equivalent of at least 10 foot of head pressure. Water shall be kept in the system under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts. System shall be tight at all joints and no water loss shall occur for a period of two hours. 3. Flushing: All pipelines leading to the pool shall be thoroughly flushed and cleaned with chlorinated water before pool is filled and placed in use. 3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide for major equipment, reinforced concrete housekeeping bases poured directly on structural floor slabs (as required by equipment manufacturer) 4" thick minimum, unless noted otherwise on plans, extended 4" minimum beyond machinery bedplates. Provide templates, anchor bolts, rubber vibration isolators and accessories required for mounting and anchoring equipment. Anchorage system shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer for length and installation of anchor bolts. 3.4 SLEEVES AND WALL PENETRATIONS A. Pipes penetrating all watertight walls shall use "Link Seal" Century Line sleeves as manufactured by Thunderline in combination with link seals and stainless steel trim. Patch exterior side of wall penetrations with non-shrink grout as specified. Other methods of water tightness shall be pre-approved STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 43 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO by the Architect and Aquatic Designer. 3.5 INTERIOR FINISHES A. Apply per manufacturer's instruction and as outlined in Division 2 of this Section. B. Installation: Do not apply outdoors if rain is imminent and temperatures are below 60º degrees, or during windy conditions. C. Final surface should be smooth, slip resistant, dense, free of stains, flush with other surfaces and uniform in appearance. D. Ensure that interior finish is protected from elements during curing process. E. Add water to pool as outlined per manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 INSERTS AND ANCHOR SOCKETS A. Provide stainless steel anchors with electric grounding lug for pool accessories and set prior to pouring or shotcreting. Confirm compatibility of deck equipment and deck anchors with equipment manufacturers. Coordinate deck anchor setting with concrete deck contractor. All anchors or sockets shall be furnished with flush closure cap when intermittent use is predicted. Provide stainless steel escutcheons for all penetrations. B. Wedge anchors for all railings and grab rails shall be brass body, 4 ¼" depth, tapering inward at the upper end. The cavity shall house a removable bronze wedge with a stainless steel adjustment bolt and washer. Anchor shall be suitable for use with 1.90 OD tube size. C. Anchor for handicap lift shall be stainless steel socket. Install in accordance with manufacturer instructions and provide the concrete foundation reinforcing required to properly anchor and support unit for its intended use. Provide completely flush cover for times when lift is not in use. 3.7 DECK, CLEANING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT A. Incorporate pool steps, ladders, handrails and/or recessed stairwells into the pool as shown on the drawings. All installations shall be square, flush, and plumb. B. Install all deck, cleaning, and safety equipment in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations; as required by Department of Public Health and any other authorities with jurisdiction, and as approved by Architect and Aquatic Designer. 3.8 AQUATICS FEATURES CONTROL PANELS A. All control components shall be mounted in accordance with all applicable codes and shall be accessible for operator use and serviceability. B. Panels shall be securely mounted on a clean, finished surface. Control components shall be labeled with a pre-printed, labels or signage suitable for the environment. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 44 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO Hand written labels are not acceptable. 3.9 OPERATIONAL START-UP A. Work included: At the completion of the aquatic installation and filling of the aquatic features, the Pool Contractor shall perform testing, adjusting and balancing of all pools related systems provided under Division 13150. Once the system is balanced, an operations report must be included in the operations manual of proper adjustment of control devices in order to operate aquatic components per design documents and code compliant conditions. B. Investigate pool circulation system: Adjust flows and temperatures indicated. Mark final setting for each of the following in the report. 1. Valve settings. 2. Automatic Control Valves, operational. 3. Pump Rotation. 4. Pump Voltage; actual AMP’s vs. maximum allowable on each phase and thermal overload size. 5. Pump Suction and Discharge Pressures, GPM. 6. Filter Flow and Backwash Rates, GPM / s. f. 7. Heater Transfer Devices; flow rates entering and discharging water temperatures. 8. Heater Combustion Air and Flues, functioning properly. 9. Skimmers or Gutter Flows Balance and Components, operational. 10. Wall and Floor Inlets Velocity and GPM, correctly adjusted. 11. Automatic Fail Safes, operate correctly. 12. Gauges and Controls, functioning properly. C. Test Run: To verify that the system installation is complete and will operate satisfactorily, facilitate a test run of all equipment per normal operation conditions and sequencing. Run test, operate and adjust equipment as may be required during test. Simulate power outages and normal experienced operation abnormalities to verify all fail safe controls are working properly. Pool Contractor will be responsible for operation, equipment and materials during this test. D. Acceptance: As a condition of final acceptance, the Owner reserves the right to require the Pool Contractor to spot check the report in their presence to verify and authenticate the findings. Final acceptance will not be made until a satisfactory report is received and the Owner is confident of it content. 3.10 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. The Contractor shall supply the services of an experienced swimming pool operator instructor for a period of not less than three days after the pool has been filled all systems completed, balanced, and initially placed in operation. During this period, the Owner's designated representative shall be thoroughly instruction in all phases of the pool's operation. B. Contractor shall videotape instruction of all operations and provide Owner with one (1) copy. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS 13150 - 45 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO C. Prior to this instructor leaving the job, he shall obtain written certification from the Owner's designated representative acknowledging that the instruction period has been completed and all necessary operating information provided. D. Contractor shall deliver four complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions for the swimming pools structures, finishes, and all component equipment to the Owner. Including, but not limited to the following: 1. Bound together in a complete manual. 2. All equipment cut sheets. 3. Accurate parts lists. 4. Pool start-up and pool closing instructions. 5. Operations manuals will be laid out with a minimum of the following items: a. Index. b. Each pool section containing detailed equipment operation guide and major components operations individually written for each component grouping. c. Water chemistry section detailed operations guide, safety section, major components operations, and water test log complying with local codes. d. Deck equipment. e. Trouble shooting. f. Seasonal start up and shutdown procedures. E. All valves must be permanently plastic tagged along with valve legend and explanation. F. Trouble shooting information. G. A wall-mounted color-coded piping flow diagram shall be installed in equipment room. Diagram to be engraved on laminated plastic with color-coded piping to match color- coding on piping and including valves identified with number or name on tag. 3.11 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION A. After work of this section has been completed, cleanup work area and remove all equipment, excess materials, and debris. Protect pool from damage until time of final completion. Remove and replace finishes, which are chipped, cracked, abraded, improperly adhered, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 13150 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO SECTION 14210 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes electric traction passenger and service elevators. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for the following: a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Hoist beams. c. Divider beams. d. Structural-steel shapes for subsills. e. Pit ladders. 3. Division 15 Sections for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers. 4. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including disconnect switches at machine room door. 5. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for telephone service to elevators. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section. B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. C. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for the following: 1. Car enclosures and hoistway entrances. 2. Operation, control, and signal systems. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. H. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Service agreement specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators, including hydraulic passenger elevators specified in another Division 14 Section, through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cabs, and entrances, manufactured by a single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1 and elevator design requirements for earthquake loads in ASCE 7. 1. Reference Structural Drawings for design criteria. D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in ICC A117.1. E. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to UL 10B. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO B. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Handle according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage, deterioration, or soiling. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work. C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and hoistways. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: Four hours or less. B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Electric traction elevator systems are based on Gen2 Gearless Traction Elevators, Otis Elevator Co. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Fujitec America, Inc. 2. Schindler Elevator Corp. 3. ThyssenKrupp Elevator. 2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete system. B. Elevator Machines: Provide variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines. Provide solid-state power converters. C. Provide regenerative systems. Non-regenerative systems will not be accepted.Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Section. D. Guides: Provide roller guides or polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each group of elevators as required to provide type of operation system indicated. B. Group Automatic Operation with Demand-Based Dispatching: Provide group automatic system that assigns cars to hall calls based on a dispatching program designed to minimize passenger waiting time. System automatically adjusts to changes in demand for different traffic conditions including heavy incoming, heavy two-way, heavy outgoing, and light off- hours as variations of normal two-way traffic. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Otis Elevator Co.; Elevonic (Duplex Collective). C. Group Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators and elevator groups where indicated: 1. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, cars are returned to a designated floor and parked with doors open. One car is returned at a time, with STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO priority given to loaded cars. If a car cannot be returned after two attempts, it is removed from the system. When all cars have been returned or removed from the system, one car is automatically placed in service. If car selected for service cannot operate within 60 seconds, the system removes car from service and places another car in service. Cars can be manually put in service on standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at Manual operation causes automatic operation to cease. 2. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, doors will begin closing. 3. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while the car load is less than a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls and predetermined weight can be adjusted. 4. Loaded-Car Bypass: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, car will respond only to car calls, not to hall calls. 5. Distributed Parking: When cars are not required for response to calls, they are parked with doors closed, distributed in predetermined zones throughout the building. One zone shall include the main floor and adjacent floors; remaining floors shall be divided into approximately equal zones. D. Security Features: Provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. 1. Card-Reader Operation: System uses card readers at car control stations to authorize calls. Security system determines which landings and at what times calls require authorization by card reader. Provide required conductors in traveling cable and panel in machine room for interconnecting card readers, other security access system equipment, and elevator controllers. Card reader devices furnished and installed by others. Elevator Contractor to coordinate. a. . 2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy. 2.5 FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. E. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. 2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific finish material selections. B. General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1. 2. Provide finished car including materials and finishes specified below. C. Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Floor Finish: Specified in a Division 9 Section Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless- steel sheet . 3. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 4. Metallic-Finish, Plastic-Laminate Ceiling: Flush panels, with L.E.D. downlights. 5. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated. 2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless- steel sheet 3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 4. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs. B. Car Control Station: Provide manufacturer's standard car control station Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush- mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. D. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel. 3. Manufacturer's wall-mounted standard units, for mounting above entrance frames. F. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station, unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 ELEVATORS A. Elevator Description, Elevators A-1, B-2: 1. Type: Gearless traction. 2. Machine Location: Not required ; equipment within elevator enclosure. 3. Rated Load: 3500 lb 4. Rated Speed: 350 fpm 6. Operation System: Duplex collective operation Group automatic operation] 7. Auxiliary Operations: a. Standby power operation. b. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. c. Nuisance call cancel. d. Loaded-car bypass. e. Distributed parking. 8. Security Features: Card-reader operation Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 77” from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 60” from back wall to front wall (return panels). c. Nominal Car Height: 93” inches. d. Car Fixtures: Otis, Standard Series, Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish e. Floor recessed and prepared to receive stone tile (specified in Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile"). STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 9. Hoistway Entrances: a. Width: 42 inches. b. Height: 84 inches Type: Single-speedside sliding . c. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours. d. FramesSatin stainless steel, No. 4 finish e. Doors Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish f. Sills Aluminum, mill finish 10. Hall Fixtures Otis, Standard Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish Additional Requirements: a. Provide blanket hooks and one complete set of full-height protective blankets for each car. B. Elevator Description, Elevators A-2, B-1: 1. Type: Gearless traction. 2. Machine Location: See Drawings . 3. Rated Load: 3500 lb 4. Rated Speed: 350 fpm 5. Operation System: Duplex collective operation 6. Auxiliary Operations: a. Standby power operation. b. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. c. Nuisance call cancel. d. Loaded-car bypass. e. Distributed parking. 7. Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 77” from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 60” inches from back wall to front wall (return panels). c. Nominal Car Height: 117 inches. d. Car Fixtures: Otis, Standard Series, Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish e. Floor recessed and prepared to receive stone tile (specified in Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile"). 8. Hoistway Entrances: a. Width: 42 inches b. Height: 84 inches c. Type: Single-speed side sliding e. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours. f. Frames Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish g. Doors Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. h. Sills Aluminum, mill finish . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 9. Hall Fixtures Otis, Standard Series, Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish Additional Requirements:. a. Provide blanket hooks and one complete set of full-height protective blankets for each car. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and conditions were found to be satisfactory. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to minimize transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby minimize structure- borne noise from elevator system. D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers. E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 PROTECTION [by G.C.] A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator in each tower. Comply with the following requirements for each elevator used for construction purposes: 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage. 2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. 4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate elevator(s). Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." B. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. C. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. END OF SECTION 14210 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevator. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for the following: a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Hoist beam. c. Structural-steel shapes for subsills. d. Pit ladder. 3. Division 15 Sections for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers. 4. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including disconnect switches at machine room door. 5. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for telephone service to elevators. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section. B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for the following: 1. Car enclosures and hoistway entrances. 2. Operation, control, and signal systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Include large-scale layout of car control station. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. H. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Service agreement specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators, including electric traction passenger elevators specified in another Division 14 Section, through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide major elevator components, including pump-and-tank units, plunger-cylinder assemblies, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cabs, and entrances, manufactured by a single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1 and elevator design requirements for earthquake loads in ASCE 7. 1. Reference Structural Drawings for design criteria. D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in ICC A117.1. E. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to UL 10B. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Handle according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage, deterioration, or soiling. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work. C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: Four hours or less. B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Hydraulic elevator systems are based on Holeless Hydraulic Hydrofit Elevator, Otis Elevator Co. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Fujitec America, Inc. 2. Schindler Elevator Corp. 3. ThyssenKrupp Elevator. 2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete system. B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide the following: 1. Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, suspended inside oil tank from vibration isolation mounts. 2. Provide motor with solid-state starting. C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit. D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. E. Hydraulic Fluid: Elevator manufacturer's standard fluid with additives as needed to prevent oxidation of fluid, corrosion of cylinder and other components, and other adverse effects. F. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Section. G. H. Guides: Provide sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or polymer-coated, nonlubricated guides. 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator as required to provide type of operation system indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. 2.1 FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. E. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. G. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications and Type BKV for panel backing. 2.2 CAR ENCLOSURES A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific finish material selections. 1. General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, 2. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1. 3. Provide finished car including materials and finishes specified below. B. Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Floor Finish: Specified in a Division 9 Section Painted Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless- steel sheet Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 3. Metallic-Finish, Plastic-Laminate Ceiling: Flush panels, with four (4) L.E.D. downlights. 4. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated on rear wall. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.3 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel 3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors. 4. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 2.4 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car control station. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door. 1. Mark buttons and switches with standard identification for required use or function that complies with ASME A17.1. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. 2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car control station, either integral with car control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush- mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. D. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in entrance jamb face Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO F. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide standard signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 ELEVATORS A. Elevator Description: 1. Elevator Number(s): A-3. 2. Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, single-acting dual cylinder. 3. Rated Load : 2500 lb 4. Rated Speed: 125 fpm 5. Operation System: Single automatic operation. 6. Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 77” from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 51” from back wall to front wall (return panels). c. Inside Height: 93” to underside of ceiling. d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Otis, Standard Series, Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish Floor recessed and prepared to receive ceramic tile (specified in Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile"). 7. Hoistway Entrances: a. Width: 42 inches b. Height: 84 inches c. Type: Single-speed side sliding d. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours. 8. Hall Fixtures Satin stainless steel, No. 4 9. Additional Requirements: a. Provide blanket hooks complete set of full-height protective blankets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and conditions were found to be satisfactory. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides. B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. D. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent-cemented fittings. E. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. F. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. G. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. H. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 PROTECTION 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate elevator(s). Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." B. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. C. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. END OF SECTION 14240 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CHUTES 14560 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 14560 - CHUTES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Waste chutes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal supporting framework at floor penetrations. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for roof vent flashing and counterflashing. 3. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs. 4. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for annular spaces at doors, floors, or roofs. 5. Division 15 Sections for fire sprinklers. 6. Division 15 Sections for water-service connections. 7. Division 16 Sections for electrical-service connections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail chute assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal and control wiring. C. Product Certificates: For each type of chute, signed by product manufacturer. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For chutes to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Provide chutes complying with NFPA 82. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CHUTES 14560 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Intake Door: Class B labeled; 1-1/2-hour fire rated. 3. Discharge Door: Class B labeled; 1-hour fire rated. 4. Access Door: Class B labeled; 1-1/2-hour fire rated. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Wilkinson Hi-Rise Chutes or one of the following manufacturers: 1. U.S. Chutes. 2. Valiant Products, Inc. 3. Midland 2.2 CHUTES A. Chute Metal: Aluminum-coated, cold-rolled, commercial steel sheet; ASTM A 463/A 463M, Type 1 with not less than T1-40 coating . 1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (nom. 16 gauge) . B. Size: 24-inch diameter. 2.3 DOORS A. Intake Door Assemblies: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 stainless-steel, self-closing units with positive latch and latch handle; as required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated; and with frame suitable for enclosing chase construction. 1. Door Type: Hopper , bottom hinged , self closing. 2. Size: Manufacturer's standard size for door type, chute type, and diameter indicated, but no less than 15 inches by 18 inches. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard satin or No. 3 directional polish. 4. Baffles : Rubber-back draft baffles at each intake. 5. Accessible Automatic Door operating system: manufacturers standard system complying with ADA-ABA accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. a. The doors shall be operated with one hand, not required tight grasping or twisting of the wrist. And with 5lbs of force or less. b. Lever handle on door. 6. Interlock system operated from discharge door to automatically lock intake doors. 7. Electrical Interlocks: Interlock system that is energized by opening one intake door; remaining doors automatically lock when system is energized. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CHUTES 14560 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Discharge-Door Assemblies: Aluminum-coated-steel doors as required to provide fire- protection ratings indicated; equipped with fusible links that cause doors to close in the event of fire. 1. Direct Vertical Discharge: Provide inclined, horizontally rolling, shutter-type unit. C. Heat-Detector System: Interlock system with temperature-rise elements that locks chute doors when temperature in chute reaches a predetermined, adjustable temperature. D. Access Door Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 302/304 stainless-steel doors; as required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated; with frame suitable for enclosing chase construction; and in satin or No. 3 directional polish finish. E. Manual Control System: Control system with manual switches that lock doors of chute during shutdown hours and service operations. Locate manual control station as indicated, or if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fire Sprinklers: NPS 1/2 fire sprinklers ready for piping connections. B. Sanitizing Unit: NPS 3/4 disinfecting and sanitizing spray head unit located in chute above highest intake door, including 1-gal. tank and adjustable proportioning valve with bypass for manual control of sanitizing and flushing operation, ready for hot-water piping connection, and with access for head and piping maintenance. C. Intake Door Baffles: Rubber baffles, 1/8 inch thick. D. Sound Dampening: Manufacturer's standard exterior mastic coating on chute. 1. Sound and vibration isolator pads at floor supporting frames. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Factory-assemble chutes to greatest extent practical with continuously welded or lock-seamed joints without bolts, rivets, or clips projecting on chute interior. Include intake- door assemblies and metal supporting framing at each floor, and chute expansion joints between each support point. B. Roof Vent: Fabricate vent unit to extend 48 inches above roof with full-diameter, screened vent and metal safety cap or glass explosion-release cap. Fabricate with roof-deck flange, counterflashing, and clamping ring of nonferrous metal compatible with chute metal. C. Fire Sprinklers: Comply with NFPA 13. Locate fire sprinklers at or above the top service opening of chutes, within the chute at alternate floor levels in buildings more than two stories tall, and at the lowest service level. D. Equipment Access: Fabricate chutes with access for maintaining equipment located within the chute, such as flushing and sanitizing units, fire sprinklers, and plumbing and electrical connections. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CHUTES 14560 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with NFPA 82 requirements and with chute manufacturer's written instructions. Assemble components with tight, nonleaking joints. Anchor securely to supporting structure to withstand impact and stresses on vent units. Install chute and components to maintain fire-resistive construction of chute and enclosing chase. B. Install chutes plumb, without offsets or obstructions that might prevent materials from free falling within chutes. C. Anchor roof flanges of chute vents before installing roofing and flashing. Install chute-vent counterflashing after roofing and roof-penetration flashing are installed. D. Intake and Discharge Doors: Interface door units with throat sections of chutes for safe, snag-resistant, sanitary depositing of materials in chutes by users. 1. Interconnect sanitizer control with door interlock system. E. Electrical Interlock System: Comply with applicable NECA 1 recommendations. F. Test chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks, and interlock systems to demonstrate that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is connected correctly. Complete test operations before installing chase enclosures. G. Test fire sprinklers and heat- and smoke-sensing devices for proper operation. H. Operate sanitizing unit through one complete cycle of chute use and cleanup, and replenish chemicals or cleaning fluids in unit containers. 3.2 CLEANING A. After completing chase enclosure, clean exposed surfaces of chute system's components. Do not remove labels of independent testing and inspecting agencies. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate use of chute and equipment to Owner's personnel. B. Demonstrate replenishment of sanitizing-unit chemicals or cleaning fluids. END OF SECTION 14560